Sony SRW-9000 Operation Manual

HD CAMCORDER
SRW-9000
Sony Corporation
SRW-9000
(SY)
4-160-062-05 (1)
Printed on recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
2012.01 32
© 2009
HD CAMCORDER
SRW-9000
HD-SDI EXPANSION BOARD
HKSR-9001
PICTURE CACHE BOARD
HKSR-9002
FILTER SERVO UNIT
HKSR-9004
OPERATION MANUAL [English]
1st Edition (Revised 4)
Before operating the unit, please read this
manual thoroughly and retain it for future
reference.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, do not expose this
apparatus to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing
to qualified personnel only.
Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
In order to use this product safely, avoid
prolonged listening at excessive sound
pressure levels.
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
2
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For the customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference
(Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility
(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
Hereby, Sony Corporation, declares that this
SRW-9000/HD Camcorder is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of the Directive 1999/5/
EC.
For details, please access the following URL:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Con la presente Sony Corporation dichiara
che questo SRW-9000/HD Camcorder è
conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva
1999/5/CE.
Per ulteriori dettagli, si prega di consultare il
seguente URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Por medio de la presente Sony Corporation
declara que el SRW-9000/HD Camcorder
cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables
o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Para mayor información, por favor consulte
el siguiente URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Hierbij verklaart Sony Corporation dat het
toestel SRW-9000/HD Camcorder in
overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen
en de andere relevante bepalingen van
richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Nadere informatie kunt u vinden op: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Härmed intygar Sony Corporation att denna
SRW-9000/HD Camcorder står I
överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta
bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/
5/EG.
För ytterligare information gå in på följande
hemsida: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Sony Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento
SRW-9000/HD Camcorder je ve shode se
základními požadavky a dalšími príslušnými
ustanoveními smernice 1999/5/ES.
Podrobnosti lze získat na následující URL:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Sony Corporation kinnitab käesolevaga
seadme SRW-9000/HD Camcorder
vastavust 1999/5/EÜ direktiivi põhinõuetele
ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele
asjakohastele sätetele.
Üksikasjalikum info: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Sony Corporation declara que este SRW9000/HD Camcorder está conforme com os
requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Para mais informacoes, por favor consulte a
seguinte URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Undertegnede Sony Corporation erklærer
herved, at følgende udstyr SRW-9000/HD
Camcorder overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
For yderligere information gå ind på følgende
hjemmeside: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Sony Corporation vakuuttaa täten että SRW9000/HD Camcorder tyyppinen laite on
direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen
mukainen.
Halutessasi lisätietoja, käy osoitteessa: http:/
/www.compliance.sony.de/
Sony Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret
SRW-9000/HD Camcorder er i samsvar med
de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
For flere detaljer, vennligst se: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
3
For the customers in Taiwan only
AVERTISSEMENT
Afin de réduire les risques
d’incendie ou d’électrocution, ne
pas exposer cet appareil à la
pluie ou à l’humidité.
Afin d’écarter tout risque
d’électrocution, garder le coffret
fermé. Ne confier l’entretien de
l’appareil qu’à un personnel
qualifié.
Une pression acoustique excessive en
provenance des écouteurs ou du casque
peut provoquer une baisse de l’acuité
auditive.
Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité,
évitez l’écoute prolongée à des pressions
sonores excessives.
Pour les clients au Canada
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
108-0075 Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
4
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Pour les clients en Europe
Ce produit portant la marque CE est
conforme à la Directive sur la compatibilité
électromagnétique (EMC) émise par la
Commission de la Communauté
européenne.
La conformité à cette directive implique la
conformité aux normes européennes
suivantes:
• EN55103-1 : Interférences
électromagnétiques (émission)
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique
(immunité)
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les
environnements électromagnétiques
suivants : E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et
industrie légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de
télévision).
Par la présente Sony Corporation déclare
que l’appareil SRW-9000/HD Camcorder est
conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive
1999/5/CE.
Pour toute information complémentaire,
veuillez consulter l’URL suivante: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
108-0075 Japon.
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la
sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question
concernant le service ou la garantie, veuillez
consulter les adresses indiquées dans les
documents de service ou de garantie
séparés.
WARNUNG
Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder
elektrischen Schlägen zu
verringern, darf dieses Gerät
nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit
ausgesetzt werden.
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit)
Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen
Umgebungen: E1 (Wohnbereich), E2
(kommerzieller und in beschränktem Maße
industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im
Freien) und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich,
z.B. Fernsehstudio).
Hiermit erklärt Sony Corporation, dass sich
das Gerät SRW-9000/HD Camcorder in
Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
Weitere Informationen erhältlich unter: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
108-0075 Japan.
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und
Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen
Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst
oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in
den separaten Kundendienst- oder
Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten
Anschriften.
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse
nicht geöffnet werden.
Überlassen Sie
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal.
Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und
Kopfhörern kann Gehörschäden
verursachen.
Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden,
vermeiden Sie längeres Hören bei sehr
hohen Schalldruckpegeln.
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CEKennzeichnung und erfüllt die EMVRichtlinie der EG-Kommission.
Angewandte Normen:
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview
Features ...................................................................................................... 11
Example System Configuration................................................................ 13
Locations and Functions of Parts .............................................................
Front Panel ......................................................................................
Left Side ..........................................................................................
Right Side........................................................................................
Display/Menu Operations Section ..................................................
Rear Panel .......................................................................................
Upper Panel.....................................................................................
Control Panel...................................................................................
Display ............................................................................................
AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional) .....................................................
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
25
27
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connecting a Power Supply ......................................................................
Using a Battery Pack.......................................................................
Using AC Power .............................................................................
Turning on the Power......................................................................
Checking the Power and Voltage....................................................
28
28
29
29
29
Mounting the Lens ..................................................................................... 30
Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................................................... 32
Connecting Audio Input............................................................................ 33
Using a Microphone........................................................................ 33
Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment ....................................... 33
Connecting an Audio Multiplexer (MUX) to the AUX IN Connector
(When Using the HKSR-9001)................................................. 34
Mounting on a Tripod ............................................................................... 35
Attaching the Control Panel ..................................................................... 36
Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional)....................................... 38
Setting the Built-in Clock .......................................................................... 39
6
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Selecting the Basic Operation Mode ........................................................ 40
Overview of the Basic Operation Modes ........................................ 40
Switching between the Basic Operation Modes.............................. 40
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay...........................................................
Basic Operations in the Subdisplay.................................................
Shutter Settings ...............................................................................
Using the Ramp Function................................................................
Selecting the Video Formats ...........................................................
Displaying the Filter Status.............................................................
Selecting Gain, Color Temperature, and White Balance Values ....
Selecting a Lens File .......................................................................
Checking the Operating Status of the VTR Module .......................
Checking Timecode and the Remaining Tape Time.......................
Setting the Timecode Generator Value to XX:00:00:00.................
Checking the Power Voltage and Selecting the Fan Mode.............
Character Data On and Off .............................................................
Assigning Functions to Assignable Buttons/Switch .......................
Adjusting the Brightness of the Subdisplay ....................................
Selecting Gamma Tables.................................................................
Selecting Pages to Display in the Subdisplay .................................
41
41
42
45
46
47
47
49
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
Adjusting the Black Balance..................................................................... 54
Adjusting the White Balance (in Custom Mode) .................................... 55
Setting the Camera Outputs .....................................................................
Selecting Video Output Signals for the Connectors .......................
Setting the Monitor Picture .............................................................
Outputting Color Bars .....................................................................
Outputting Rec Trigger Signals ......................................................
56
56
57
59
60
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder ..............................
Viewing the Basic Status ................................................................
Viewing the ABNORMAL <!> Display.........................................
Viewing the FUNCTION (Format/Switch Function)/SYSTEM
(System Settings/FILTER ASSIGN) Display...........................
Specifying and Displaying Markers................................................
Making Viewfinder Detail Adjustments .........................................
Displaying Zebra Patterns ...............................................................
Specifying and Displaying Cursors.................................................
Checking the Power Supply Voltage ..............................................
61
61
63
64
65
66
66
67
68
Detailed Function Settings ........................................................................ 69
Setting the Gain.......................................................................................... 70
Detailed Shutter Settings........................................................................... 71
Restoring Factory Default Settings .......................................................... 72
Table of Contents
7
Selecting the Gamma .................................................................................
Using the Standard Gamma ............................................................
Using HyperGamma........................................................................
Using S-LOG ..................................................................................
Using User Gamma .........................................................................
73
73
73
74
75
Inverting the Camera Picture................................................................... 76
Display Settings .......................................................................................... 76
Detailed Video Format Settings................................................................ 77
Setting the Video Format in the Camera Menu .............................. 77
Setting the Video Format in the VTR Menu................................... 78
Relation between Playback and Recording Signals and Video Monitor
Output Signals........................................................................... 79
Power Saving Mode ................................................................................... 81
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
About Cassettes .......................................................................................... 82
Loading and Unloading Cassettes................................................... 82
Preventing Accidental Erasure........................................................ 83
Recording....................................................................................................
Setting System Signal Format.........................................................
Making Audio Signal Settings ........................................................
Setting Recording Audio Levels .....................................................
Making Timecode and User Bits Settings.......................................
Shooting ..........................................................................................
Continuous Recording.....................................................................
83
83
85
86
87
90
90
Playback – Checking the Recording ........................................................ 92
Preparing for Playback.................................................................... 92
Checking the Last Three Seconds of the Recording –Recording
Review ...................................................................................... 93
Checking the Recording on a Color Video Monitor –Playback in
Color ......................................................................................... 93
Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and/or Color Video
Monitor ..................................................................................... 94
Chapter 5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Timer Rec ................................................................................................... 95
Manual Timer Rec........................................................................... 95
Auto Timer Rec............................................................................... 96
Cache Rec ................................................................................................... 97
8
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Overview ..................................................................................................... 99
Overview of SR Motion Recording/Playback................................. 99
Operation Flow.............................................................................. 101
Target Frame Frequencies and Signal Formats............................. 101
Select FPS Function................................................................................. 106
Relation Between the Number of Frames Shot and the Number of
Playback Frames (Outline of Select FPS)............................... 106
Using the Select FPS Function...................................................... 107
Using the Ramp Function.............................................................. 110
Interval Frame Function......................................................................... 113
Relation Between the Number of Frames Shot and the Frame interval
(Outline of Interval Frame)..................................................... 114
Using the Interval Frame Function ............................................... 115
Using the Ramp Function.............................................................. 117
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Camera Menu Configuration ................................................................. 121
Basic Camera Menu Operations ............................................................ 123
Displaying Setting Pages............................................................... 124
Setting Menu Items ....................................................................... 125
Camera Menu List ...................................................................................
OPERATION Menu......................................................................
PAINT Menu.................................................................................
MAINTENANCE Menu ...............................................................
FILE Menu ....................................................................................
DIAGNOSIS Menu.......................................................................
127
127
141
150
161
166
Editing the USER Menu.......................................................................... 167
Creating New Pages ...................................................................... 167
Returning the USER Menu to the Factory Defaults...................... 170
VTR Menu Operations............................................................................ 170
Displaying VTR Menus ................................................................ 170
Changing Menu Settings ............................................................... 170
VTR Menu List ........................................................................................
TC (Timecode) Setup Menu..........................................................
VIDEO Setup Menu......................................................................
AUDIO Setup Menu .....................................................................
SYSTEM Setup Menu...................................................................
172
172
174
175
177
Table of Contents
9
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
File Configuration.................................................................................... 185
List of Items Stored in Files .................................................................... 187
File Operations.........................................................................................
Using a “Memory Stick”...............................................................
Storage and Retrieval of the Operator File ...................................
Registration and Retrieval of Lens Files.......................................
Storage and Retrieval of the Scene Files.......................................
Storage and Retrieval of Reference Files......................................
Reading User Gamma Curves.......................................................
Reading User MLUT Files............................................................
Storing OHB Files.........................................................................
Resetting to the Factory Defaults..................................................
189
189
190
190
191
192
193
193
193
194
Using the RM-B750..................................................................................
Connection ....................................................................................
Operating the Camera Menu .........................................................
Monitoring the Camera Image ......................................................
196
196
196
197
Appendixes
Warning System....................................................................................... 198
Warning/Error Messages ........................................................................
Warning and Error Messages Related to the Camera Module......
Error Messages Related to the VTR Module ................................
Warning Messages Related to the VTR Module...........................
200
200
201
202
Precautions ............................................................................................... 205
About a “Memory Stick” ........................................................................ 206
Maintenance and Inspections .................................................................
Head Cleaning...............................................................................
Condensation.................................................................................
Note About the Battery Terminal..................................................
207
207
207
207
About Recording/Playback Formats...................................................... 208
What Are Dual Link and 3G? ................................................................ 210
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE ....................... 212
Specifications............................................................................................ 212
Lip Sync Compensation .......................................................................... 215
Index.......................................................................................................... 216
10
Table of Contents
1 Overview
Features
The SRW-9000 is an HDCAM SR format
integrated camcorder.
It combines the high quality and high
performance of HDCAM SR recording with the
superior mobility of a compact camcorder. Its
features and performance make it ideal for
shooting in situations ranging from movie and
commercial production to studio programming,
television dramas, and documentaries.
Superior Picture Quality and High
Performance
High-performance digital recording in HDCAM
SR format
The SRW-9000 (called “this unit” below),
records and plays back component video signals
that comply with the MPEG-4 Studio Profile, an
international video signal compression standard.
It supports the standard 440 Mbps recording
format of the SRW series (HDCAM SR VTRs),
and also a double-speed 880 Mbps recording
format.1) It records up to 12 channels of
uncompressed audio signals (24 bits, sampling
frequency 48 kHz).
1) Double-speed recording
Double-speed recording is realized by doubling the
standard drum rotation and tape transport speeds,
allowing twice as much data to be recorded per unit of
time.
This enables recording of high-quality formats such as
1080/50P and 59.94P, and recording in RGB 4:4:4 HQ
mode.
3CCD imaging system with 2/3-inch progressive
CCDs and 14-bit A/D converter
The unit delivers high image quality through a
3CCD imaging system with 2/3-inch progressive
CCDs and a 14-bit A/D converter. The maximum
dynamic range is 800%.
Multi frame rate support
The unit supports a variety of 1080 formats for
the production of high-end content such as
movies, commercials, and broadcast
programming.
• 1080 × 1920 (progressive) formats:
23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF/50P/59.94P
• 1080 × 1920 (interlaced) formats: 50i/59.94i
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter
RGB 4:4:4 shooting and recording
Because of its high compatibility with computer
graphics and digital compositing systems, the
RGB 4:4:4 format opens up a wide range of
creative possibilities for applications such as
movie-making and commercial production. The
unit offers the same S-LOG gamma as with the
F35/F23 Digital Cinematography Camera, thus
ensuring wide dynamic range shooting.
User Gamma function
This unit inherits the User Gamma function of the
HDW-F900R HD Camcorder. This allows you to
load gamma curves created with the
CvpFileEditor.
The User Gamma function allows you to capture
a look that expresses your creative intentions.
Design and Shape
Compact body and low power consumption
This unit is about two times lighter than previous
HDCAM SR recording systems, and consumes
only about half as much power. Its compact size
and light weight enable capture by small camera
crews. Like previous HDCAM camcorders, it can
be powered by Sony BP-GL95 lithium ion battery
packs.
High compatibility with film camera accessories
Using the supplied riser plate, you can connect
industry standard ARRIFLEX movie camera
accessories such as bridge plates, matte boxes,
and follow focus units.
Instead of the riser plate, you can also attach the
supplied V-shoe plate. This allows you to use the
optional VCT-14 Tripod Attachment to mount
the unit on a tripod.
Features
11
Chapter 1 Overview
Assignable buttons/switch
The unit is equipped with 10 assignable buttons/
switch on the side panel. For easier operation
during shooting, you can assign frequently used
functions to these switches. You can also assign
basic VTR control functions such as STOP,
PLAY, and REW, which allows you to control
tape transport without using the control panel.
Rich Selection of Functions
Two operation modes: Cine and Custom
This unit offers two operation modes: Cine mode,
for film-like shooting, with adjustments normally
being made in post production, and Custom
mode, for users who wish to obtain a specific look
by adjusting parameters on the set.
Monitor output functions
The unit provides a wide range of monitor output
functions, including mixing of characters and
markers into monitor output, mixing of camera
and playback video, and separate gammas for
monitor and main line.
Down converter
A down converter is provided as a standard
feature, allowing you to monitor camera and VTR
playback video as SD composite on an SD
monitor.
1.5G Dual link output
Installation of the optional HKSR-9001 in this
unit enables output of 1.5G Dual Link signals
(RGB 4:4:4 or 4:2:2 1080/50P).
3G HDSDI output
Installation of the HKSR-9001 enables output of
3G Single Link signals, equivalent to 1.5G Dual
Link signals, over a single BNC cable.
SR Motion™ 1)
When the optional HKSR-9002 Picture Cache
Board is installed, SR Motion is available on this
unit. SR Motion allows you to obtain effects
similar to overcranking and undercranking on
film cameras by using HKSR-9002’s built-in
memory while maintaining the high picture
quality of HDCAM-SR (1920 × 1080) format.
SR Motion is available in Select FPS mode.
Select FPS enables variable-speed motion effects
by changing the frame frequency during
recording (Ramp function).
1) SR Motion is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
12
Features
Timer Rec
When the optional HKSR-9002 Picture Cache
Board is installed, a Timer Rec function is
available on this unit. This allows you to utilize
the memory in the option board to shoot images at
a specified interval. This enables time-lapse
recording and recording over long periods.
Cache Rec
When the optional HKSR-9002 Picture Cache
Board is installed, a Cache Rec function is
available on this unit. This function captures
about 200 frames of the video and audio that the
camera is currently shooting (or about 100 frames
in HQ mode) to the memory. Thus, when you
press the recording start button (if the unit is in
standby on mode and SR Motion is not being
used), the recording starts with the data stored
about 200 frames (or about 100 frames in HQ
mode) before.
Shutter control
When adjusting the electronic shutter, you can
display shutter settings as shutter angles (in
degrees) or shutter speeds (in seconds).
Image inversion function
The image inversion function allows you to
cancel out the image inversion that occurs when a
cine-lens converter is used.
Monitoring and recording AUX inputs
Installing the optional HKSR-9001 allows
monitoring and recording the 4:2:2 video signals
input to the AUX IN connector. You can select
the monitoring or recording target between the
camera picture and the AUX inputs by menu
setting.
Removable control panel
The control panel is independent of the unit,
allowing it to be installed in the most convenient
location in your operating environment. It can be
held in the hand and operated like a remote
controller.
AP-1 Assistant Panel (optional)
The optional AP-1 Assistant Panel provides the
same functions as the control panel on the right
side of the unit. It enables convenient control of
basic camera operations such as shutter control
(indication in degrees possible), gain and color
temperature settings (selection of Tungsten and
Daylight possible), timecode and tape remaining
checks, control of character display, and
Per-channel audio level adjustments
You can check peaks and adjust audio playback
and recording levels independently on all 12
audio channels.
Example System
Configuration
The figure below shows a camera system
configured around this unit. In this manual,
figures and explanations assume that you are
using the optional HDVF-C30WR HD Electronic
Viewfinder.
Chapter 1 Overview
assignment of functions to the assignable buttons/
switch.
For more information about attaching, connecting,
and using additional equipment and accessories, see
Chapter 2 “Preparations” (page 28) as well as the
operation manuals for the connected equipment.
AP-1 Assistant
Panel (optional)
Control panel
Main unit
Riser plate
V-shoe plate
Viewfinder
Name
HD Electronic
Viewfinder
Model name
HDVF-20A/C30WR
Viewfinder-related equipment
Name/purpose
Fog-proof filter
Eyepiece (high
magnification)
Magnification Part No.
—
1-547-341-11
–2.8D to
A-8262-537-A
+2.0D
Example System Configuration
13
Chapter 1 Overview
Name/purpose
Eyepiece (low
magnification)
Eyepiece
(aberration
compensation)
Eyepiece (×3
magnification)
Magnification Part No.
–3.6D to
A-8262-538-A
–0.8D
–3.6D to
A-8267-737-A
+0.4D
Remote control devices
–2.4D to
+0.5D
Purpose
HD video output
monitoring (HDSDI)
SD video output
monitoring (TEST
OUT)
Audio monitoring
(EARPHONES)
A-8314-798-A
Products for battery operation
Name
Battery Pack
Battery Charger
Model name
BP-GL95
BC-L70/M150
Model1 name
RM-B150/B750
Video and audio output devices
Name
HD video monitor
SD video monitor
Stereo headphones
Products for audio input
External video recorders
Name
UHF Synthesized
Tuner Unit
Microphone
Microphone Holder
HDSDI 4-Channel
Analog Audio
Embedder/
Disembedder
Name/purpose
HDSDI portable
recorder/player
HDSDI portable
digital video recorder
(Dual Link)
Model name
WRR-861
ECM-678/674
CAC-12
HD10AMA (AJA Video)
Products for AC power supply
Name
AC Adaptor
Model name
AC-DN2B/DN10
Data storage media
“Memory Stick PRO” and “Memory Stick PRO
Duo”
Products for tripod mounting
Name
Tripod Attachment
Bridge Plate
Model name
VCT-14
BP-8 (ARRIFLEX)
Expansion boards
Name
HD-SDI Expansion
Board
Picture Cache Board
Filter Servo Unit
14
Name
Remote Control Unit
Model name
HKSR-9001
HKSR-9002
HKSR-9004
Example System Configuration
Model name
nanoFlash (Convergent
Design)
SRW-1/SRPC-1
Front Panel
Filter selector (outer knob) settings and optical
CC (color conversion) filter selection
Setting knob
CC filter selection
A
3200K
B
4300K
C
5600K
D
6300K
E
ND 0.3 (1/ ND)
2
Chapter 1 Overview
Locations and Functions
of Parts
Filter selector (inner knob) settings and ND filter
selection
Setting knob
ND filter selection
1
CLEAR
2
ND 0.6 (1/ ND)
4
a VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)
Connect an optional viewfinder.
b Viewfinder shoe
Attach an optional viewfinder. You can adjust the
attachment position up and down.
For details, see “Attaching the Viewfinder” (page
32).
c Filter selector
The selector knobs switch between the unit’s
built-in filters.
3
ND 1.2 (1/16ND)
4
ND 1.8 (1/64ND)
5
CAP
You can use the filter label on the right side panel
to check the filters that are selected by the various
knob positions.
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
When the optional HKSR-9004 is installed, filters
can be electrically switched by the subdisplay or
the switch to which you have assigned the filter
switching function.
For details, see “Adjusting the White Balance (in
Custom Mode)” (page 55).
d LENS connector (12-pin)
If you mount an optional lens with a cable,
connect the cable to this connector. You can
control the functions of the lens through this
connector.
Note
Do not connect a device whose maximum rated current
is 1 A or higher to the LENS connector.
e Lens mount cap
Cover the lens mount with this cap when a lens is
not attached. The cover may be removed by
rotating the lens fixing lever upward.
f Lens fixing lever
Push the lever downward to secure the lens in the
lens mount. To remove the lens, pull up on the
lever.
Locations and Functions of Parts
15
g Lens mount
Chapter 1 Overview
Attach the lens. When no lens is mounted, keep
the lens mount cap fitted for protection from dust.
For details, see “Mounting the Lens” (page 30).
Left Side
e Power ON (])/OFF (1) switch and
indicator
Push the switch to the ON side to power the unit
on (the indicator lights). Push it to the OFF side to
power the unit off (the indicator goes out).
f EARPHONES jack and LEVEL knob
Use the jack to attach earphones or stereo
headphones equipped with a stereo miniplug, for
use in monitoring audio during recording and
playback. Adjust the audio level with the LEVEL
knob.
A warning sound is heard through the earphones
or headphones when an error occurs.
Note
Some L-type mini plugs cannot be connected. Use a
straight type mini plug.
For details on the warning tone, see “Warning
System” (page 198).
g AUDIO indicator
Lights when the audio level meters (see page 25)
exceed a certain level.
Shoulder pads
a Cassette insertion slot
Insert cassettes.
For details, see “Loading and Unloading Cassettes”
(page 82).
b CTRL (VTR) (control panel) connector
Connect the cable of the supplied control panel. A
short cable is connected when the unit is shipped
from the factory. You can exchange the short
cable for the supplied extension cable.
For details, see “Attaching the Control Panel” (page
36).
c Measure hook/focus reference mark (φ)
For actual measurement of the distance from a
subject, you can fix the end of a tape measure to
the hook.
A mark on the side panel (φ) indicates the
reference focus position.
d CTRL (CAM) (assistant panel)
connector
Connect the cable of the optional AP-1 Assistant
Panel.
For details, see “Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel
(Optional)” (page 38).
16
Locations and Functions of Parts
h HD SDI MON1 (HDSDI monitor output
1) connector (BNC type)
Output HDSDI signals for display on a monitor.
You can select/set the output signals in the
Camera menu (see page 56). The same signals are
output from the HD SDI MON2 connector on the
rear panel.
i EXT I/O (external control) connector
(5-pin)
Use the connector for control via RS-232C.
c LOCK switch
Right Side
Chapter 1 Overview
When slid to the right, locks the operation buttons
on the right-side panel.
If you wish, you can set this switch so that it locks
all buttons except the RUN button. Make this
setting on the <SUBDISPLAY 2> page (see page
121) of the Camera >USER (OPERATION)
menu.
d Assignable 4/AUTO BLK BAL (auto
black balance) switch
Push the switch downward to the AUTO BLK
BAL side to start the auto black balance
adjustment.
You can use the Camera menu to assign a
function to the 4 position (upper position). This
position is set to OFF (disabled) when the unit is
shipped from the factory.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Display/menu operations section (page 18).
e RUN button and indicator
a Assignable buttons 5 to 8
You can assign frequently used functions to these
buttons by menu settings. The following
functions are assigned when the unit is shipped
from the factory.
Switches
5
6
7
8
Functions
STOP
PLAY
REW
F.FWD
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
b Filter label and assignable buttons N
and C
The filter label show the filters selected by the
knobs of the front panel filter selector. You can
use the Camera menu to assign functions to
assignable buttons N and C. They are set to OFF
(disabled) when the unit is shipped from the
factory.
When the optional HKSR-9004 is installed, the
default values of the assignable buttons N and C
are ND and CC respectively.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Starts and stops recording. The indicator lights
during recording, and flashes when low voltage or
an error is detected.
For more information about the indicator operation,
see “Warning/Error Messages” (page 200).
f “Memory Stick” slot
Allows you to insert a “Memory Stick”.
The access lamp lights in red while the unit is
writing or reading data to/from a “Memory
Stick”. You can use “Memory Stick PRO” or
“Memory Stick PRO Duo” media with this unit.
(“Memory Stick PRO Duo” media can be used
without any adaptor.)
Note
When the access lamp is lit in red, do not insert/remove
the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit.
See “File Configuration” (page 185) for information
about data files that can be handled with “Memory
Stick” media.
For details on “Memory Stick” media, see “Using a
“Memory Stick”” (page 189).
g Tripod screw holes
Two screw holes (for 3/8-inch camera screws) are
provided on the bottom-side panel.
Locations and Functions of Parts
17
h Riser plate/focus reference mark (φ)
Chapter 1 Overview
This is a plate for attaching movie accessories. It
has a mark to show the focus standard position. A
wrench (2.5 mm) for use in attaching and
detaching the viewfinder is stored inside. When
you want to use a tripod with the optional VCT14 Tripod Attachment, exchange the riser plate
for the supplied V-shoe plate.
See “To use the optional VCT-14 Tripod
Attachment” (page 35) for more information about
attaching the V-shoe plate.
i Assignable buttons 1 to 3
You can assign frequently used functions to these
buttons by Camera menu settings. They are set to
OFF (disabled) when the unit is shipped from the
factory.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Display/Menu Operations Section
state. When the Camera menu is not displayed,
you can press this button to display information
about the status of the unit in the subdisplay and
viewfinder.
See “Viewing Settings and Indications in the
Viewfinder” (page 61) for details about the status
information that appears
c Subdisplay
Displays the Camera menu and unit settings. If
you are using the optional AP-1 Assistant Panel,
the same information appears in the subdisplay of
the AP-1.
d PAGE button
In subdisplay screens, switches to the next page
or confirms settings.
e MENU SEL (selection)/ENTER dial
In subdisplay and viewfinder screens, confirms
settings. When the Camera menu is displayed in
the subdisplay and viewfinder, turn the dial to
select menu items.
Note
When you turn the dial, stop it at a position where you
feel a click. If you force the dial to stop at a non-click
position, the operating stability of the dial on the AP-1
side may be affected.
f SET button
In subdisplay screens, returns to the previous
page. When this button is held down for one
second or longer, the screen enters settings
modification mode.
For details, see “Basic Operations in the
Subdisplay” (page 41) or “Basic Camera Menu
Operations” (page 123).
a VF (viewfinder) MENU/DISPLAY
button
Displays and hides menus in the subdisplay and
viewfinder.
b CANCEL/STATUS button
Cancels settings made in the subdisplay and
viewfinder, or returns the display to a previous
18
Locations and Functions of Parts
Rear Panel
f TEST OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs an analog signal selected in the Camera
menu (see page 56).
g DC OUT (DC power output) connector
(4-pin, male)
Chapter 1 Overview
Setup >OTHERS (MAIN) >TC OUT in the VTR
menu (see page 173).
Supplies 12 V DC power. You can connect the
power cord of the WRR-861 UHF Synthesized
Tuner Unit to this connector.
h DC IN 11-17V (DC power input)
connector (4-pin)
Connect the DC power cord of an AC-DN2B/
DN10 AC Adaptor.
For details, see “Connecting a Power Supply” (page
28).
a Battery attachment shoe
Attach a battery or AC adaptor.
For details, see “Connecting a Power Supply” (page
28).
b Tally indicator and ON/OFF switch
When the switch is set to ON, the tally indicator
lights during recording. The indicator flashes
when low voltage or an error is detected. You can
set the switch to OFF to prevent the indicator
from lighting or flashing.
See “Warning System” (page 198)” for more
information about when the tally indicator flashes.
c GENLOCK IN (external sync signal
input) connector (BNC type)
Used for input of an external genlock signal (HD
tri sync).
d TC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
Connect to the timecode output connector of a
timecode generator, VTR, or other external
device. Use this connector when you want to lock
the internal timecode generator to external
timecode.
e TC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
Connect to the timecode input connector of a
timecode reader, VTR, or other external device.
The output signal depends on the setting of TC
i AUDIO IN (audio input) CH-1/CH-2
connectors (XLR type 3-pin, female
type) and input selection switches
Input audio signals to the CH-1 and CH-2
connectors.
Set the input selection switches according to the
type of the connected signal source.
LINE: When a line-level (+4 dBu) signal source
is connected
MIC: When an external microphone is connected
(no power is supplied.)
MIC +48V ON: When an external microphone is
connected (+48 V power is supplied.)
j HD SDI OUT A/B connectors (BNC
type) and ON/OFF switch (when the
HKSR-9001 is installed)
When the switch is set to ON, HDSDI signals are
output from the A and B connectors. When the
switch is set to OFF, no signals are output.
See “What Are Dual Link and 3G?” (page 210) for
more information about HDSDI signal output.
k REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect an external control device, such as the
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.
l AUX IN (auxiliary input) connector
(BNC type) (when the HKSR-9001 is
installed)
1.5G single link (4:2:2 30PsF or less) HDSDI
signals can be input to this connector and
Locations and Functions of Parts
19
Chapter 1 Overview
recorded. Connect an external device to increase
the number of audio input channels, or to
synchronize this unit to the output of an HD
device.
When you use this connector for HDSDI input,
set SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT >INPUT SEL
(see page 179) in the VTR menu to AUX Input.
m HD SDI MON2 (HDSDI monitor
output 2) connector (BNC type)
Use in the same way as the HD SDI MON1
connector on the left-side panel (see page 16).
c Assistant panel attachment screws
Attach the optional AP-1 Assistant Panel or the
CAC-12 Microphone Holder.
For details, see “Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel
(Optional)” (page 38) or “Using a Microphone”
(page 33).
d Cable holder attachment screws
Attach the supplied cable holder to hold the cable
of the control panel or the optional AP-1 Assistant
Panel.
e Accessory attachment screw holes
Upper Panel
Control panel
(page 20)
You can attach accessories to the two screw holes
(3/8" × 1, 1/4" × 1).
f EJECT button
Pressing this button opens the lid of the cassette
insertion slot, allowing you to take out the
inserted cassette.
Control Panel
The control panel is used mainly for control of the
VTR module.
With control panel detached
a Lock release button
When removing the control panel, use this button.
a VTR menu selection buttons
For details, see “Attaching the Control Panel” (page
36).
Select one of the VTR menus or the Camera menu
to be shown on the display.
HOME button: Displays the HOME screen. The
HOME screen displays audio levels,
operating status, warnings, time data, and
other information.
TC button: Displays the TC (timecode) Setup
menu (see page 172). This menu allows you
to switch between LTC and VITC, to switch
between DF and NDF, and to display
timecode on an external monitor.
b Handle
Use to carry the unit.
You can attach an accessory to the seven screw
holes (3/8" × 4, 1/4" × 3) on the top of the handle.
You can also attach the CAC-12 Microphone
Holder to the side of the handle.
For details, see “Using a Microphone” (page 33).
20
Locations and Functions of Parts
For details on VTR menus, see “VTR Menu List”
(page 172).
b Display
Displays VTR menus, audio levels, warnings,
operating status, time data, remaining tape time,
and remaining battery power.
For details, see “Display” (page 25).
You can rotate the display to display it vertically
(rotated 90 degrees to the left).
To change the display, press the HOME button
while holding the FUNC and BACK buttons
down.
To return the display to its original orientation,
press the HOME button again while holding the
FUNC and BACK buttons down.
When the KEY INHI item in the SYSTEM Setup
menu is set to MAP, the operation buttons follow
the settings of the LOCAL KEYMAP item.
d LIGHT switch
The backlight comes on when this is set to ON.
e ADJUST knob
Use to adjust audio levels, etc.
Chapter 1 Overview
VIDEO button: Displays the VIDEO Setup
menu. The menu allows you to perform
Camera menu operations (see page 123).
AUDIO button: Displays the AUDIO Setup
menu (see page 175). This menu allows you
to make settings related to audio.
SYSTEM button: Displays the SYSTEM Setup
menu (see page 177). This menu allows you
to make settings related to the entire system,
such as recording format, power, and test
signal output.
f SELECT/ENTER dial
When a menu is displayed, you can turn this dial
to move the cursor, and press it to select and
confirm settings.
g BACK button
When a menu is displayed, you can press this
button to back up one level in the menu structure.
h Control panel connection cable
Connect to the CTRL (VTR) connector.
i EJECT button and indicator
Pressing the button opens the cover of the cassette
insertion slot so that you can remove a cassette.
The indicator lights during removal.
j FUNC (function) button and indicator
When the tape transport control buttons are
pressed with this button held down, the functions
of the buttons change.
The indicator lights when the FUNC button is
turned on.
For details, see “qa Tape transport control buttons”
(page 21).
Pressing the HOME button with this button held
down switches the display at the bottom of the
HOME screen.
For details, see “Display” (page 25).
c KEY INHI (inhibit) switch
When the KEY INHI item (see page 180) in the
SYSTEM Setup menu is set to ALL, setting this
switch to ON disables operation buttons, to
prevent misoperations due to accidental button
operations.
ON: All operation buttons are disabled.
OFF: During recording, only the STOP button
and PAUSE button are enabled. All buttons
are enabled when the unit is not in recording
mode.
k Tape transport control buttons
Use these buttons for tape transport
operations.The functions of the buttons change
when they are pressed together with the FUNC
button.
Locations and Functions of Parts
21
Chapter 1 Overview
Name
Pressed alone
STOP button
Stops tape transport.
Puts the unit into standby off mode.
Pressing this button while in
standby on mode resets the still
timer (see page 181). Pressing the
button while in standby off mode
puts the unit into standby on mode.
PLAY button and indicator Starts playback. (The indicator
lights during playback.) To start
recording, press this button with
the REC button held down.
Pressed with FUNC button
Pressed with tape transport stopped:
Searches for the recording end point and
then stops. When SYSTEM Setup
>SERVO >EOS MODE in the VTR
menu is set to “NORM” (factory default
setting), rewinds for about five seconds
and then plays for about 10 seconds. If
the recording end point is located in that
section, playback stops at that point and
the unit enters recording pause mode. If
the recording end point is not located in
that section, playback continues for
about 10 seconds and then stops. When
SYSTEM Setup >SERVO >EOS MODE
is set to “LONG”, the 10-second search
time limit described above does not
apply. Once playback starts, the search
continues until the recording end point is
found.
For details, see “Continuous recording
in other cases” (page 90).
Pressed with recording paused: Plays back
the most recently recorded material, and
then returns to recording pause mode
(recording review). When SYSTEM
Setup >SERVO >REC REVIEW in the
VTR menu is set to “NORM” (factory
default setting), one press of this button
rewinds the tape about three seconds and
then starts playback. You can keep the
PLAY button pressed together with the
FUNC button to rewind the tape as long
as the buttons are held down (up to a
maximum of 10 seconds), and then start
playback. Recording review allows you
to check whether the material was
recorded correctly. When SYSTEM
Setup >SERVO >REC REVIEW is set to
“ALL”, one press of this button rewinds
up to the beginning of the most recently
recorded cut and then starts playback.
Note
Recording review is available when recording
is paused after recording at least three
seconds.
22
Locations and Functions of Parts
Pressed alone
Pressed with FUNC button
REC button and indicator
Pressing PLAY button with this
button held down starts recording.
(The indicator lights during
recording.)
Pressing the button with recording
paused in standby off mode puts
the unit into standby on mode. If
you press this button during
playback, fast forward, or rewind,
Temporarily memorizes the time data of the
current position (Mark In). Mark In data is
displayed in the format “IN: xx:xx:xx:xx” in
the time data field of the display, and can be
used for cueup.
Note
The Mark In data is only temporarily
memorized in the unit’s internal memory. It is
the unit enters E-E mode. a) In this erased when you eject the cassette.
mode you can monitor E-E signals
Chapter 1 Overview
Name
b)
output from the HD SDI OUT
A/B connectors or the HD SDI
MON1/2 connectors.
REW (rewind) button and
indicator
F FWD (fast forward)
button and indicator
Rewinds the tape. (The indicator
lights during rewinding, and goes
out when the rewinding is
finished.)
When the REW button is pressed
again during rewinding, the
operation changes to search, in the
same way as when the button is
pressed together with the FUNC
button (searching at the speed in
effect when the most recent search
was interrupted).
Executes reverse direction searches. With
each press, the search speed changes in the
order × 2 t × 5 t × 8 t × 2 normal
speed.... If a search is interrupted by another
operation, the next search is performed at the
speed in effect at the time of the interruption.
Fast forwards the tape. (The
indicator lights during fast
forwarding, and goes out when the
fast forwarding is finished.) When
the F FWD button is pressed again
during fast forwarding, the
operation changes to search, in the
same way as when the button is
pressed together with the FUNC
button (searching at the speed in
effect when the most recent search
was interrupted).
Executes forward direction searches. With
each press, the search speed changes in the
order × 2 t × 5 t × 8 t × 2 normal
speed.... If a search is interrupted by another
operation, the next search is performed at the
speed in effect at the time of the interruption.
Note
When you are using the unit at the 880 Mbps
recording rate, × 8 normal speed search is
disabled.
For details on recording rates, see FORMAT
>SIGNAL in the SYSTEM Setup menu (page
178).
Note
When you are using the unit at the 880 Mbps
recording rate, × 8 normal speed search is
disabled.
For details on recording rates, see FORMAT
>SIGNAL in the SYSTEM Setup menu (page
178).
Locations and Functions of Parts
23
Chapter 1 Overview
Name
Pressed alone
Pressed with FUNC button
PAUSE button and
indicator
Pauses tape transport. (The
indicator flashes during pause.) To
resume tape transport, press the
button again.
Cues up a time data position specified with
FUNC+REC buttons or SYSTEM Setup
>EDIT >IN POINT in the VTR menu and
stops. The specified time data (Mark In data)
is displayed in the format “IN: xx:xx:xx:xx”
in the time data field of the display.
Turning the ADJUST knob during the paused
state performs jog search, and a shuttle still is
displayed whenever you stop turning. The
image and the TCR value may not always
match. Press the PAUSE button again to
return to the paused state.
Note
The Mark In data is only temporarily
memorized in the unit’s internal memory. It is
a) E-E mode: A state in which E-E (electric to electric) signals can be monitored. Commonly used to monitor the camera
picture or the input signal before either is recorded.
b) E-E signal: A signal which passes solely through internal circuitry, and not through pathways in which magnetic
conversion takes place, such as magnetic heads and tapes.
24
Locations and Functions of Parts
Display
This manual refers to the screen shown below as
the HOME screen.
Display the operation status of the unit and
warnings. The principal information items are as
follows.
TCR/TCG/UBR/UBG/CTL: Type of time data
being displayed.
LTC/VITC: When timecode is being displayed,
whether it is LTC or VITC. 1)
INTRP: Indicates that timecode could not be
read accurately, and has been interpolated.
DF/NDF: Whether the system is in DF (drop
frame) or NDF (non-drop frame) mode.
EXT-LK: Timecode is locked to external
timecode.
KEY INHI: The KEY INHI switch is set to ON.
REC INHI: The cassette is record inhibited.
SRW-9000(E): Model name display. “E” shows
that an enhanced processor is installed,
which allows recording in RGB 4:4:4 or
4:4:4 HQ 12bit format and using S-LOG
gamma.
When SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT >INPUT
SEL in the VTR menu is set to “Aux Input”
(with the optional HKSR-9001 installed),
“9000(E)¦AUX” is displayed.
[1]/[2]: Option board installation status. “1”
represents the HKSR-9001, and “2”
represents the HKSR-9002.
Chapter 1 Overview
When you press the HOME button with the
FUNC button held down, sections 4 to 7 are
replaced by the display shown in section 9.
b Operation status and warnings
1) VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code): Timecode
inserted into the vertical blanking interval. This type
of timecode can be read even during very slow
playback.
For details on warnings, see “Warning/Error
Messages” (page 200).
c Time data
a Audio level meters
Display recording audio levels in recording and
E-E modes. Display playback audio levels during
playback.The indications in the top row show the
audio input signal types.
The numbers 1 to 12 at the bottom are the
numbers of audio tracks on the tape.
Displays time data for the current tape position.
The type of time data is CTL 1) (tape running
time), timecode, or user bits, as selected with TC
Setup >TIMER SEL in the VTR menu (see page
172).
When Mark In data has been set by the FUNC +
REC buttons or SYSTEM Setup >EDIT >IN
POINT in the VTR menu, it is displayed in the
format “IN: xx:xx:xx:xx” beneath (right side) the
time data for the current tape position.
When no Mark In data has been set,
“IN: --:--:--:--” appears. When TC Setup
>OTHERS(MAIN) >LTC Delay and/or TC Setup
>OTHERS(MAIN) >VITC Delay in the VTR
menu are set to something other than “NO
Delay”, “IN DLY:” appears beneath (to the left
Locations and Functions of Parts
25
Chapter 1 Overview
side) the time data of the current position and the
LTC and/or VITC indicators light to indicate the
item(s) set to something other than “NO Delay”.
1) CTL signal: This is a control signal consisting of a
pulse signal recorded longitudinally on the tape for
every frame of video.
When the battery pack is almost exhausted, the
voltage indication and the tally indicator flash,
and a warning tone sounds intermittently. When
the battery pack is completely exhausted, the tally
indicator flashes at a higher rate and the warning
tone sounds continuously.
d Status
For details, see “Warning System” (page 198).
Displays the unit’s control status (LOCAL), the
POWER mode (EE), and the real time.
Upper row: Unit’s control status
Middle row: POWER mode
Lower row: Real time
For details on battery voltage and so on, see
“Checking the Power and Voltage” (page 29).
e Signal format
i Signal formats
Displays the format of recording signals.
When you press the HOME button with the
FUNC button held down, displays the system
(SYS), playback (PB), and monitor (MON)
output signal formats, in that order from the top
row.
When the unit is in one of the following modes,
an alphabetic character indicating the mode
appears before the number of lines.
T: Auto Timer Rec
M: Manual Timer Rec
C: Cache Rec
When SR Motion is used, “S” appears before the
system frequency. When you play a tape that was
recorded with SR Motion, the FPS value in SR
Motion recording is shown in the playback
frequency position (see page 101).
f Channel condition/RF indicator
During playback, “CH.COND” appears and one
of three bars (green, yellow, and red) lights to
indicate the playback signal condition.
Green bar: Playback signal quality is good.
Yellow bar: Playback signal quality is degraded,
but playback is possible.
Red bar: Playback signal quality is degraded. If
this continues, head cleaning or internal
inspection is needed.
During playback with manual tracking control,
the “CH.COND” indication flashes in yellow (see
page 93). “CH.COND” flashes during auto
tracking operation.
During recording, “RF” appears and a green bar
or a red bar lights to indicate the recording signal
condition. Normally the green bar lights. If a
recording problem occurs, the red bar lights.
Green bar: Recording signal quality is good.
Red bar: Recording signal quality is degraded. If
this continues, head cleaning or internal
inspection is needed.
g Remaining tape time
Displays the time remaining on the tape. “TOP” is
displayed at the start of the tape, and “END” is
displayed at the end.
The time display flashes when the tape is within
three minutes of the end.
h Battery level/external power supply
voltage and current
Displays the current power level of the battery
pack. When the battery pack is fully charged, all
seven segments light up. As the battery pack
discharges, the segments go out from left to right.
26
The voltage actually used by the unit (slightly
lower than the input voltage is shown.
Locations and Functions of Parts
See Chapter 6 “SR Motion (With HKSR-9002
Installed)” (page 99) for more information about the
SR Motion function.
j HDSDI output
When the optional HKSR-9001 is installed,
displays the signal formats of monitor output
(MON) and the output of the HD SDI OUT A/B
connectors (OUT). The display switches when
you press the HOME button with the FUNC
button held down.
See “What Are Dual Link and 3G?” (page 210) for
more information about HDSDI output.
k SR Motion
When SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT >SELECT
FPS in the VTR menu is set to “ON” and the
signal format is being displayed, pressing both the
FUNC and HOME buttons together displays the
FPS or FRM on the second line and the memory
level on the third line.
Chapter 1 Overview
See Chapter 6 “SR Motion (With HKSR-9002
Installed)” (page 99) for more information about the
SR Motion function.
AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional)
By connecting the cable to the CTRL (CAM)
connector, you can operate the unit remotely. You
can also connect the AP-1 Assistant Panel to the
unit’s left-side panel. The AP-1 provides the same
functions as the switches and buttons on the unit’s
right-side panel.
See “Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional)”
(page 38) for more information about attaching the
AP-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
q;
qa
Connection cable
LOCK switch (page 17)
VF MENU/DISPLAY button (page 18)
Assignable switches 1 to 3 (page 18)
CANCEL/STATUS button (page 18)
RUN button and indicator (page 17)
Assignable 4/AUTO BLK BAL switch
(page 17)
PAGE button (page 18)
SET button (page 18)
Subdisplay (page 18)
MENU SEL/ENTER dial (page 18)
Note
The cursor in the subdisplay may move
unexpectedly if you disconnect or connect the
AP-1 cable while operating the subdisplay. If a ?
symbol is shown on
the subdisplay, register the setting before
disconnecting or connecting the cable.
Locations and Functions of Parts
27
Chapter
2 Preparations
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connecting a Power
Supply
This unit operates on DC 12 V (11 to 17 V)
power. Supply power by connecting it directly to
a DC power source or by using a battery pack or
AC adaptor.
Note
For safety, use only the Sony products listed below.
• BP-GL95 Lithium-ion Battery Pack
• AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor
1Battery pack
2Align these lines.
Using a Battery Pack
When a BP-GL95 Battery Pack is used, the
continuous operating time is approximately 80
minutes.
2
Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching
line on the unit.
Notes
• The battery pack operating time depends on how often
the battery pack is used, and on the ambient
temperature when it is used.
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the specified
charger.
For details on the battery charging procedure,
refer to the battery charger operation manual.
• The battery pack may not be recharged fully if
you charge it immediately after use, while it is
still warm.
• Remove the battery pack if the unit will be out
of use for an extended period.
1“LOCK” arrow
2Matching line on the unit
WARNING
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
Note
To attach the battery pack
1
28
Press the battery pack against the back
of the unit, aligning the line on the side
of the battery pack with the matching
line on the unit.
Connecting a Power Supply
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal
may be damaged.
To detach the battery pack
With the unit powered off, hold the release button
in and pull the battery pack up.
• Do not remove the battery pack or disconnect the DC
power cord before the power goes off.
Checking the Power and Voltage
To check the type of power being used
Release button
Chapter 2 Preparations
A battery mark appears in the lower left of the
control panel display when power is being
supplied from the battery attachment section.
A power plug mark appears when an AC adaptor
is selected as the power supply.
Notes
• Be careful never to remove the battery pack during
recording and playback.
• Make sure to power the unit off before replacing the
battery pack.
Using AC Power
Use an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC adaptor.
Connect a DC power cord (not supplied) to this
unit’s DC IN 11-17V connector, and then connect
the AC power cord (supplied with the AC
adaptor) to an AC power source.
Turning on the Power
Note that this mark does not reflect the actual type
of power being used, but reflects the settings of
the following VTR menu items.
• SYSTEM Setup >BATTERY >BATT TYPE
• SYSTEM Setup >BATTERY >DCIN TYPE
A 15-segment bar graph (maximum value: 10 A)
displays the unit’s operating current.
The bar graph flashes red in the following cases.
• When the input current to the DC IN 11-17V
connector exceeds 9 A.
• When one of the unit’s internal power systems
has been disconnected.
To check the remaining battery power
Push the power ON (|)/OFF (1) switch to the ON
side. The power indicator lights when the unit is
powered on.
Power is supplied to the viewfinder connected to
the VF connector and to the lens connected to the
LENS connector, and 12 V power is supplied
from the DC OUT connector.
You can check the remaining battery power with
the battery level display.
Push the switch to the OFF side to power the unit
off. The indicator goes out when unit is powered
off.
As the battery pack discharges, the segments go
out from left to right.
When the battery pack is almost exhausted (Near
END), the voltage indication and the tally
indicator start to flash, and an intermittent
warning tone sounds in the headphones.
When the battery pack is completely exhausted
(END), the corresponding warning indication
lights, the tally indicator starts to flash at a higher
rate, and the headphones warning tone sounds
continuously.
Notes
• To protect tapes, do not power the unit off with a
cassette loaded. Always eject the cassette before
powering the unit off.
If you do power the unit off with a cassette loaded, the
power does not go off immediately. This is to protect
the tape. The power goes off after the tape has been
returned to the unthreaded position.
Connecting a Power Supply
29
You can use BATTERY (see page 184) of the
SYSTEM Setup menu to set the battery voltage
threshold values that trigger the END and Near
END warnings.
Chapter 2 Preparations
You can check the power voltage in the subdisplay, in
the viewfinder, and on an external monitor. For
details, see “Checking the Power Voltage and
Selecting the Fan Mode” (page 50) and “Viewing
Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder” (page
61)
For details on the warning tone, see “Warning
System” (page 198).
Mounting the Lens
Use an optional lens that conforms to the B4 (2/3")
lens mount.
For details on handling the lens, refer to the
operation manual for the lens.
1
Push the lens mount lever up and
remove the lens mount cap from the
lens mount.
Lens mount lever
2
Align the center pin on the lens with the
notch in the lens mount, and insert the
lens into the mount.
Lens mount securing rubber
T
1.6
2
ff
oo
60
30
20
15
12
10
8
6
5
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
CL
7
5.6
Notch
30
Mounting the Lens
3
Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
Caution
T
1.6
2
2.8
4
Connect the lens cable to the LENS
connector.
About three meters (10 ft)
For lens file selection on the subdisplay, see
“Selecting a Lens File” (page 49).
When you remount a serial lens, the
corresponding lens file is loaded automatically.
For details on lens files, see Chapter 8 “Storage and
Retrieval of User Setting Data” (page 185).
15
CL
12
10
8
7
1
Set the iris control to manual and open
the iris fully.
2
Place a flange focal length adjustment
chart approximately three meters (10
ft) from the unit and adjust the lighting
to get an appropriate video output level.
3
Loosen the Ff 1) ring lock screw.
4
With either manual or power zoom, set
the zoom ring to telephoto.
5
Point the camera at the chart and focus
on it by turning the focus ring.
6
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
7
Turn the Ff ring until the chart is in
focus, being careful not to disturb the
focus ring.
8
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays
in focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
9
Tighten the Ff ring lock screw.
To adjust the flange focal length
Adjustment of the flange focal length 1) is
necessary in the following situations:
• When you attach a lens for the first time
• When you exchange lenses
• When, during zooming, the focus is not sharp in
both telephoto and wide angle mode
60
30
20
16
6
To select a lens file
You can register lens files containing data such as
lens-specific compensation values. Then, when
you exchange lenses, you can perform the
required adjustments simply by loading a
registered lens file.
When you remount a non-serial lens after
registering a lens file for that lens, select the file
using the subdisplay.
ff
oo
4
5.6
8
11
Chapter 2 Preparations
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could cause
a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly
locked. It is recommended that the lens mount
securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as
illustrated above.
1) Ff: Abbreviation of flange focal length
1) Flange focal length: The distance between the lens
mount attachment plane and the imaging plan.
Note
The positions of the controls for adjusting the flange
focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check
them in the lens manual.
The procedure for adjusting the flange focal
length is as follows:
Mounting the Lens
31
Stopper
Attaching the Viewfinder
Chapter 2 Preparations
Caution
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the unit
with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the viewfinder
and cause fire.
For details on handling the viewfinder, refer to the
manual for the viewfinder.
1
To attach the viewfinder at a higher
position, loosen the two screws, using
the 2.5-mm wrench stored in the
wrench box (see page 18) to detach the
viewfinder shoe, and attach it to the
upper position using the upper screw
holes.
To attach it at a lower position, use the
2.5-mm wrench to loosen the three
screws that secure the viewfinder plate,
remove the viewfinder plate, and attach
the viewfinder directly.
3
Set the viewfinder to the most
convenient position, tighten the
viewfinder positioning ring (1 in the
figure below), and connect the
viewfinder cable to the VF connector of
the camera (2 in the figure below).
1
2
To detach the viewfinder
Viewfinder shoe
2
Fit the viewfinder to the viewfinder
shoe and slide the viewfinder
horizontally.
The viewfinder stopper slides down
automatically.
32
Attaching the Viewfinder
Loosen the viewfinder positioning ring, pull on
the viewfinder stopper, then pull out the
viewfinder by sliding it in the direction opposite
that when attaching.
Connecting Audio Input
To connect a microphone
Mount the microphone in the microphone holder,
connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, and set the
corresponding input selection switch to “MIC” or
“MIC +48V”.
You can attach a microphone to the viewfinder
(when the viewfinder has a microphone holder),
to the top panel of the main unit, or to the handle.
To attach a microphone to the top panel of the
main unit or to the handle, first attach the optional
CAC-12 Microphone Holder.
Remove the two microphone attachment screws
on the top panel of the main unit, or remove the
two screws on the left side of the handle, and then
attach the CAC-12.
To attach the CAC-12 to the top panel of
the main unit
Microphone attachment screws
1
Chapter 2 Preparations
Using a Microphone
2
1 Microphone
2 To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
For details on how to attach a microphone to the
microphone holder, refer to the operation manual for
the microphone.
Notes
CAC-12 Microphone Holder (optional)
To attach the CAC-12 to the handle
Handle
• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate
setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds
may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be
affected.
• The AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors are female
XLR connectors (3-pin), to enable them to provide a
phantom 48 V power supply. If the microphone cable
has a female connector, use a conversion adaptor.
• When you detach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder,
save the screws that you used to attach it and screw
them back into the original screw holes.
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
Connect the audio output connector of the line
input signal source equipment to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, and set the
corresponding input selection switch to “LINE”.
Screws
CAC-12 Microphone Holder (optional)
Connecting Audio Input
33
Chapter 2 Preparations
a)
1 To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
2 From audio equipment
3 Input selection switches
a)
HDSDI
input
Connecting an Audio Multiplexer
(MUX) to the AUX IN Connector
(When Using the HKSR-9001)
You can multiplex audio signals into HDSDI
signals and input them to the AUX IN connector
when using the AJA HD10AMA Analog Audio
Embedder/Disembedder, HKSP-105 HD AV
Multiplexer, and HD VTRs such as the SRW-1/
SRPC-1.
Multiplexing into the HDSDI output
signals of this unit
Set REFERENCE on the <GENLOCK> page of
the Camera >MAINTENANCE menu to
INTERNAL or GENLOCK IN.
HDSDI
output
Audio input
a) 75 Ω coaxial cable
b) The HD SDI MON2 connector and the HD
SDI MON1 connector on the side panel can
also be used.
To use the HD SDI OUT A connector: Set GLMODE on the <Genlock> page to SDI.
To use the HD SDI MON1/2 connectors: Set
GL-MODE on the <Genlock> page to MON.
Note
When SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT >INPUT SEL in the
VTR menu is set to AUX Input, it is not possible to
multiplex audio signals into HDSDI signals because
there is a phase difference between HDSDI outputs and
AUX IN inputs.
To input audio signals, multiplex them into external
HDSDI signals (see the next section “Multiplexing audio
signals into external HDSDI signals).
Multiplexing into external HDSDI signals
Set REFERENCE on the <GENLOCK> page of
the Camera >MAINTENANCE menu to AUX
IN.
34
Connecting Audio Input
Mounting on a Tripod
HDSDI
output
Audio input
Two tripod receptacles (for 3/8" camera screws)
are provided on the riser plate at the bottom of the
unit.
HDSDI
input
Chapter 2 Preparations
a)
HDSDI signal
generator, VTR
Tripod receptacles (3/8")
a) 75 Ω coaxial cable
Notes
• Select an appropriate hole, considering the balance of
the weight of the unit. If an inappropriate hole is
selected, the unit may fall over.
• Check that the size of the selected hole matches that of
the screw of the tripod. If they do not match, the unit
cannot be attached to the tripod securely.
To use the optional VCT-14 Tripod
Attachment
Remove the riser plate, and use the supplied six
screws to attach the supplied V-shoe plate in the
position indicated in the figure.
V-shoe plate (supplied)
Mounting on a Tripod
35
Attaching the Control
Panel
To detach the control panel
Hold down the lock release button and detach the
control panel by sliding it out.
Chapter 2 Preparations
The supplied control panel is used for tape and
VTR menu operations. You can attach it to the top
panel of this unit.
1
Place the control panel on the top panel
of this unit, and slide it as shown in the
figure.
Lock release button
To use the extension cable
1
Insert the belt bracket into hole [A] or
[B] of the cable holder (supplied).
Belt bracket
2
Connect the cable of the control panel to
the CTRL (VTR) connector, and then
fit the cable into the groove and cable
clamp on the top panel of the unit.
Cable clamp
2
Detach the control panel.
3
Remove the two cable holder
attachment screws.
Holder attachment screws
CTRL (VTR)
connector
4
Align the red mark on the cable plug
with the red mark on the CTRL (VTR)
connector (at the white dot).
36
Attaching the Control Panel
Attach the cable holder, using the
attachment screws removed in step 2.
Holder attachment screws
5
Attach the control panel.
6
Connect the cable of the control panel to
the CTRL (VTR) connector, and store
the excess length of the cable in the
cable holder.
1 Release the buckle
of the holder, 2 bundle
the cable by winding the
holder around it, 3 then
lock the buckle again.
To use the cable holder of the AP-1 Assistant
Panel
When you are using the optional AP-1 Assistant
Panel, you can attach a cable holder to the AP-1
attachment hook base, and use the cable holder to
store the cable of the control panel.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Cable holder
AP-1 Assistant Panel (optional)
See “Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional)”
(page 38) for more information about attaching the
AP-1.
7
Adjust the length by pulling the lower
end of the holder.
Attaching the Control Panel
37
AP-1
Attaching the AP-1
Assistant Panel
(Optional)
Chapter 2 Preparations
The optional AP-1 Assistant Panel provides the
same functions as the controls on the right-side
panel of the unit. You can attach the assistant
panel to the left side of the unit.
1
Remove the microphone holder
attachment screws, and use the screws
to attach the hook base.
Hook base
2
4
Connect the cable of the AP-1 to the
CTRL (CAM) connector, gather up the
excess length of the cable, and store it in
the cable holder.
Screw the cable holder into the hook
base.
See “To use the extension cable” (page 36) for
more information about how to use the cable
holder.
CTRL (CAM) connector
Cable holder
3
38
Hang the reverse side of the AP-1 on the
hook base.
Attaching the AP-1 Assistant Panel (Optional)
Setting the Built-in Clock
5
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
scroll the page and move the cursor to
<DATE>.
6
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Chapter 2 Preparations
When using the camera for the first time, set the
built-in clock to the local time, using the
<DATE> page of the MAINTENANCE menu in
the Camera menu.
The Camera menu appears in the subdisplay, in
the control panel display, and on the viewfinder.
You can also display it on a monitor connected to
the HD SDI MON1 or HD SDI MON2 connector.
For details on Camera menu operations, see “Basic
Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
1
Turn on the unit.
2
While pressing the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial, press the VF MENU/
DISPLAY button.
The Camera menu appears. (“TOP” is
displayed at the upper right corner of the
screen.)
3
The <DATE> page appears.
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to “TOP” and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The TOP MENU screen appears.
7
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
set the date and time.
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to shift to
the next digit.
8
4
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to “MAINTENANCE”
and press the dial.
When you have finished setting the date
and time, press the VF MENU/
DISPLAY button to exit menu
operation mode.
The CONTENTS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu appears.
(The following display examples show
Custom mode menus. They include some
items that do not appear in Cine mode.)
Setting the Built-in Clock
39
Chapter
3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Selecting the Basic
Operation Mode
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Overview of the Basic Operation
Modes
This unit supports two operation modes: Cine
Mode and Custom mode. Cine modes allow you
to use the unit like a film camera, on the
assumption that the video will undergo postproduction processing to achieve a specific look.
Custom mode allows you to access all settings on
site, so that you can achieve the look you want as
you shoot.
You can control the camera either from the
Camera menu or a remote control unit, but the
items you can set and the values they can take
depend on whether you are shooting in Cine
Mode or Custom mode.
Cine mode (default mode)
This mode is intended that the most commonly
used operations are available in the subdisplay
and the USER menus of the Camera menu.
• The menu configuration is simple, with most
items relating to the basic “look” of the video
fixed as factory defaults.
• The only active auto setup item is auto black
balance (ABB).
• The white balance level is fixed at the preset
value (3200K), and auto white balance (AWB)
and WHITE R/G/B settings are not operative.
• When you are controlling the unit from a remote
control unit connected to the REMOTE
connector, items with numeric settings that are
fixed in Cine mode do not appear on the remote
control unit. Items with ON/OFF settings and
selectable items do appear, even when their
settings are fixed.
• The only file that can be read from or written to
“Memory Stick” media is the operator file in the
40
Selecting the Basic Operation Mode
USER menu, and the only file data that can be
reset to factory defaults is the data in that file.
• The only operation that can be carried out with
lens files is loading a lens file by specifying its
number.
• The reference file items are fixed to the default
values set at the factory even if you have
changed the values in Custom mode.
Custom mode
This mode is intended for users who want to make
detailed menu settings, or who want to operate
from a remote control unit.
• You can save and load reference files, which
store adjustment reference values, and scene
files, which store adjustment values specific to
particular scenes.
• You can load user gamma tables.
• You can adjust and save lens files.
Note
The settings for file items adjusted in Custom mode are
maintained when the camera is switched back to Cine
mode. However, video adjustment values that are
changed temporarily and not stored in any file are
cleared upon mode switching.
For details on the items and values that can be set in
each mode, see “Camera Menu List” (page 127).
Switching between the Basic
Operation Modes
Cine mode is selected when the unit is shipped
from the factory.
To switch to Custom modes
Referring to the procedure described in “Setting
the Built-in Clock” (page 39), display the <BASE
SETTING> page of the Camera >
MAINTENANCE menu on the subdisplay,
viewfinder screen, or monitor screen and use that
page to switch to Custom mode.
<BASE SETTING> page of the MAINTENANCE
menu
For details on Camera menu operations, see “Basic
Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
On the unit, you can easily make basic settings for
the camera module by using the subdisplay
located on the side of the unit or the optional AP1 Assistant Panel connected via the CTRL
(CAM) connector.
Basic Operations in the
Subdisplay
Use the buttons and dials shown in the figures
below for subdisplay operations.
Right side of the unit (display/menu operations
section)
VF MENU/
DISPLAY button
(confirm a setting)
CANCEL/STATUS button
(cancel a setting)
SET button (return
to a page or enter
data modification
mode by pressing
for one second)
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
SHOOT MODE
Switches between CINE and CUSTOM.
Basic Settings with the
Subdisplay
Turn (change a
setting)
PAGE button
(advance to the Press (confirm a setting)
next page or
MENU SEL/ENTER dial a)
confirm a
setting)
a) Turning the dial changes a setting, and pressing it
confirms a setting (ENTER button function).
Note
When you turn the dial, stop it at a position where you
feel a click. If you force the dial to stop at a non-click
position, the operating stability of the dial on the AP-1
side may be affected.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
41
AP-1 Assistant Panel
Cursor (flashing)
CANCEL/STATUS button
Question mark
VF MENU/
DISPLAY button
MENU SEL/
ENTER dial a)
LOCK switch
On a page with two or more setting items,
pressing the SET button moves the cursor to
the next item.
Press
Cursor
Turn
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
PAGE button
RUN button
SET button
a) Turning the dial changes a setting, and pressing it
confirms a setting (ENTER button function).
You can also use the display/menu operations
section of the main unit to operate the subdisplay
of the AP-1, and use the AP-1 to operate the
subdisplay on the right-side panel.
However, the LOCK switches function
independently. When you want to lock the
display/menu operations section or the AP-1, turn
on the LOCK switch on that side.
To display setting pages
After the unit is turned on, the current operation
mode (CINE or CUSTOM) appears on the
subdisplay for several seconds, followed by the
most recently used settings page.
To advance one page
Press the PAGE button.
To go back one page
Press the SET button (press and release the button
within one second).
2
Move the cursor to the item to be set,
then change the setting by turning the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Note
Camera menu operations on the viewfinder screen
cannot be performed while the subdisplay is in data
modification mode.
To confirm a change
Do one of the following:
• Press the PAGE button.
• Exit data modification mode by pressing the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial (the cursor and
question mark disappear).
• Terminate the subdisplay operation by pressing
the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
To cancel a change
Press the CANCEL/STATUS button before
confirming the change.
The “?” mark disappears, and the original setting
is restored.
To terminate subdisplay operation
Press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
To change a setting
1
Shutter Settings
Press and hold the SET button for more
than 1 second.
The unit enters data modification mode, the
cursor ( | ) starts flashing, and a question
mark appears at the rightmost position on the
first line.
42
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
The electronic shutter settings of the unit can be
displayed and adjusted as exposure time values,
or as shutter angle values, as with a film camera.
There are two adjustment modes for angles: Step
mode and Continuous mode.
Step mode (STEP)
You can register and select up to eight frequently
used values as step shutter values.
Factory-set values are as follows:
Shutter angle
216.0°
180.0°
172.8°
150.0°
144.0°
90.0°
45.0°
22.5°
To select a shutter value by continuous operation
Continuous operation allows you to set shutter
values freely.
Note
When operating from a remote control unit connected to
the REMOTE connector, you can control the shutter with
the STEP (shutter step operation) or CONTINUOUS
(continuous operation) functions. There is no need to set
CONTINUOUS to ON on this unit. However, an
upgrade is required to display shutter values correctly on
the remote control unit.
For details, consult a Sony representative.
Shutter settings page
4 a)
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
display the shutter value that you want
to use at 2 in the figure.
The shutter values change step by step as the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial is turned.
Continuous mode (CONTINUOUS)
This mode allows you to change shutter values
continuously over the range from 360.0 to 4.3
degrees.
To obtain a continuous shutter value quickly,
select a value close to the one you want in Step
mode, and then switch to Continuous mode to
make the final selection.
2
(When the unit switches to data modification
mode in the shutter settings page, the cursor
automatically appears to the left of “SC”.)
2
Actual shutter speeds vary according to the frame
frequency and frame rate of the selected video
format. The shutter step values can be changed
and reregistered on the <SHUTTER ASSIGN>
page of the Camera >USER (OPERATION)
menu or the <SHUTTER> page of the Camera
>USER (PAINT) menu.
1
Move the cursor to the left of “SC” (1
in the figure).
3
5 a)
a) Appears only when the optional HKSR-9002
is installed.
To select a shutter value in Step mode
In Step mode you can select a step shutter value
(one of up to eight registered values) as follows:
1
Move the cursor to the left of “SC” (1
in the figure).
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
display the shutter value that you want
to use at 2 in the figure.
The shutter value changes continuously as
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial is turned.
To change the parameter display unit
You can change the parameter display unit
between shutter angle (degree) and shutter speed
(second).
1
Move the cursor to the left of
the figure).
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
STEP No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
(2 in
The display at 2 changes to a speed value
(seconds).
The speed value for a given shutter angle
varies depending on the selected video
format and frame rate.
To select the frame rate (number of frames to
shoot)
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, and
you have selected the Select FPS video format,
select the frame rate (number of frames to shoot).
Note
The frame rate cannot be changed when a format other
than Select FPS is selected.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
43
1
Move the cursor to the left of the frame
rate (4 in the figure).
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
select the desired frame rate (number of
frames to shoot).
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
To use a compensation mode
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, you
can compensate for changes in the video level that
occur when the frame rate (number of frames to
shoot) is changed. There are two compensation
modes, which compensate by adjusting the
shutter angle or electrical gain.
1
Move the cursor to the left of “CMP”
(5 in the figure).
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
select the compensation mode to use.
AC (angle compensation mode): When the
frame rate is changed, the video level is
held constant by automatically adjusting
the shutter angle.
GC (gain compensation mode): When the
frame rate is changed, the video level is
held constant by automatically adjusting
the electrical gain. The shutter angle is
held constant.
See “Detailed Shutter Settings” (page 71) for details
about compensation modes and about compensation
mode menu operations.
When you are not using the shutter
Select OFF at 3.
The shutter value indication at 2 becomes “----”.
To change the registered shutter values
You can change registered shutter step values in
the <SHUTTER ASSIGN> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu.
<SHUTTER ASSIGN> page
STEP 1-8
On each line, the [deg] column displays a
registered shutter angle. The [sec] column
displays the corresponding shutter speed value,
converted according to the currently selected
frame rate.
ADD
Use this to register new shutter step values.
Display the shutter angle you wish to register, and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial. You can
select angle values in the range from 360.0 to 4.3
degrees. Shutter step values are sorted
automatically in descending order.
If eight values have been already registered, the
message “STEPS FULL” appears, and a new
value cannot be added. In this case, use DEL (see
the following section) to delete an unneeded
value beforehand.
DEL
Use this to delete registered shutter step values.
When the cursor is positioned at DEL, an asterisk
(*) appears to the left of STEP 1.
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to move the
asterisk to the left of the value you wish to delete,
and then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial. That
value is deleted, and the items after the deleted
one are automatically renumbered.
Example: Delete 90.0 at STEP 6
For details on how to operate the Camera menu, see
“Basic Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
You can also use the <SHUTTER> page of the
Camera >USER (PAINT) menu to change a
registered shutter step value.
See “Detailed Shutter Settings” (page 71) for more
information about the <SHUTTER> page.
During step selection operations, the unit displays
registered values only. If you rarely use one of the
44
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
registered values, you can operate more quickly
by deleting it.
You can leave up to seven of the STEP numbers
(numbers 2 to 8) unregistered.
PRESET
Resets all step shutter values to the factory
defaults.
Figure Setting item
number
2
Starting FPS
value
3
Ending FPS
value
Using the Ramp Function
5
6
While the ramp settings page of the subdisplay is
displayed, assignable buttons 2 and 3 function as
ramp setting buttons, regardless of any other
functions that have been assigned to them (see
page 51).
Display of assignable
button 2 function
Display of assignable
button 3 function
1
2 3
4
5 6
1 in the first line shows the current FPS.
Use this page to make the settings shown in the
following table.
Note
The ramp function is not
executed when “–” is
selected. (Assignable
button 3 does not work.)
To change a setting value: Move the cursor to
the left of the item to set, and then turn the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
To switch 2 (starting FPS value) and 3
(ending FPS value): Press assignable
button 2.
To execute the ramp function: Press assignable
button 3.
The FPS (number of frames shot) changes
according to the settings described above.
During execution, “*” appears to the right of
the current FPS value (1 in the figure).
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Ramp settings page
S23.98PsF/S24PsF: 1 to
24
S25PsF: 1 to 25
S29.97PsF/S30PsF: 1 to
30
S50PsF: 1 to 50
S59.94PsF/S60PsF: 1 to
60
0 to 30
Ramp time
(seconds)
Video level
A (Angle): Angle
compensation
compensation mode
mode (see
G (Gain): Gain
page 44)
compensation mode
–: No compensation
Ramp mode L (Linear): Linear mode
(FPS ramp
E (Exponential):
curve)
Exponential mode
–: Ramp off
4
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, you
can use the ramp settings page of the subdisplay
or the <RAMP> page of the PAINT menu to
change the FPS (number of frames shot) during
shooting.
Setting value
1
2 3
The “*” indication disappears when
execution end, and the 2 (starting FPS
value) and 3 (ending FPS value) values are
switched.
Note
The following limitations apply during execution of the
ramp function.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
45
• The values of the setting items (2 to 6) cannot be
changed.
• FPS cannot be controlled from this unit or a remote
control unit.
• The subdisplay page cannot be switched to another
page.
To set up and execute the ramp function
from a menu
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
You can use the <RAMP> page of the PAINT
menu (see page 148) to operate in the same way
as the subdisplay ramp settings page.
When you execute the ramp function, the
subdisplay changes automatically to the ramp
settings page.
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial until the
format that you want appears.
If the desired format is not registered
1
Note
Empty numbers (numbers without registered
formats) do not appear. If you want to register a
format under an empty number, use the
<SUBDISPLAY 1> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu (see page 121).
Selecting the Video Formats
You can select the video format from among the
eight registered formats.
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the
following eight formats are registered under
numbers 1 to 8.
No.
1 (default)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Registered
format
23.98P 4:2:2
24P 4:2:2
25P 4:2:2
29.97P 4:2:2
50P 4:2:2
59.94P 4:2:2
50I 4:2:2
59.94I 4:2:2
Indication on the
subdisplay
_23.98P 422
_24P 422
_25P 422
_29.97P 422
_50P 422
_59.94P 422
_50I 422
_59.94I 422
Video format selection page
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
display the number of the format that
you want to change on the second line.
2
Move the cursor to the left of “M” and
turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The selectable formats are displayed in
sequence as you turn the dial.
3
When the desired format appears, press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The registration is updated, and the unit starts
to operate with the selected format.
To change the registered formats using a
menu
The registered formats can also be changed on the
<SUBDISPLAY 1> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu.
For details on how to operate the Camera menu, see
“Detailed Video Format Settings” (page 77).
For details on how to operate the Camera menu, see
“Basic Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
<SUBDISPLAY 1> page
The first line indicates the currently selected
format.
When you switch to data modification mode, an
alternative format appears on the second line.
This allows you to select the desired format from
among the registered formats.
Move the cursor to the line you want to change
and press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial. The
<FORMAT MEMORY> page appears.
46
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
3: The selected CC filter is displayed.
4: Displays the color temperature corresponding
to the filter selected at 3.
<FORMAT MEMORY> page
When the optional HKSR-9004 is installed, ND
and CC filters can be switched on this page.
The setting items and values in Cine mode and
Custom mode are different.
In Cine mode: Gain setting page
1
2
Displaying the Filter Status
To respond to various lighting conditions, optical
neutral density (ND) filters and optical color
temperature conversion (CC) filters are built into
this unit. The selectable filters are identified with
the following alphanumeric codes.
Indication Selected
filter
ND:1
CLEAR
ND:2
ND0.6
CC:C
5600K
CC:D
6300K
1: You can select the gain value from among the
following: –6 dB, –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9
dB, and 12 dB (the factory default is 0 dB).
The corresponding ISO sensitivity is
displayed in parentheses.
2: Displays either a dynamic range or a latitude
(see “ISO sensitivity and dynamic range
indications” (page 48)).
On the second line, the color temperature filter is
selected from TUNGSTEN (factory default) or
DAYLIGHT.
With DAYLIGHT, electrical gain 5600K is on.
The white balance is fixed at the preset value
(3200K).
CC:E
ND0.3
In Custom mode: Gain setting page
Indication Selected
filter
CC:A
3200K
(Clear)
CC:B
4300K
(1/4 ND)
ND:3
ND1.2
(1/16 ND)
ND:4
ND1.8
(1/64 ND)
ND:5
CAP
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Move the cursor to the item you want to select,
and press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to change
the registered format.
Displaying the Filter Status
Select 00:NO ASSIGN if you want to make the
selected number into an empty number.
Selecting Gain, Color
Temperature, and White Balance
Values
(1/2 ND)
On the subdisplay, you can check the filters
selected with the filter selector knobs.
3
Optical filter status page
1
3
2
4
4
The first line is in common with Cine mode (page
47).
3: Turn on/off electrical gain 5600K (the factory
default is off).
4: Select the white balance setting (the factory
default is W:P).
1: The selected ND filter is displayed.
2: Displays the type of the selected filter.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
47
Setting
W:P
W:A
W:B
Value
Preset value (3200K)
The value stored in memory A
The value stored in memory B
For details on white balance adjustment, see
“Adjusting the White Balance (in Custom Mode)”
(page 55).
Gain switch values (L/M/H) page
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
You can use the gain switch of the RM-B150
Remote Control Unit to switch the gain of this
unit’s video amplifier. You can also assign gain
functions to assignable buttons 1 to 3, 5 to 8, N,
and C. Before doing so, you need to set a gain
value for each position (L/M/H). You can set
these values on this page. This page also allows
you to switch the gain of this unit’s video
amplifier between the L, M, and H values.
Note
To adjust the gain, you can either select it directly or
switch between the L, M, and H values. If you set it
directly, it may differ from the L, M, and H values, in
which case the unit displays L*, M*, and H* with
asterisks to indicate that the gain value is different from
the values assigned to L, M, and H.
Immediately after you power the unit on, GAIN is
always displayed as “**”, to indicate that the gain switch
position is undetermined. At this time, the gain is most
recent gain value from the last time you used the unit.
(The unit assumes that the position is undetermined
because you may have powered the unit off with L*, M*,
and H* displayed.)
When GAIN is displayed as “**”, and you switch it with
the assignable buttons or a subdisplay operation, the unit
always selects L first.
You can make the same settings on the <GAIN
ASSIGN> page of the Camera >OPERATION
menu (see page 137).
Note that the video output value with respect to
this input will vary depending on the selected
gamma.
Dynamic ranges are displayed as percentage
values. They show the high luminance limit for
the case where grayscale white output is 100%
(700 mV), with ITU-R709 gamma (standard
gamma) and the input level as 100%.
Latitude values are displayed with E, showing the
latitude on the high luminance side as an f-stop
value, using a gray-scale chart with an 18%
reflection rate as the key light Gradations on the
low luminance side can be expressed up to
approximately –6.5 stop at 0 dB.
Note
As the dynamic range indication shows a value for the
input video, the dynamic range of the output video is
limited by the output settings as follows:
If a gamma other than S-LOG is selected
The upper limit is clipped according to the output
video limitation specified by the gamma setting.
When you select a curve as Hyper Gamma No. 4,
which compresses 460% input to 109%, the
output video is fed within the range up to 460% of
input video even if 800% is displayed on the
subdisplay as the dynamic range as the output
video is limited to 109%.
Using CvpFileEditor V4.0 (see page 75), you can
change the dynamic range of Hyper Gamma and
create a user gamma curve having no dynamic
range limitation.
If the white clip function is in use
As the white clip function limits the level of
output video, the dynamic range specified for the
input video may not be obtained for video output.
When you select “gain compensation mode” as
the video level compensation mode for the
Select FPS function
The dynamic range value declines up to a
maximum of 1/2, depending on the FPS setting
(number of frames to shoot).
Memo
48
ISO sensitivity and dynamic range
indications
Why the ISO sensitivity is defined for 20%
input
The ISO sensitivity value displayed on the Gain
setting page is defined as “the value at which the
video input becomes 20% when shooting a gray
scale chart with a 18% reflection rate”.
Defining the level of gray scale of 18% reflection rate for
the ISO sensitivity on the linear curve (defining with
input signal) permits you to use the values as the absolute
reference for proper gamma conversion in
postproduction.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
In addition, defining the output for 20% input with ITUR709 so that it becomes the reference code for Cineon
curve allows high compatibility.
Selecting a Lens File
Lens file selection page
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Checking Timecode and the
Remaining Tape Time
On the first line, select the number of a lens file.
(If a serial lens is mounted, the unit will recognize
the lens name and invoke the corresponding lens
file automatically. In that case, the file number is
always 33.)
The second line displays the lens file name
corresponding to the selected number.
The selected lens file is retained until a new lens
file is selected. As long as you are using the same
lens, you do not need to select it again.
The timecode/tape remaining page allows you to
check timecode and the approximate remaining
tape time (unit: minutes).
Timecode/tape remaining page
All the lens files are named “No Offset,” with all zero
settings at shipment. File registration and modification of
data in a lens file must be performed in Custom mode.
The first line displays a timecode value, and the
second line displays the approximate tape
remaining time, within the range 1 to 99 minutes.
The following table lists the types of timecode
that appear.
For details on the lens files, see Chapter 8 “Storage
and Retrieval of User Setting Data” (page 185).
Indication
TCR 00:00:00:00
Checking the Operating Status of
the VTR Module
TCR 00:00.00:00
You can check the operating status of the VTR
module in the subdisplay. When the unit is in
recording pause mode, you can also use this page
to switch the power supply to the VTR module
between power saving (SAVE) mode and standby
(STBY) mode.
UBR 00 00 00 00
Note
TCR.00:00:00:00
UBR.00 00 00 00
TCG 00:00:00:00
TCG 00:00:00.00
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
On this unit, you can adjust the compensation
data for the mounted lens in Custom mode and
registered it in the built-in memory as a lens file
(max. 64 files in total: 32 files for serial lenses
and another 32 files for non-serial lenses).
You can invoke the compensation data for the
mounted lens simply by selecting the
corresponding file.
The first line shows the operating status of the
VTR module (REC PAUSE, REC, F.FWD,
REW, PLAY, STOP, etc).
The second line shows the VTR module power
supply mode (SAVE, STBY) when it is in stop
mode (STOP), recording pause mode (REC
PAUSE), or playback pause mode (PLAY
PAUSE). Use an assignable button/switch to
which the VTR SAVE function is assigned to
select SAVE or STBY.
Meaning
Timecode data of the LTC
reader
Timecode data of the LTC
reader (DF)
Timecode data of the VITC
reader
User bit data of the LTC
reader
User bit data of the VITC
reader
Timecode data of the
timecode generator
Timecode data of the
timecode generator (DF)
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
49
Indication
UBG 00 00 00 00
CTL -0:00:00:00
T*R 00:00:00:00
U*R 00 00 00 00
T*R.00:00:00:00
Meaning
User bit data of the timecode
generator
Data of the CTL counter
Timecode cannot be read with
the LTC reader.
User bits cannot be read with
the LTC reader.
Timecode cannot be read with
the VITC reader.
Setting
AUTO1 (default)
AUTO2
U*R.00 00 00 00 User bits cannot be read
with the VITC reader.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
See “To select time data to display during playback”
(page 92) for information about how to switch
between different types of timecode.
Setting the Timecode Generator
Value to XX:00:00:00
You can set the current timecode generator value
to the “00:00:00” value of the next hour.
Example: TCG 01:12:34:12 t TCG 02:00:00:00
You can perform this setting from the control
panel or the subdisplay/menu operations section.
To perform the setting from the control panel
Press the TC button while holding the FUNC and
BACK buttons down.
To perform the setting from the subdisplay/menu
operations section
When the TCG is displayed in the subdisplay,
press the SET button while holding the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial down.
Checking the Power Voltage and
Selecting the Fan Mode
Voltage check/Fan mode page
The first line allows you to check the battery
voltage, and the second line displays the
operating mode of the internal fans.
To select the fan mode
You can select the fan mode from the modes in
the following table.
50
MIN
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
MAX
Operation of the fans
The fans are controlled
automatically according to the
unit’s internal temperature.
During recording, they are
controlled for quiet operation.
Normally use this mode.
Normally the fans are
controlled in the same way as
in MIN mode, but during
recording they are controlled
for quieter operation.
However, control for quieter
operation is limited to several
minutes or less.
Use this mode only when the
ambient temperature is normal
or lower.
In this mode, the fans operate
quietly regardless of whether
the unit is recording. This
mode is preferable for 30
minutes or more of shooting
in quiet environments such as
concert halls.
Use this mode only when the
ambient temperature is normal
or lower.
The fans rotate at maximum
speed to lower the unit’s
internal temperature.
Notes
• If the internal temperature rises so high that the
TEMPERATURE CARE message is displayed, the
fan rotation speed will automatically increase to lower
the temperature.
• If the internal temperature rises so high that the TEMP
WARNING/FAN MAX message appears, the fan
mode changes automatically to MAX. After the
temperature has dropped sufficiently and the message
has disappeared, restore the original mode manually.
• When the video format is 50P or 59.94P, the fans are
controlled as in AUTO1 mode, even when AUTO2 or
MIN mode is selected, so that the higher power
consumption does not lead to higher internal
temperatures. Also, the fans do not operate more
quietly during recording.
To change the fan mode from a menu
You can also change the fan mode by using FAN
MODE on the <OTHERS 1> page of the Camera
>USER (MAINTENANCE) menu (see page
156).
Character Data On and Off
You can enable and disable the superimposition
of character data onto the camera picture for
selected output destinations.
Character data page
Switch
5
6
7
8
N
Function
STOP
PLAY
REW
F.FWD
C
OFF (no function) b)
OFF (no function) a)
a) ND is assigned when the optional HKSR-9004 is
installed
b) CC is assigned when the optional HKSR-9004 is
installed
VF
The viewfinder connected to the VF connector
(default ON)
Functions that can be assigned to assignable
buttons 1 to 3, 5 to 8, N, and C
Menu indication
REC REVIEW
HDY
A monitor connected to the TEST OUT or
REMOTE connector. This setting is enabled
when TEST[SIG] or RM[SIG] has been set to
HD-Y in the <MONITOR OUTPUT> page of the
Camera >USER (OPERATION) menu (default
ON).
MON
A monitor connected to the HD SDI MON1 or
HD SDI MON2 connector (default ON)
VBS
A monitor connected to the TEST OUT or
REMOTE connector (default ON)
Assigning Functions to
Assignable Buttons/Switch
You can assign functions to the following
buttons/switch: assignable buttons 1 to 3 and 5 to
8 on the right-side panel of the main unit and the
AP-1 (optional); the 4 side (top) of the assignable
4/AUTO BLK BAL switch (called “switch 4”
below) and assignable buttons N and C.
PB(VF/VBS)
MLUT
(VFVBS)a)
MLUT(MON)a)
FAN MODE
VTR SAVE
BARS
STOP
REW
PLAY
F.FWD
GAIN
WHITE BAL
The following functions are assigned when the
unit is shipped from the factory.
ND
Switch
1
2
3
4
CC
Function
OFF (no function)
OFF (no function)
OFF (no function)
OFF (no function)
Function
With REC REVIEW set to
NORM, the last part of the
recorded tape is normally
rewound for three seconds
(maximum: 10 seconds) then
played back. With REC
REVIEW set to ALL, the tape
is rewound to the recording
start position then played
back.
The video signals being
played back are output to the
viewfinder.
On/Off of the fixed ITU-R709
gamma of the viewfinder
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Superimposition of character data can be turned
ON or OFF for each of the following destinations
individually.
On/Off of the fixed ITU-R709
gamma of the monitor
Switching of the fan mode
Switching of the VTR power
supply mode (SAVE, STBY)
Display color bars
Stop tape transport
Rewind the tape
Play the tape
Fast forward the tape
Switch the gain position
Switch the white balance
memory
Switch ND filters (when the
optional HKSR-9004 is
installed)
Switch CC filters (when the
optional HKSR-9004 is
installed)
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
51
Menu indication
CACHE RECb)
OFF
Function
Switch the setting for the
Cache Rec function. Each
press of the button switches
the setting in the following
order; 25% t 50% t 75%
t 100% t Quick Rec t
OFF.
None
Assignable buttons 7 and 8 setting page
You can assign the functions of buttons 7 and 8 on
the first and second lines, respectively.
Assignable buttons N and C setting page
a) When using S-LOG A
b) When an HKSR-9002 is installed
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Functions that can be assigned to assignable
switch 4
Menu indication
AWB
BARS
TEST1
OFF
Function
Automatic white balance
adjustment
Color-bar indication
Test signal output
None
Note
Even if AWB is assigned to assignable switch 4, AWB
does not function in Cine mode.
You can assign the functions of buttons N and C
on the first and second lines, respectively.
Adjusting the Brightness of the
Subdisplay
You can adjust the brightness of the subdisplay to
one of eight levels.
Subdisplay brightness adjustment page
Assignable buttons 1 and 2 setting page
The higher the value, the brighter the display.
You can assign the functions of buttons 1 and 2 on
the first and second lines, respectively.
Assignable button 3 and switch 4 setting
page
Selecting Gamma Tables
You can select the gamma curves on the gamma
table selection page.
Gamma table selection page
You can assign the functions of button 3 and
switch 4 on the first and second lines,
respectively.
Assignable buttons 5 and 6 setting page
Select the gamma table (STANDARD, HYPER,
SPECIAL, or USER) on the first line and the
gamma curve on the second line.
For details on the available gamma curves, see
“Selecting the Gamma” (page 73).
You can assign the functions of buttons 5 and 6 on
the first and second lines, respectively.
52
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
Selecting Pages to Display in the
Subdisplay
Use the setup mode of the subdisplay or the
OPERATION menu of the Camera menu.
To set the subdisplay to Setup mode
Hold the PAGE button pressed for more than five
seconds to set the subdisplay to Setup mode.
To select pages with a menu operation
Use the <SUBDISPLAY 2> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu.
For details on how to operate the Camera menu, see
“Basic Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
<SUBDISPLAY 2> page
Subdisplay in Setup mode
Indication
SHUTTER
RAMP
FORMAT
ND/CC
GAIN/WHT/
5600K
GAIN L/M/H
Target page
Shutter settings page
Ramp settings page
Video format selection page
Optical filter status page
Gain setting page
Gain switch values (L/M/H)
page
LENS FILE
Lens file selection page
VTR STATUS
VTR status page
TC/TAPE REM
Timecode/tape remaining
page
VOLT/FAN
Voltage check/Fan mode page
CHAR MIX
Character data page
ASSIGN SW1/
Assignable buttons 1 and 2
SW2
setting page
ASSIGN SW3/
Assignable button 3 and
SW4
switch 4 setting page
ASSIGN SW5/
Assignable buttons 5 and 6
SW6
setting page
ASSIGN SW7/
Assignable buttons 7 and 8
SW8
setting page
Assignable buttons N and C
ASSIGN SWN/
SWC
setting page
BRIGHT
Subdisplay brightness
adjustment page
GAMMA TABLE Gamma table selection page
Move the cursor to PAGE SELECT then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial to display to the
<PAGE SELECT> page.
<PAGE SELECT> page
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Select a page in the first line, and select ON or
OFF on the second line.
Pages that are set to OFF will not appear in the
subdisplay.
To switch between ON/OFF settings, move the
cursor to the setting you wish to change and press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Note
“RAMP” appears only when the optional HKSR-9002 is
installed.
Basic Settings with the Subdisplay
53
Adjusting the Black
Balance
To obtain consistently high picture quality, you
need to adjust the black balance. After turning the
unit on, wait for a minute and then adjust the
black balance before making any other picture
adjustments.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
To adjust the black balance
automatically
Push the assignable 4/AUTO BLK BAL switch
on the right side of the unit or on the AP-1
(optional) down to the AUTO BLK BAL
position, and then release it.
Assignable 4/AUTO BLK BAL switch
Automatic black balance adjustment is
performed.
During adjustment, “ABB: EXECUTING” is
displayed on the viewfinder screen. If the
adjustment process succeeds, the message “ABB:
OK” appears.
Notes
• During black balance adjustment, the gain switching
circuit will work automatically, and the viewfinder
screen will flicker several times. This is not a
malfunction.
• When the optional HKSR-9004 is installed, during
black balance adjustment, an ND filter switches to
CAP automatically and the camcorder’s image sensor
is blocked.
If automatic black balance adjustment fails
If the automatic black balance adjustment process
fails, the error message “ABB: NG” appears on
the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
If this error message appears, try adjusting the
black balance again.
54
Adjusting the Black Balance
If the error message continues to appear after
several attempts, the unit requires internal
inspection.
A rectangle centered in the screen.
The length of the sides must be at
least 70% of the height and width of
the screen.
Adjusting the White
Balance (in Custom
Mode)
Within this rectangle, there must be
an area of white greater than 10%
of the entire screen.
Note
Note
Be careful not to have any high luminance spots in
the rectangle.
When using the unit in Custom mode, readjust the white
balance if the lighting conditions change.
To adjust the white balance
automatically
1
4
With a manually adjusted lens: Set the
opening to an appropriate value.
With a lens that has automatic iris control:
Set the lens automatic/manual iris
control switch to automatic.
Select memory A or B, using the
subdisplay or the RM-B750 Remote
Control Unit (default: preset memory).
For details on how to select on the subdisplay,
see “Selecting Gain, Color Temperature, and
White Balance Values” (page 47).
2
3
Adjust by turning the filter selector
knobs.
Place a white pattern in the same
lighting conditions as the subject and
zoom in on it to obtain a white area in
the screen.
A white object (white cloth, a white wall,
etc.) near the subject may be used in place of
a white pattern.
The minimum white area required for
adjustment is as illustrated below:
Adjust the lens iris opening or set the
shutter to ON.
Or, set the video level to an appropriate
value, using the shutter setting.
5
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
When adjusting the white balance, select a white
balance memory bank. The filter is fixed to CC:A
(3200K) when the preset memory is selected.
You can check the selected memory bank with the
status display on the viewfinder screen (see page
62), and select it on the subdisplay or from a
connected remote control unit.
Perform automatic white balance
adjustment.
The message “AWB: EXECUTING”
appears on the viewfinder screen. If the
adjustment process succeeds, the message
“AWB: OK” appears.
If automatic white balance adjustment fails
If the automatic white balance adjustment process
fails, the error message “AWB: NG” appears on
the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
If this error message appears, try adjusting the
white balance again.
If the subject has a higher color temperature, use
an optical filter or set 5600K to ON, then try
white balance adjustment again.
If the error message continues to appear after
several attempts, the unit requires internal
inspection.
Note
When you execute the automatic white balance
adjustment function on a system where the Select FPS
function (see page 106) is enabled, set the FPS value
(number of frames to shoot) to a value greater than 1/2 of
Adjusting the White Balance (in Custom Mode)
55
the maximum setting value. If the FPS value is set to a
value lower than 1/2 of the maximum setting value, the
error message “AWB: LOW FPS” appears and the
automatic adjustment is not performed.
Example: The maximum FPS value for shooting at
S23.98PsF is 24. In this case, set the FPS value to
13 or higher. The maximum FPS value for shooting
at 59.94PsF is 60. In this case, set the FPS value to
31 or higher.
To use the <AUTO SETUP> page of the
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Referring to the procedure in “Setting the Built-in
Clock” (page 39), select the MAINTENANCE
menu in the <TOP MENU> screen and display
the <AUTO SETUP> page.
Setting the Camera
Outputs
Selecting Video Output Signals
for the Connectors
You can select the types of video signals to be
output to the HD SDI MON1, HD SDI MON2,
TEST OUT, and REMOTE connectors.
Use the <MONITOR OUTPUT> page of the
Camera >USER (OPERATION) menu.
<MONITOR OUTPUT> page
Move the cursor to AUTO WHITE, and then
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Select “EXEC” when a confirmation message
appears.
For details on Camera menu operations, see “Basic
Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
To use the assignable switch
If AWB is assigned to assignable switch 4, push
the switch up to “4”, then release it.
For details on assigning a function to the switch, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable Buttons/Switch”
(page 51).
COLOR
When you select COLOR, all R, G, and B
channels will be output.
Single-channel output of R, G, or B is also
possible.
MON
You can select the signals to be monitored with
video monitors connected to the HD SDI MON1
and HD SDI MON2 connectors.
Setting
MON
To use a remote control unit
When the RM-B750 or RM-B150 Remote
Control Unit is connected to the REMOTE
connector, press the AWB button.
VF
Output
Regardless of the VF settings,
characters or markers can be
added independently to the
video output signals (default).
Video signals that are output
to the VF connector (camera
images with character data for
the setting menus, status
displays and so on).
TEST
You can select the signals to be output to a video
monitor or waveform monitor connected via the
TEST OUT connector.
56
Setting the Camera Outputs
Setting
VBS
HD-Y
FRAME
Output
VBS signals (default)
HD-Y signals
One pulse per frame
<PB/MON LUT> page
Example 1: SHUTTER OFF
1 frame
CCD
exposure
Exposure
Exposure
Frame
pulse
1 frame
CCD
exposure
Exposure
Exposure
Frame
pulse
RM VIDEO
You can select the video signals to be output to
equipment connected via the REMOTE
connector.
Setting
VBS
HD-Y
Output
The VBS signals (default)
The HD-Y signals
Setting the Monitor Picture
Using the <PB/MON LUT> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu, you can select the
gamma setting of the monitor picture and the
playback picture monitor mode.
To apply monitor LUT to the monitor
picture
When MLUT/PBMIX is set to MLUT, the
monitor LUT (ITU-R709) appropriate for
monitoring is applied to the video signals output
from the VF, HD SDI MON1, HD SDI MON2,
and REMOTE connectors. The video output
signals from those connectors are selected on the
<MONITOR OUTPUT> page.1)
This setting is effective when S-LOG gamma is
applied to the video output signals for recording
intended for postproduction editing.
1) The VBS output signal always becomes the camera
image to which ITU-R709 gamma is applied.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Example 2: SHUTTER ON, shutter angle 180º
Notes
• The monitor LUT function is enabled when you are
using S-LOG A.
• Some of the paint settings (black, gamma, knee, detail,
matrix, etc.) for the main line are not applied to
monitor LUT.
To monitor the playback picture
You can monitor the on a playback picture can be
confirmed with an external monitor or on the
viewfinder screen.1)
1)When MLUT/PBMIX is set to MLUT or OFF, the
same gamma as that applied to the main line is applied
to all the outputs. When MLUT/PBMIX is set to
PBMIX, the PB and PB MIX modes can be
independently selected for the VF/VBS and MON. VF
and VBS output the same signals respectively.
You can change the PB setting separately for the
VF/VBS and MON to select their playback signal
output modes.
Setting the Camera Outputs
57
Setting
AUTO
CAM
Function
Normally, the camera picture is output.
When the unit enters playback mode
(PLAY, FF, REW, or REC REVIEW),
the playback picture is automatically
selected (default).
The camera picture is always output.
To compare the playback and camera
pictures
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
When PB (playback signal output mode) is set to
AUTO, you can set PB MIX to ON to display the
playback picture and the camera picture in the
same screen.
You can change the PB MIX setting separately
for the VF/VBS and MON to turn playback signal
mixing on and off. The setting for both VF and
VBS is the same. When it is turned on, the
playback picture and camera output are mixed.
You can also use the <PB MIX SETTING> page
of the Camera >USER (OPERATION) menu to
select the playback picture and camera picture
display modes.
Item
Setting
DIRECTION CAM
PB
MODE
Y-MIX
WIRE(W)
WIRE(B)
LEVEL
0 to 80%
WIPE
When MIX TYPE is set to WIPE, you can select
how pictures are to be wiped.
<PB MIX SETTING> page
Item
LAYOUT
Setting
HOR
VERT
MIX TYPE
Select how to display the playback and camera
pictures.
Setting
MIX
WIPE
How to display
The playback picture and camera image
are overlapped (default).
The screen is horizontally or vertically
split in two, and two pictures are
displayed simultaneously.
MIX
When MIX TYPE is set to MIX, how to mix the
pictures can be selected.
58
Content
The playback picture
is gradually mixed
into the camera image
(default).
The camera image is
gradually mixed into
the playback picture.
The Y signals are
mixed (default).
Only the outline
components are
mixed and displayed
with white lines.
Only the outline
components are
mixed and displayed
with black lines.
The mix level can be
adjusted (default:
80%).
Setting the Camera Outputs
Content
Horizontally split
(default)
Vertically split
Item
PB
POSITION
Setting
RIGHT
To display a monitor LUT mark
When a monitor LUT (ITU-R709) is applied to
the SDI output from the HD SDI MON1 and HD
SDI MON2 connectors, or to the video in the
viewfinder, you can display an MLUT mark
(709ϒ) to indicate that the applied gamma is
different from the gamma of the recorded video.
Note
The monitor LUT function is enabled when you are
using S-LOG A.
Set MLUT MARK to ON, then set the brightness
and position of the indication.
Item
LEVEL
Function
For selecting the brightness of
the monitor LUT mark among 1
to 4 (4 is the maximum
brightness.)
Item
H POS
V POS
Function
For setting the horizontal
position of the indication in the
range of 0 to 99 (0 is the
leftmost.)
For setting the vertical position
of the indication in the range of 0
to 99 (0 is the uppermost.)
Outputting Color Bars
Color bar signals can be output from the unit’s
internal color bar generator.
Use the <OTHERS 1> page of the Camera
>USER (MAINTENANCE) menu.
<OTHERS 1> page
When CAM BARS is set to ON, the color bar
generator is turned on, and the color bar signal is
output.
For the HD output (to the viewfinder and
monitor) and SD (VBS) output, the format of the
color bar signals can be independently selected.
Regardless of HD output and SD output settings,
the main line output is always a 16:9 (100%)
color bar signal.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Content
With HOR, the
playback picture is
displayed on the
right and the
camera image on
the left (default
when HOR is
selected).
LEFT
With HOR, the
playback picture is
displayed on the
left and the
camera image on
the right.
BOTTOM
With VERT, the
playback picture is
displayed in the
lower part and the
camera image in
the upper part
(default when
VERT is selected).
TOP
With VERT, the
playback picture is
displayed in the
upper part and the
camera image in
the lower part.
BOUNDARY With HOR:
The boundary
0 to 1920
position can be
With VERT: 0 changed (default:
to 1080
with HOR: 960,
with VERT: 540).
HD-BAR (VF/MON)
You can select the formats of the color bar signals
sent to the VF, HD SDI MON1 and HD SDI
MON2 connectors from among 17 types.
SD-BAR
You can select the formats of the color bar signals
to the TEST OUT and REMOTE connectors from
among five types.
Item
HD-BAR
(VF/MON)
Selectable color-bar formats
BAR 16:9 (100%), BAR 16:9
(75%), SMPTE 16:9 (BLACK)
BAR 4:3 (100%), BAR 4:3 (75%),
SMPTE 4:3 (BLACK), MF-ARIB
(75%), MF-ARIB (100%), MFARIB (+I), MF-SMPTE (–I, Q)
Setting the Camera Outputs
59
Item
SD-BAR
Selectable color-bar formats
SMPTE, EIA, FULL (EBU), 95%,
NTSC100% (PAL100%)
<OTHERS 1> page
Note
The color bar signal is not output with the video output
from the VF, HD SDI MON1, HD SDI MON2, and
REMOTE connectors if the monitor LUT (R709) is
selected for MLUT/PBMIX of the respective output on
the <PB/MON LUT> page (see page 131) (except when
a VBS signal is output).
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Outputting Rec Trigger Signals
By outputting Rec Trigger signals to an SRW-1/
SRPC-1 connected to the HD SDI MON1 or HD
SDI MON2 connector or the HD SDI OUT A/B
connector (when the HKSR-9001 is installed),
you can configure a function that enables
recording in conjunction with the unit.
Use the <OTHERS 1> page of the Camera
>USER (MAINTENANCE) menu.
Unit status
Not recording
G-TLY
REC
STOP
R-TLY
REC
STOP
60
Set SDI REMOTE to CHAR, G-TLY, or R-TLY.
Depending on the status of the unit, the
viewfinder, unit tally indicator, and control panel
displays will be as follows.
SDI REMOTE SDI REMOTE Display
setting
output status
• Viewfinder: “REC2” flashes on the screen.
CHAR
REC
STOP
Recording
Notes
• Even if there is no cassette loaded in the unit or the tape
ends, Rec Trigger signals will be output when you
press the REC button (or RUN button).
• If the tape ends or the cassette is removed while Rec
Trigger signals are being output, tape recording will
start when you load a new cassette and press the REC
button (or RUN button).
CHAR
REC
G-TLY
REC
R-TLY
REC
Setting the Camera Outputs
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in
white.
• Viewfinder: The green tally lights.
• Unit tally indicator: Lights in green.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in
white.
• Viewfinder: The red tally lights.
• Unit tally indicator: Lights in red.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in
white.
• Viewfinder: “REC2” flashes on the screen. The red tally
lights.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
• Viewfinder: The green tally lights. The red tally lights.
• Unit tally indicator: Lights in red. Lights in green once
every 4 seconds.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
• Viewfinder: The red tally lights.
• Unit tally indicator: Lights in red.
• Control panel: The “O” for SDI RMT is displayed in red.
Viewfinder display
Control panel display
Viewing Settings and
Indications in the
Viewfinder
In addition to the video, the viewfinder can
display text and messages showing the settings
and operating status of the unit.
The same information can be displayed on the
monitors connected to the HD SDI MON1 and
HD SDI MON2 connectors.
Viewing the Basic Status
The following status indications can be
superimposed on the camera picture. They appear
when you press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
The display conditions can be specified on the
<VF DISPLAY> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Note
This information is not displayed when the unit is in
menu operation mode. Exit menu operation mode to
view the information.
a Frame rate
The current frame rate is displayed.
b Lens extender
“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is in use.
c Color temperature
Displays the color temperature.
d Recording mode
“REC” is displayed when the recorder docked on
the camera is in recording mode.
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
61
e Battery indication
l Shutter
Indicates the input power voltage.
The indication begins to flash if the voltage
decreases to the NEAR END value specified on
the <BATT ALARM SET> page of the Camera
>MAINTENANCE menu. The flashing becomes
quicker when the voltage decreases further and
approaches the END value. You can check the
NEAR END and END values on the <BATTERY
ALARM> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu and on the SYSYTEM
Setup >BATTERY of the VTR menu.
Displays the shutter setting as a shutter angle or
speed. For a shutter angle, is displayed at the
left.
The type of the display, angle (deg) or speed
(sec), can also be switched on the <VF
DISPLAY> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu (default: deg).
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
f Focus position
The upper row displays the maximum levels for
odd-numbered channels. The lower row displays
the maximum levels for even-numbered
channels.
Shows the focus position of a zoom lens as a
numeric value in the range 0 to 255 (infinity).
n Tape remaining
g Zoom position
Indicates the approximate remaining tape time in
minutes.
Indicates the approximate position of the zoom
lens variator between wide angle (0) and
telephoto (99).
o F value
h White balance memory
p Self-diagnosis information
Displays the currently selected white balance
memory.
W:A: Memory A
W:B: Memory B
W:P: Preset memory
The setting is fixed at W:P in Cine mode.
In Custom mode, you can change the setting
using the subdisplay or from a remote control
unit.
If an error occurs on an internal board or
elsewhere, “CAM?” appears here, and an error
message appears in the message area.
This indication cannot be turned off.
i Color temperature filter mode
Indicates the state of the electrical filter.
In Cine mode, “5600” is displayed when the
daylight filter is selected. When the tungsten filter
is selected, this column becomes blank.
In Custom mode, “5600” is displayed when CC:C
(5600K) filter is set to ON.
j Optical filters
Displays the types of currently selected two
filters. The number (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) indicates the
ND filter, and the letter (A, B, C, or D) is for the
CC filter.
The letter E appears when the 1/2ND filter is
selected.
k Gain value
Displays the video gain value (dB) of the video
amplifier.
62
m Audio level meters
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
Indicates the lens f-stop (iris opening) value.
For the error messages, see “Warning/Error
Messages” (page 200).
q Message area
Displays the status of auto setup processing, error
messages, and so on.
For the error messages, see “Warning/Error
Messages” (page 200).
r Timecode area
Displays the same timecodes as the subdisplay.
For details, see “Checking Timecode and the
Remaining Tape Time” (page 49).
To select the basic status indications
You can use the <VF DISPLAY> page of the
Camera >USER (OPERATION) menu to select
the basic status indications that you want appear
in the viewfinder.
<VF DISPLAY> page
FOCUS
IRIS
ZOOM
EX
ND
CC
5600K
WHITE
GAIN
SHUTT
UNIT
BATT
REC
TAPE
TC
AUDIO
Setting
Set to ON to obtain the frame rate
indication 1.
Set to ON to display the focus position
indication 5.
Set to ON to display the F value
indication qf.
Set to ON to display the zoom position
indication 6.
Set to ON to display the lens extender
indication 2.
Set to ON to display the optical filter
indications 9.
Set to ON to display the 5600
indication 8.
Set to ON to display the white balance
memory indication 7.
Set to ON to display the gain value
indication q;.
Set to ON to display the shutter
indication qa.
Select the unit for the shutter
indication.
deg: Shutter angle (default)
sec: Shutter speed (sec)
Set to ON to display the battery
indication 4.
Set to ON to display the recording
mode indication 3.
Set to ON to display the tape
remaining indication qd.
Set to ON to display the timecode
indication qj.
Set to ON to display the audio level
meters qs.
Viewing the ABNORMAL <!>
Display
An ABNORMAL< ! > screen like the one shown
below appears if you press the CANCEL/
STATUS button when the basic status indications
are displayed in the viewfinder.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Item
FPS
Item
Setting
MESSAG Select the type of messages to be
displayed in the message area qh.
ALL: Display all messages
AT: Display auto setup information
and higher
WRN: Display warning messages and
higher
OFF: Display warning messages of
the highest level only
C TEMP Set to ON to display the color
temperature.
This screen allows you to check for items that are
set to non-standard settings.
You can select the items to display and define
non-standard settings on the <‘!’ IND> page of
the Camera >USER (OPERATION) menu.
Setting the ABNORMAL<!> indications
<‘!’ IND> page
For each item, select ON in the [IND] column if
you want that item to appear in the
ABNORMAL<‘!’> screen.
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
63
Specify the standard setting in the [NORMAL]
column.
When an item is set to select ON in the [IND]
column, and the setting is other than the setting
specified in the [NORMAL] column, that
condition is indicated in the ABNORMAL<‘!’>
screen.
Item
ND
CC
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
WHITE
5600K
SHUTT
FAN
EXT
Setting
ND filter selection: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
(combination allowed)
CC filter selection: A, B, C, D, E
(combination allowed)
White balance memory selection: P,
A, B (combination allowed)
Custom mode: 5600K ON/OFF
Cine mode: ON for Daylight, OFF for
Tungsten
Shutter mode ON/OFF
Fan operation mode selection:
AUTO1, AUTO2, MIN or MAX
Lens extender (normal: OFF)
FUNCTION 2 screen
a Zebra settings
Displays the zebra settings.
b Gain switch values
Displays the values assigned to the L/M/H
positions of the gain switch.
SYSTEM screen
Viewing the FUNCTION (Format/
Switch Function)/SYSTEM
(System Settings/FILTER ASSIGN)
Display
When the ABNORMAL<‘!’> screen (see page
63) is displayed, you can press the CANCEL/
STATUS button repeatedly to cycle through the
following screens.
FUNCTION 1 screen t FUNCTION 2 screen
t SYSTEM screen t FILTER ASSIGN screen
t basic status indications t ...
FUNCTION 1 screen
This screen shows the functions assigned to the
assignable buttons/switch.
a Format
Displays the current video format.
For details on the formats, see “Detailed Video
Format Settings” (page 77).
b Monitor output settings
Displays the current settings of the monitor
outputs.
c Genlock status
Displays the reference signal setting and the
status of the input signal.
FILTER ASSIGN screen
This screen shows the types of filters assigned to
the knob positions of the filter selector.
For functions that can be assigned, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
64
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
<CHAR/MARK MIX> page
Specifying and Displaying
Markers
Example: Center marker (entire cross)
Item
VF
MON
HD-Y
VBS
Example: Safety zone marker (90%)
Setting
Turn all the markers on or off in the
viewfinder.
Turn the markers on or off on the
monitors connected via the HD SDI
MON1 or HD SDI MON2 connector.
Turn the markers on or off on the
monitors connected to the HD SDI OUT
A/B connectors (when the HKSR-9001
is installed).
Turn the markers on or off on the
monitors connected via the TEST OUT
and REMOTE connectors.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
You can display various markers, such as the
center marker and safety zone marker, on the
viewfinder and monitor screens.
The display of markers (MARKER) is set to ON
for all outputs when the unit is shipped from the
factory.
The CHAR/MARK LEVEL line allows you to
adjust the brightness (0 to 50) of the character and
marker indications.
Specifying the markers to be displayed
The <CHAR/MARK MIX> page and
<MARKER SETTING> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu allow you to
switch the display of the markers on or off and to
specify the appearance, and parameters of the
markers.
The <MARKER SETTING> page allows you to
select the markers that you want to display.
The selected markers will appear on an output if
marker display for that output has been activated
on the <CHAR/MARK MIX> page.
<MARKER SETTING> page
Activating/deactivating marker display
on each output
The <CHAR/MARK MIX> page allows you to
activate and deactivate the display of markers on
each output.
All the markers have been set to OFF at the
factory.
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
65
Item
CENTER
SAFETY
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
EFFECTIVE
ASPECT
VARIABLE
SAFETY
MASK
Setting
Set to ON to display the center
marker and select the type of the
center marker.
1: Entire cross
2: Entire cross with a hole
3: Center
4: Center with a hole
Set to ON to display the safety
zone marker and specify the
range (80%, 90%, 92.5%, or
95%).
Set to ON to display the effective
pixel area.
Set to ON to display the aspect
marker and specify the aspect:
2.40:1, 2.35:1, 1.85:1, 1.66:1,
16:9, 15:9, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3, VAR
H, VAR V
If you select VAR H or VAR V
for ASPECT, set the H or V
value.
VAR H: 12 to 1920
VAR V: 12 to 1080
Set to ON to display the safety
zone for the selected aspect
marker, and specify the range.
Set to ON to make the areas
outside the selected aspect
marker dimmer, and select the
mask level (0 to 15).
<VF/HD-Y DETAIL> page
Item
VF
Function
Turn the VF detail adjustment function
on or off.
HD-Y
Turn the monitor picture detail
adjustment function on or off.
LEVEL Set the level (0 to 100%) of the VF
detail adjustment function (when VF is
ON).
CRISP Set the noise crispening level (–99 to
+99).
Displaying Zebra Patterns
You can display zebra patterns on the viewfinder
and monitor screens.
Zebra (default settings)
1 (70%)
2 (100%)
Making Viewfinder Detail
Adjustments
You can adjust the image on the viewfinder
screen to obtain a clearer view, using the <VF/
HD-Y DETAIL> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu. This adjustment does not
affect the image being recorded.
66
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
Use the <ZEBRA> page of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu to adjust zebra patterns and
turn them on and off.
<ZEBRA> page
Example: Box cursor
Activating/deactivating cursor display on
each output
Item
a) These items can also be set on the <CHAR/MARK
MIX> page.
Specifying and Displaying
Cursors
You can display cursors on the viewfinder and
monitor screens.
The <CHAR/MARK MIX> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu allows you to
activate and deactivate the display of cursors on
each output.
<CHAR/MARK MIX> page
The display of cursors (CURSOR) is set to OFF
for all outputs when the unit is shipped from the
factory.
Item
VF
HD-Y
MON
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Function
Turn the zebra pattern in the
viewfinder on and off.
a)
Turn the zebra pattern on the
MONITOR
monitors connected to the HD SDI
MON1 or HD SDI MON2
connector on and off.
Turn the zebra pattern on the
HD-Y a)
monitor on and off.
Turn the zebra pattern on a device
VBS a)
connected via the REMOTE
connector on and off.
ZEBRA Select the zebra type to be
TYPE
displayed: 1, 2, or 1&2
ZEBRA1 Adjust the level (0 to 109%) of the
LEVEL zebra 1 indication (factory default:
70%).
WIDTH Adjust the width (0 to 30%) of the
zebra 1 indication (factory default:
70%).
ZEBRA2 Adjust the level (50 to 109%) of
the zebra 2 indication (factory
default: 100%).
VF a)
Function
Turn the display of cursors on the
viewfinder on and off.
Turn the display of cursors on the
monitor on and off.
Turn the display of cursors on the
monitors connected to the HD SDI
MON1 or HD SDI MON2 connector
on and off.
Selecting the type and size of the cursor
The <MARKER SETTING> page allows you to
select the type and size of the cursor.
The cursor will appear on an output if cursor
display for that output has been activated on the
<CHAR/MARK MIX> page.
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
67
<MARKER SETTING> page
Item
NEAR END
END
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Item
CURSOR
POS1 H/V
SIZE W/H
Function
Select the type (BOX/CROSS) of the
cursor to be displayed.
Set the H (horizontal) position
(–958 to +956) and the V (vertical)
position (–538 to +536) of the center.
Set the width (from the center to right
or left side) (16 to 1920) and the
height (from the center to top or
bottom) (16 to 1080) of the cursor.
Checking the Power Supply
Voltage
You can check the NEAR END and END
settings, which specify trigger values for low
voltage warnings, on the <BATTERY ALARM>
page of the Camera >USER (OPERATION)
menu.
<BATTERY ALARM> page
Item
BATT TYPE
NEAR END
END
DCIN TYPE
68
Indication
Selects the type of battery to
check.
Displays the NEAR END value of
the battery selected with BATT
TYPE.
Displays the END value of the
battery selected with BATT TYPE.
Selects the type of power supply to
check.
Viewing Settings and Indications in the Viewfinder
Indication
Displays the NEAR END value of
the power supply selected with
DCIN TYPE.
Displays the END value of the
power supply selected with DCIN
TYPE.
The only items that can be changed on this page
are the two TYPE items (BATT TYPE and DCIN
TYPE), which specify the type of battery or
power supply to check. If you want to change the
values, use the <BATT ALARM SET> page of
the Camera >MAINTENANCE menu.
Detailed Function
Settings
The setting pages for buttons 2, 3, 5 to 8, N and C
have the same layout as that for button 1.
Setting page for assignable switch 4
<SW ASSIGN 1> page
<SW ASSIGN 2> page
On each page, move the cursor to the function to
be assigned and press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
You can use the <SW ASSIGN 1> and <SW
ASSIGN 2> pages of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu to assign functions to the
assignable buttons/switch, in the same way that
you assign functions using the subdisplay. You
can also set the operation mode of the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial.
Setting page for assignable button 1
Setting the operation mode of the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial
You can reverse the operations that occur when
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial is turned in the
clockwise or counterclockwise direction. This
setting applies to the dial on the AP-1 (optional)
as well as to the one on the right-side panel of the
main unit.
Assigning functions to the assignable
buttons/switch
Move the cursor to one of the ASSIGN SW1 to
ASSIGN SW8 lines, or to the ASSIGN SWN or
ASSIGN SWC line, and then press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial. The settings page for the
corresponding assignable button/switch appears.
Assign functions in the same way that you assign
functions in the subdisplay.
Setting
STD (default)
RVS
Operation
Clockwise rotation moves the
cursor down (to the next position)
or increases a setting value.
Clockwise rotation moves the
cursor up (to the previous
position) or decreases a setting
value.
For the assignable functions, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Detailed Function Settings
69
Setting the Gain
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
If the gain of the video amplifier of the unit is to
be switched using the gain switch of the RMB150 Remote Control Unit, the gain values for
the corresponding switch positions must be
specified in advance.
Use the <GAIN ASSIGN> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu.
<GAIN ASSIGN> page
Menu item
GAIN [L]
Setting
Gain value corresponding to the L
position of the gain switch
GAIN [M]
Gain value corresponding to the M
position of the gain switch
GAIN [H]
Gain value corresponding to the H
position of the gain switch
SHOCKLE SS Shockless gain on or off
GAIN
Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, or 12 dB can be set for
each of the L, M, and H positions, in any
sequence.
Relationship between dynamic range and gain
The dynamic range determined by the gain setting
on the unit is the same for all formats at 460% for
0 dB or lower and 800% for 6 dB or higher.
Dynamic range
460%
650%
800%
Gain
–6 dB, –3 dB, 0 dB
3 dB
6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB
Setting the gain so that the dynamic range is
800% enables reproduction of gradation at high
luminance. In such cases, however, the S/N (noise
in dark areas) will decrease due to the inverse
relationship between the dynamic range and the
70
Setting the Gain
S/N. If you want to prioritize the S/N, configure
the gain setting so that the dynamic range is
460%.
Detailed Shutter
Settings
<SHUTTER> page
See “Shutter Settings” (page 42) for more
information about shutter step values.
FRAME RATE
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, select
the frame rate (number of frames to shoot), for
when Select FPS is selected as the video format.
You can select from the ranges in the following
table.
Selected format
SHUTTER
To activate the electronic shutter, set this to ON.
The [deg] field displays the currently selected
shutter angle, and the [sec] field displays the
speed (in seconds), converted according to the
current frame rate.
STEP (Step mode)
To select a step shutter value, move the cursor to
this line.
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to display
registered shutter values in the [deg] and in [sec]
fields.
CONTINUOUS (Continuous mode)
To fine-adjust the selected shutter step value or
use a value that has not been registered as a
shutter step value, move the cursor to this line.
The values in the [deg] and [sec] columns change
continuously when the MENU SEL/ENTER dial
is turned.
STEP ASSIGN
You can add and delete shutter step values in the
same way as with the <SHUTTER ASSIGN>
S23.98PsF/S24PsF
S25PsF
S29.97PsF/S30PsF
S50P
S59.94P/S60P
Selectable frame rates
(number of frames to
shoot)
1 to 24 FPS (1 to 24 frames)
1 to 25 FPS (1 to 25 frames)
1 to 30 FPS (1 to 30 frames)
1 to 50 FPS (1 to 50 frames)
1 to 60 FPS (1 to 60 frames)
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
When you turn this unit’s Electronic Shutter
function on, you can control the shutter by
selecting either shutter angles or shutter speeds
(seconds).
You can use the subdisplay for normal shutter
switching, and make more detailed settings on the
<SHUTTER> page of the Camera >USER
(PAINT) menu. The menu allows you to set the
shutter on a page that displays the shutter angle
(degrees), the shutter speed (seconds), and the
shutter mode.
page (see page 132) of the Camera >USER
(OPERATION) menu.
ADD: After a Continuous mode operation to
specify a shutter value in the [deg] field, you
can use ADD to register that value as a new
shutter step. If eight shutter step values have
been already registered, “STEPS FULL”
appears, and the new value is not registered.
In that case, use DELETE to delete an
unneeded shutter step value and try again.
DELETE: Deletes the shutter step value
displayed in the [deg] field by a step
operation.
Note
When you have selected a format other than Select FPS,
the frame rate is displayed in parentheses and cannot be
changed.
COMP MODE
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, you
can compensate for changes in the video level
when the frame rate (number of frames to shoot)
is changed. There are two compensation modes,
which use either the shutter angle or electrical
gain.
ANGLE (angle compensation mode): When the
frame rate is changed, the video level is held
constant by automatically adjusting the
shutter angle.
Notes
• In angle compensation mode, the frame rate
cannot be changed to a low value when the angle
approaches 0°, and the frame rate cannot be
changed to a high value when the angle
approaches 360°.
Detailed Shutter Settings
71
• In angle compensation mode, the shutter is
automatically switched to ON.
GAIN (gain compensation mode): When the
frame rate is changed, the video level is held
constant by automatically adjusting the
electrical gain. The shutter angle is held
constant.
Notes
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
72
• Depending on the selected format and FPS value,
the dynamic range (latitude) may decline up to a
maximum of 1/2. Be aware of this when you are
shooting scenes with high contrast.
• When the unit is shipped from the factory, the
frame rate ranges that can be selected for the
Select FPS function (see page 106) are limited.
When COMP MODE is set to OFF or ANGLE, it
is not possible to select a frame rate of 8 FPS or
below. This limitation is intended to prevent
degraded video quality. To remove this
limitation, change the setting of FPS LIMITER
on the <OTHERS 2> page of the
MAINTENANCE menu from LIMIT to FREE.
However, if you do set the frame rate to 8 FPS or
below, noise will become more prominent in the
picture. When you change the setting of FPS
LIMITER from FREE back to LIMIT, COMP
MODE is automatically set to OFF.
Restoring Factory
Default Settings
The <OPERATOR FILE> page of the Camera
>USER (OPERATION) menu allows you to
return the operation items on pages U02 to U14 of
the USER menu to the settings they had when the
unit was shipped from the factory default.
<OPERATOR FILE> page
Move the cursor to PRESET and press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial. The operation items are reset
to the settings they had when the unit was shipped
from the factory.
See Chapter 8 “Storage and Retrieval of User
Setting Data” (page 185) for “Memory Stick” and
other file operations.
Restoring Factory Default Settings
Using the Standard Gamma
Selecting the Gamma
Standard gamma provides video gamma curves
intended mainly for the creation of broadcast
content. It is used in combination with the Knee
function, which adjusts the dynamic range of
high-luminance areas.
When STANDARD is selected on the first line of
TABLE on the <GAMMA> page, you can select
from among the following standard gamma
curves on the second line.
In addition to the built-in standard gamma and
HyperGamma curves, you can create and use
your own user gamma tables.
Use the <GAMMA> page of the Camera >USER
(PAINT) menu to turn gamma correction on and
off and to select gamma curves.
<GAMMA> page
Gamma curve
Equivalent to SD ENG camcorder
Equivalent to 4.5-times gain
Equivalent to 3.5-times gain
Equivalent to SMPTE-240M
Equivalent to ITU-R709
Equivalent to 5.0-times gain
Equivalent to 5.0-times-709 gain
The No. 5 (ITU-R709) curve is recommended for
normal use.
Note that ITU-R709 provides 4.5-times gain near
black. Select the No. 6 (×5.0) curve when you
need higher contrast near black.
You can also select the gamma on the gamma
table selection page (see page 52) of the
subdisplay.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Gamma
table No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Using HyperGamma
Hyper Gamma enables the wide dynamic range of the CCD sensors to be reproduced with smooth contrast
without using the Knee function.
This camera provides the following eight hyper gamma choices:
Available Hyper Gamma choices
No.
Name a)
Dynamic range
White limit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HG3250G36
HG4600G30
HG3259G40
HG4609G33
HG8000G36
HG8000G30
HG8009G40
HG8009G33
325%
460%
325%
460%
800%
800%
800%
800%
100%
100%
109%
109%
100%
100%
109%
109%
a) Naming rule: HG + 3 digits of dynamic range value +
1’s digit of white limit + G + video output value with
18% gray card
For the respective curves, see the figures in
“HyperGamma curves” (page 74).
Video output with 18% gray card
(video input 20%)
36%
30%
40%
33%
36%
30%
40%
33%
Reproducibility of high luminance areas
You can select the dynamic range from among
325%, 460%, and 800%. Selecting a wide
dynamic range, such as 800%, enables
reproduction of gradation at high luminance.
Selecting the Gamma
73
However, the brightness of intermediate
gradation will be lowered.
White limit
You can select either 109% or 100% for the
maximum value of video output (white limit).
While reproduction up to 109% is possible with
SDI outputs, only 100% may be available,
depending on the environment of the production
system. In such conditions, select 100% as the
white limit.
HyperGamma curves
HG3: HG3259G40
HG4: HG4609G33
HG7: HG8009G40
HG8: HG8009G33
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Midtone
You can select two values for the brightness of
intermediate gradation areas around skin tones.
Selecting a curve for bright intermediate
gradation may slightly inhibit reproducibility of
the high luminance.
To select HyperGamma
1
Select HYPER GAMMA on the first
line of TABLE on the <GAMMA> page
and select the hyper gamma curve most
suitable to the shooting conditions and
purpose on the second line.
2
Observing the output video level for a
gray card of 18% reflection rate on a
waveform monitor, adjust the iris so
that the level becomes equal to that
shown in the “Video output with 18%
gray card” column of the “Available
Hyper Gamma choices” table. (The iris
setting in this condition is the standard
iris setting for the selected hyper
gamma.)
Notes
• When this unit is in Custom mode (see page 40),
white clip level adjustment is allowed, but the
white limit values shown in the “Available Hyper
Gamma choices” table may not be obtained if you
adjust the white clip level.
74
• With a Hyper Gamma selected, the knee and
gamma level adjustments are not allowed, even in
Custom mode.
Selecting the Gamma
HG1: HG3250G36
HG2: HG4600G30
HG5: HG8000G36
HG6: HG8000G30
Using S-LOG
When SPECIAL is selected on the first line of
TABLE on the <GAMMA> page, the second line
indicates S-LOG (Sony Log).
Sony Log (called “S-Log” below) is a gamma
function optimized for CCD cameras. It was
developed for use in the DI (digital intermediate)
workflow of film production, in which the camera
negative captured on film is digitally processed to
create the digital master release print.
S-Log allows you to monitor the full latitude of
Sony digital cinema cameras, which is
comparable to that of film cameras, and to
perform color correction (grading). The camera
image can be treated as a “digital negative” in
workflows optimized for digital processing of
negative film.
By working with this “digital negative”, you can
make a smooth transition from film production to
digital cinema production. You can use the same
ISO sensitivity ratings, light meters, and shooting
style as always, and enjoy a latitude comparable
to that of negative film.
For more information about S-Log, refer to the “SLog Whitepaper”. Contact a Sony service
representative for information about how to obtain
this whitepaper.
You can also use the CvpFileEditor 1) software to
create your own gamma tables on your personal
computer, and load those table into the unit via a
“Memory Stick”.
Note that gamma control (LEVEL, ON/OFF)
may be disabled when a user gamma table is
selected, because the gamma may have been
forcibly fixed when the table was created.
When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is set
up to use a user gamma table initialized to
HG8009G33.
When the black level of a user gamma table has
been set to “0” using CvpFileEditor V4.0, the
master black (BLACK [M]) setting is fixed to “0”
(factory setting), and “– –” is displayed.
CvpFileEditor
The unit supports CvpFileEditor Version 3.0 or
later.
If you have an earlier version of CvpFileEditor,
you can download the latest version from
“eCSite”, the site for downloading business and
professional software from Sony Corporation.
If you have not registered at “eCSite,” access the
following URL and register.
https://www.ecspert.sony.biz/ecsite/center/
registUserInfo?action=regulationsDirect
For detailed information on how to install the
software, refer to the CvpFileEditor manual,
available from the above site.
1) CvpFileEditor is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
Using User Gamma
Select USER on the first line of TABLE on
the <GAMMA> page of the Camera >USER
(PAINT) menu and display the desired user
gamma table.
To select a user gamma table
1
To use a gamma table you have created,
load it into the unit.
Load the gamma table data via a “Memory
Stick” using the <USER GAMMA> page of
the FILE menu in Custom mode.
<USER GAMMA> page
For details on file operations, see Chapter 8
“Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data”
(page 185).
2
Select the user gamma.
Selecting the Gamma
75
Inverting the Camera
Picture
The image-inversion function allows you to
cancel the image inversion phenomena that
occurs when a cine-lens converter is used.
Use the <OTHERS 1> page of the Camera
>USER (MAINTENANCE) menu to access this
function.
Display Settings
The display of the control panel displays VTR
menus and information such as audio levels,
warnings, operating status indications, time data,
remaining tape capacity, and remaining battery
capacity.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
For details, see “Display” (page 25).
<OTHERS 1> page
If the display is hard to see because of low light
conditions, you can set the LIGHT switch to ON
to turn on the backlight.
LIGHT switch
Set IMAGE INVERT to ON to activate the image
inversion function. The camera picture is inverted
vertically and horizontally.
Processing of camera video takes more time when
the image inversion function is on. Carry out lip
sync compensation as required.
See “Lip Sync Compensation” (page 215) for more
information about lip sync compensation.
Use the VTR menu to make display settings.
For details on menu operations, see “VTR Menu
Operations” (page 170).
To make the backlight brighter
Select LCD >BRIGHT in the SYSTEM Setup
menu (see page 180) and adjust the brightness (0
to 31) in the Backlight Brightness window.
To turn the backlight off after a specified
interval
Select LCD >LIGHT OFF in the SYSTEM Setup
menu (see page 180) and select the time that the
backlight should remain on (5 sec to 5min) in the
Backlight Off Timer window.
To keep the backlight on, select “Disable”.
To display a screen saver after a
specified interval
Select LCD >SAVER in the SYSTEM Setup
menu (see page 180) and select the time after
which the screen saver should appear (1min to
1hour) in the Screen Saver window.
Select “Disable” if you do not want to display a
screen saver.
76
Inverting the Camera Picture / Display Settings
Detailed Video Format
Settings
<OUTPUT FORMAT> page
On this unit, you can select the video formats
listed in the following table.
Frame rate
23.98PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
50P
59.94P
59.94I
50I
Bit length
10
10 or 12
10
10 or 12
10
10 or 12
10
10 or 12
10
10
10
10 or 12
10
10 or 12
You can check the currently selected format in the
SYSTEM screen (page 64).
You can register eight of your most frequently
used formats from the above list, which allows
you to select them on the subdisplay.
For format selection on the subdisplay, see
“Selecting the Video Formats” (page 46).
Setting the Video Format in the
Camera Menu
You can set the video format on the <OUTPUT
FORMAT> page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
The factory default settings are the 23.98PsF
frame rate and the 4:2:2 YCbCr signal format.
Referring to the procedure mentioned in “Setting
the Built-in Clock” (page 39), select
MAINTENANCE menu on the TOP MENU
screen and call up the <OUTPUT FORMAT>
page.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Camera
Menu Operations” (page 123).
CURRENT
Display the current format.
SCAN
Select the scan mode: PROGRESSIVE or
INTERLACE.
FRAME
Select the frame rate. When you select
INTERLACE for the scan mode, select 29.97 to
specify 59.94I or select 25 to specify 50I.
SIGNAL
Select the signal format.
The compression ratio of 4:4:4 HQ is 1/2 of 4:4:4
SQ.
When the settings are completed, move the cursor
to SET FORMAT and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
The format is changed, and the new format is
displayed on the CURRENT line.
The message “UNSUPPORTED FORMAT”
appears for three seconds if the settings change is
rejected.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
24PsF
Signal format
YCbCr 4:2:2
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr 4:2:2
RGB4:4:4
YCbCr 4:2:2
RGB4:4:4
YCbCr4:2:2
RGB4:4:4
YCbCr 4:2:2
YCbCr 4:2:2
YCbCr 4:2:2
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr 4:2:2
RGB 4:4:4
SELECT FPS
When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed, set
this to ON to use the Select FPS function (see
page 106).
The selected format appears on the NEXT line.
When the settings are completed, move the cursor
to SET FORMAT and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
The format changes, and the new format appears
on the CURRENT line.
Notes
• If you select an invalid format combination (e.g., 60P
and 4:4:4), SET FORMAT appears in parentheses, and
the format cannot be changed.
• The message “UNSUPPORTED FORMAT” appears
for 3 seconds if the unit is unable to change the settings
after the above operations.
Detailed Video Format Settings
77
Submenu window
Setting the Video Format in the
VTR Menu
Use FORMAT or OTHERS in the SYSTEM
Setup menu to select the system signal format.
Notes
• The tape formats supported by this unit may differ
from those supported by other VTRs.
Before selecting the tape format, be sure to read
“About Recording/Playback Formats” (page 208).
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
• If a cassette is loaded in the unit, be sure to eject it
before starting the following procedure.
3
For details on menu operations, see “VTR Menu
Operations” (page 170).
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select LINE in the submenu window if
necessary.
A setting window appears.
To set with FORMAT
Setting window
4
1
Press the menu selection button
“SYSTEM” on the control panel.
This returns you to the submenu window,
which is activated again.
The SYSTEM Setup menu appears.
2
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to FORMAT, and then
press the dial.
A submenu window appears.
Turn and press the SELECT/ENTER
dial to select the desired value.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the FRAME,
SIGNAL, and 3G/DUAL (when the
optional HKSR-9001 is installed) items.
6
In the submenu window, select [SET].
7
Confirm the format, move the cursor to
“OK”, and then press the SELECT/
ENTER dial.
A message appears to inform you that the
format has been selected, and you return to
the HOME screen.
78
Detailed Video Format Settings
The format list screen appears.
To set with OTHERS
Press the menu selection button
“SYSTEM” on the control panel.
The SYSTEM Setup menu appears.
2
4
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to OTHERS, and then
press the dial.
Move the cursor to the format you want
to use.
To move the cursor left and right
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To move the cursor up and down
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial with the
FUNC button held down.
A submenu window appears.
5
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
“CANCEL” and “OK” appear at the bottom
of the screen.
To change the “SELECT FPS” setting, move
the cursor and press the ENTER button while
holding the FUNC button down.
6
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial and
select FORMAT LIST in the submenu
window if necessary.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
1
A bar appears for formats that cannot be
used. A yellow check mark appears for
formats that can be used, and the current
format flashes.
Move the cursor to “OK”, and then
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
A message appears to inform you that the
format has been selected, and you return to
the HOME screen.
Relation between Playback and Recording Signals and Video Monitor
Output Signals
During recording and playback of HDSDI signals, signals in the formats shown in the following table are
output to the video monitors connected to the HD SDI MON1 and HD SDI MON2 connectors.
Detailed Video Format Settings
79
Recording/playback
signal
1080/4:2:2
23.98PsF
24PsF
HD monitor
Output
1080/4:2:2
25PsF
29.97PsF
50i
59.94i
50P
59.94P
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
80
1080/4:4:4SQ
1080/4:4:4HQ
1080/4:4:4HQ 12bit
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
50i
59.94i
For the case of SR Motion shooting, see “Target
Frame Frequencies and Signal Formats” (page
101).
To check the signals output to the video
monitors
With the FUNC button on the control panel held
down, press the HOME button.
The display at the bottom of the HOME screen
changes to show the formats of the signals
currently being output to the HD and SD video
monitors.
Detailed Video Format Settings
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
50i
59.94i
50i
59.94i
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
50i
59.94i
SD monitor
Output
525/59.94i
625/50i
625/50i
525/59.94i
625/50i
525/59.94i
625/50i
525/59.94i
525/59.94i
625/50i
625/50i
525/59.94i
625/50i
525/59.94i
Power Saving Mode
- On the <GENLOCK> page of the Camera
>MAINTENANCE menu, set REFERENCE
to something other than AUX IN:
- Set audio input to something other than SDI:
- Set TC REGEN SRC to something other than
AUX IN.
- Set SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT >INPUT
SEL in the VTR menu to CAM.
The HKSR-9001 is powered off when you do
both 1 and 2 above.
• Power off unneeded accessories, or disconnect
them.
See “VTR Menu Operations” (page 170) and “Basic
Camera Menu Operations” (page 123) for more
information about operations in the VTR and
Camera menus.
Power Saving Operations in the <POWER
SAVE> page of the Camera
>MAINTENANCE menu
MONITOR OUT: Enable or disable monitor
output.
DOWN CONVERTER: Enable or disable VBS/
RM output.
REMOTE: Enable or disable communications
with the RM-B750 or RM-B150.
Chapter 3 Basic Adjustments and Settings
You can extend battery operation time by putting
the unit into power saving mode, which saves
power during recording and playback by turning
off unnecessary signals and enabling other power
saving features.
Settings related to power saving mode include
“LED” and “TALLY” under SYSTEM Setup
>POWER in the VTR menu (see page 183), and
the settings on the <POWER SAVE> page of the
Camera >MAINTENANCE menu (see page
154).
As described below, you can also reduce power
consumption by selecting lower output levels and
by turning off the functions of unit circuits that
you are not using.
• Under INPUT SEL in the VTR >AUDIO Setup
menu, turn off all audio inputs. This turns off
the power of the audio input circuits.
• Lower the volume of your earphones.
• Turn off the backlight of the control panel.
• Lower the brightness of the subdisplay
backlight.
• Detach the control panel. (Before doing this,
you can assign basic tape transport functions to
the assignable buttons/switch.)
• Detach the AP-1 (optional) (the same
operations are available on the subdisplay).
• If you need only the camera module and will not
be running the tape, you can put the unit into
standby off mode by doing the following. This
turns the drum drive off.
- Press the FUNC + STOP buttons on the
control panel (see page 22).
- Set SYSTEM Setup >SERVO >STBY OFF in
the VTR menu to “1sec” (see page 181).
- With an assignable button/switch to which the
VTR SAVE function is assigned, select
SAVE (see page 51).
- Eject the cassette.
• When the HKSR-9001 is installed:
2 Turn the AUX IN input circuits off by
making the following settings:
1 Turn HD SDI A/B output off by setting
the ON/OFF switch of the HD SDI OUT
A/B connectors on the rear panel (page
19) to OFF.
Power Saving Mode
81
Chapter
4 Recording/Playback
About Cassettes
The unit uses 1/2-inch width HDCAM-SR S-size
cassettes.
The maximum recording times are as follows.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
System frequency Maximum recording time
29.97 Hz
40 minutes (20 minutes for
double-speed recording)
25 Hz
48 minutes (24 minutes for
double-speed recording)
23.98 Hz/24 Hz
50 minutes (25 minutes for
double-speed recording)
Note
Note
When inserting the cassette, be careful that you do not hit
the tape against the cassette holder.
Checking the tape for slack
Pressing in the reels lightly, turn them gently with
your fingers in the directions shown below. If the
reels will not move, there is no slack to adjust.
Use this unit or Sony SRW series video cassette recorder
to rewind tapes. Do not use cassettes which have been
rewound by other units or by rewinders.
Storage of cassettes
Store your cassettes at room temperature and
normal humidity.
Loading and Unloading Cassettes
Loading a cassette
1
Set on the power ON/OFF switch to ON.
Unloading a cassette
With the power supply on, press the EJECT
button to open the cassette insertion slot. Then
take out the cassette.
If you are not going to insert another cassette,
close the cassette insertion slot.
Note
If the interior of the VTR section is damp, the “VTR
007F:HUMID ERROR” indicator will light.
2
Press the EJECT button.
The cassette insertion slot will open.
3
82
Check that there is no slack in the tape.
Then slide in the cassette until it clicks
into position (1) and close the cassette
insertion slot completely (2).
About Cassettes
Even if the battery is exhausted and the unit stops,
it is possible to take out the cassette and close the
cassette insertion slot if the remaining battery
voltage is about 10.5 V or more.
However, when the battery voltage is low, do not
repeat the unloading operation. If you repeat the
operation, the power may be turned off during the
ejection operation and you may not be able to
continue the operation.
Note
When you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long
time, take out the cassette to protect the tape and turn off
the power.
Recording
Preventing Accidental Erasure
The following procedure prevents cassettes from
being recorded inadvertently.
Before recording, it is necessary to set the
following items.
• System signal format
• Audio signals
• Recording audio levels
• Timecode and user bits
Setting System Signal Format
Use the VTR >SYSTEM Setup menu to make
settings related to system signal format.
To display SYSTEM Setup menu
Press the menu selection button “SYSTEM”.
SELECT/ENTER dial
SYSTEM Setup menu
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
Push the plug in.
To reuse the cassette,
return the plug to its
original position.
Control panel
SYSTEM button
To set with FORMAT
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select FORMAT, and then press the
dial.
A submenu window appears.
Recording
83
Submenu window
2
2
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select a sub-item in the submenu
window, and then press the dial.
Select FORMAT LIST, and then press
the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The Format List screen appears.
A setting window appears.
Setting window
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
3
A bar appears for formats that cannot be
used. A yellow or green check mark appears
for formats that can be used. The check mark
is green for formats that can be used when the
SELECT FPS function is enabled.
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select a value, and then press the dial.
See “Select FPS Function” (page 106) for more
information about the Select FPS function.
This returns you to the submenu window.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
5
In the submenu window, select [SET].
6
Make sure of the format, select “OK”,
and then press the SELECT/ENTER
dial.
A message appears to inform you that the
format has been set, and you return to the
HOME screen.
3
To move the cursor left and right
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To move the cursor up and down
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial with the
FUNC button held down.
4
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select OTHERS, and then press the dial.
A submenu window appears.
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To change the “SELECT FPS” setting, move
the cursor and press the ENTER button while
holding the FUNC button down.
To set with OTHERS
1
Move the cursor to the format you want
to use.
5
Make sure of the format, select “OK”,
and then press the SELECT/ENTER
dial.
A message appears to inform you that the
format has been set, and you return to the
HOME screen.
84
Recording
OFF: Do not record audio signals (silent)
Making Audio Signal Settings
ALL MODE
Specify whether to assign signals to each
track at one time.
USER: Select the signal to record to each
track individually. (You can
configure each track individually only
if [ALL MODE] is set to [USER].)
ALL SDI: Set tracks 1 to 12 to SDI (1 to
12) at one time.
ALL ANALOG: Set tracks 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,
and 11 to ANA, and set tracks 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, and 12 to ANA2.
OFF: Set tracks 1 to 12 to OFF at one
time.
Use the VTR >AUDIO Setup menu to make
settings related to audio signals.
To display the AUDIO Setup menu
Press the menu selection button “AUDIO”.
SELECT/ENTER dial
ADJUST knob
AUDIO Setup menu screen
Control panel
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
5
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select other
tracks and steps 3 and 4 to select other
signals.
To select audio signals to record
The INPUT SEL item allows you to select the
audio signals to record on each track.
To select audio signals to monitor
The PHONE SEL item allows you to select the
audio signals to output to the EARPHONES jack
for the individual channels.
Cursor
Audio output levels
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select a track (TRACK1 to TRACK12,
ALL MODE).
2
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the signal to record on the track
selected in steps 1 and 2.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
AUDIO button
4
L/R settings
TRACK1 to TRACK12
SDI1 to SDI12 (displayed when the
HKSR-9001 is installed): SDI signal
input to the AUX IN connector
ANA1 and ANA2: Analog audio signal
input to the AUDIO INPUT CH-1 and
CH-2 connectors
Channel numbers
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select a channel (1 to 12).
2
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The L/R setting of the selected channel
changes in the order L t R t LR t none.
Select “none” if you do not want to output the
selected channel to the EARPHONES jack.
Recording
85
Select LR if you want to output the channel
from both sides.
3
Repeat step 1 to select other channels
and step 2 to make L/R settings for
those channels.
4
When you are finished, turn the
SELECT/ENTER dial to select END,
and press the dial.
To select the digital audio signal mixing
method
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the scale to display.
Full Peak: Display 0 dBFS as the peak value.
Full Ref: Display the reference level (+4
dBu) as 0 dB.
Fine: Display a scale with steps of 0.25 dB
centered around.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
2
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To set recording audio levels
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the mixing method.
ADD: Simple addition
RMS: Multiplied average (room mean
square)
Average: Simple average
2
The AUDIO Setup >REC LEVEL in the VTR
menu allows you to set recording audio levels for
the individual channels.
Note
Recording levels cannot be set during playback.
Cursor
Recording levels
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
Setting Recording Audio Levels
To check recording audio levels, use the audio
level meters in the control panel display. The
display switches automatically between
recording audio levels during recording and
playback audio levels during playback.
To set the display range of the audio
level meters
The AUDIO Setup >METER TYPE in the VTR
menu allows you to set the display range of the
audio level meters.
Recording level settings
Channel numbers
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select a channel (1 to 12).
2
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The current recording level of the selected
channel is shown as a hexadecimal number.
86
Recording
UNI is shown for channels whose recording
levels have not been changed.
3
To select the type of time data to display
Use the TIMER SEL item.
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select UNI/VAL, and press the dial.
If you do not need to change the recording
level, set the recording level of the channel
selected in steps 1 and 2 to UNI and proceed
to step 5. If you do need to change the
recording level, set the recording level of the
channel selected in steps 1 and 2 to VAR and
proceed to step 4.
4
Turn the ADJUST knob to set the
recording level.
Turn clockwise to raise the level and turn
counterclockwise to lower it.
1
CTL: Display CTL signals.
TC: Display timecode.
UBIT: Display user bit data.
5
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
2
6
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select other
channels and steps 3 and 4 to set the
recording levels of those channels.
To select timecode to record
7
When you are finished, turn the
SELECT/ENTER dial to select END,
and press the dial.
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
You can select the following types of timecode.
Menu item
TCG
REGENE
MODE
SOURCE
PRST
–
Making Timecode and User Bits
Settings
Use the VTR >TC Setup menu to make timecode
and user bits settings.
RGN
INT L
To display the TC Setup menu
Press the menu selection button “TC”.
SELECT/
ENTER dial
TC button
EXT L
TC Setup menu screen
AUX L a)
Timecode
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
To reset the setting
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to move the
cursor to RESET, and press the dial.
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select CTL, TC (timecode), or UBIT
(user bits).
An arbitrary initial
timecode value can be
preset (R RUN/F RUN
and DF/NDF menu
items can be set to any
values).
Timecode in
synchronization with
the timecode recorded
in the longitudinal
direction on the tape.
Timecode in
synchronization with
the timecode input to
the TC IN connector.
Timecode in
synchronization with
the LTC timecode of the
SDI signal input to the
AUX IN connector.
Control panel
Recording
87
Menu item
TCG
REGENE
MODE
SOURCE
AUX
V a)
Timecode
Timecode in
synchronization with
the VITC timecode of
the SDI signal input to
the AUX IN connector.
a) Only when the HKSR-9001 is installed
To select user bits to record
You can select the following types of user bits.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
88
Menu item
User bits
OTHERS TCG
TCG
(MAIN) SET
MODE
>RT REC (MAIN)
>UBG
SOURCE
OFF
TCG
PRST Arbitrary user bits
can be preset
(TIMER PRESET
>TCG UBIT).
OFF
TCG
RGN
Regenerate the
user bits of the
timecode selected
with REGEN
SOURCE.
INT
–
Arbitrary user bits
can be preset,
regardless of the
setting of TCG
MODE (TIMER
PRESET >TCG
UBIT).
VITC
–
–
Record real time in
the user bits of
VITC only (LTC
user bits follow the
setting of UBG
SOURCE).
V+L
–
–
Record real time in
the user bits of
both VITC and
LTC.
LTC
–
–
Record real time in
the user bits of
LTC only (VITC
user bits follow the
setting of UBG
SOURCE).
Recording
To record timecode
You can use either of the following methods to
record timecode.
• Initialize the internal timecode generator with
an arbitrary initial value, and record the output
of the timecode generator.
• Record the output of the internal timecode
generator synchronized with external timecode
or timecode recorded in the longitudinal
direction on the tape.
To preset an arbitrary initial timecode value
Set the TCG MODE menu item to PRST, then
proceed as follows.
1
Select TIMER PRESET >TCG TC.
A preset value setting screen appears.
Cursor
2
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the digit that you want to modify,
then press the dial.
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
modify the value of the selected digit,
then press the dial.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the values of
all digits.
5
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to SET, then press the
dial.
If RUN MODE is set to F RUN, the timecode
starts advancing immediately.
To set all digits to 0
Reset the timecode value with the TIMER
RESET menu item.
To set the timecode generator value to
XX:00:00:00
You can set the current timecode generator value
to the “00:00:00” value of the next hour.
Example: TCG 01:12:34:12 t TCG 02:00:00:00
To synchronize the internal timecode generator
to external timecode
Use the following method to synchronize the
timecode generators of multiple camcorder.
Set the TCG MODE menu item to RGN, then use
REGENE SOURCE to select the signal which the
timecode generator should regenerate (see “To
select timecode to record” (page 87)).
To record user bits
By setting user bits, you can record up to eight
hexadecimal digits of information (date, time,
etc.) in timecode tracks.
To record user bits after setting an arbitrary
value
Set OTHERS (MAIN) >RT REC to OFF.
To initialize user bits to an arbitrary value, set the
TCG SET (MAIN) >UBG SOURCE menu item
to INT. (The TCG MODE menu item can be set
to any value.)
Alternatively, set the TCG MODE menu item to
PRST. The TCG SET (MAIN) >UBG SOURCE
menu item can be set to any value (see “To select
user bits to record” (page 88)).
To record real time in user bits
Select the recording method with OTHERS
(MAIN) > RT REC (VITC only, both VITC and
LTC, or LTC only). Regardless of the setting of
TCG SET (MAIN) >UBG SOURCE, real time is
recorded in the specified location.
To set the real time to record, proceed as follows.
1
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select RT SET, and press the dial.
The real time setting window appears.
2
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to the digit you want to
change, and press the dial.
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
change the value of the selected digit,
and press the dial.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired
value is displayed.
5
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to SET, and press the
dial.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
You can perform this setting from the control
panel or the subdisplay/menu operations section.
• Performing the setting from the control
panel
Press the TC button while holding the FUNC
and BACK buttons down.
• Performing the setting from the subdisplay/
menu operations section
When the TCG is displayed in the subdisplay,
press the SET button while holding the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial down.
To set the user bit value, proceed as described in
“To preset an arbitrary initial timecode value”. As
with timecode, all digits in user bit values can be
set to 0 by using the TIMER RESET menu item.
TeleFile recording
This system records the following TeleFile data
to cassette labels with each recording operation.
• IN (recording start point)
• OUT (recording end point)
• Tape Format
• Duration (time from In point to Out point)
• File Name (automatically assigned file name in
the format HDCAMSR_00X)
Note
TeleFile data may not be saved correctly if the power
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position within one
second after the end of recording.
When the number of files exceeds 70
Old files are deleted before new files are added.
To delete all or selected files, use the SRW-5000/
5500 to format the memory label or carry out a
file deleting operation.
Recording
89
For details, see “Assigning Functions to
Assignable Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Shooting
During recording, the REC indicator lights in
the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus
control, if necessary.
6
To stop recording, press the RUN
button again or press the STOP button
on the control panel.
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes
off.
Cassette control buttons
During recording, the cassette control buttons
(EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY) have no effect.
Note
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
If you record over a previously recorded tape without
using continuous recording, then the previously recorded
timecode may appear for a few seconds when you play
back the first part of a cut.
Continuous Recording
1
Push the assignable 4/AUTO BLK BAL
switch to AUTO BLK BAL to adjust the
black balance.
For details of black balance adjustment, see
“Adjusting the Black Balance” (page 54).
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to
match the lighting conditions, and
adjust the white balance.
For details, see “Adjusting the White Balance
(in Custom Mode)” (page 55).
3
4
Aim the camera at the subject and
adjust the focus and zoom.
If necessary, set the electronic shutter to
an appropriate mode and speed.
For details, see “Shutter Settings” (page 42).
5
To start recording, press the RUN
button on the main unit or the REC +
PLAY buttons on the control panel.
If the recording start/stop function has been
assigned to an assignable switch, that switch
functions as a REC START button.
90
Recording
When recording is paused, you can easily perform
continuous recording with a precision of ±0
frames simply by pressing the RUN button on the
main unit or the PAUSE button on the control
panel.
In other cases, before starting to record, you need
to manually cue up the tape to the point where you
want to start continuous recording.
If you want to record timecode that is continuous
with timecode already recorded on the tape, set
TCG MODE (see page 172) to RGN, and set
REGENE SOURCE to INT L (see page 173) in
the VTR >TC Setup menu.
When the unit is in recording pause
mode
You can start continuous recording by pressing
the RUN button on the main unit or the PAUSE
button on the control panel.
However, the time taken before recording starts
depends on the setting of the SYSTEM Setup
>SERVO >STBY OFF in the VTR menu.
Continuous recording in other cases
After rewinding or fast forwarding, after
removing the cassette, or on a tape that has been
partially recorded, you can obtain a continuous
recording by following the procedure below.
The EOS SEARCH function also allows you to
continue recording on a partially recorded tape.
For details on VTR menu operations, see “VTR
Menu Operations” (page 170).
EOS SEARCH function
Looking in the viewfinder, press the
PLAY button to start playback.
2
Press the STOP button at the desired
point to begin recording.
To continue from the end of a recording
already on the tape, press the STOP
button immediately after the end of the
previously recorded segment (within 0.5
seconds).
3
With the FUNC button held down,
press the PLAY button.
The tape will rewind and will be positioned at
the desired point to continue recording.
4
The current tape position
Tape running direction
Recorded portion
Blank portion
Searching for the end of the
recorded portion and turning
on recording pause mode
Note
If there is an unrecorded section between recorded
sections, the unit may behave as if that section is the end
of the last recorded section.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
1
Press the PAUSE button to start
recording.
Note
When SYSYTEM Setup >SERVO >EOS MODE in
the VTR menu is set to “NORM”, the unit plays
about 10 seconds of the recorded portion. If the end
point cannot be found, the unit enters recording
pause mode at that point.
Searching for the end of the last recorded
section and turning on recording pause
mode (EOS SEARCH function)
The EOS SEARCH LONG function allows the
unit to search for the end of a recorded section on
the tape after the recorded section is rewound and
played back.
To use this function, set SYSTEM Setup
>SERVO >EOS MODE in the VTR menu to
“LONG”.
Recording
91
Playback – Checking the
Recording
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
You can view playback video by pressing the
PLAY button. Playback video appears in the
viewfinder, and on monitors connected to the HD
SDI MON1 connector, the HD SDI MON2
connector, the TEST OUT connector, and the HD
SDI OUT A/B connectors (when the HKSR-9001
is installed).
You can also view playback video during
recording review, rewind searches (REW), and
fast-forward searches (F FWD).
In addition, you can search for images during the
paused state by turning the ADJUST knob (jog
search). Press the PAUSE button again to return
to the paused state.
To select time data to display during
playback
Proceed as follows to select the type of time data
to display during playback.
1
Display the TC Setup menu (see page
87).
2
Select TIMER SEL.
The TIMER SEL settings window appears.
(See “To select the type of time data to
display” (page 87).)
3
CTL: Display CTL signals recorded on the
tape.
TC: Display LTC or VITC read by the
internal timecode reader.
The TCR SEL item in the TC Setup
menu allows you to determine whether
the timecode reader is to read LTC or
VITC.
UBIT: Display user bit values inserted into
the playback timecode.
Preparing for Playback
To make audio monitor signal settings
The VTR >AUDIO Setup menu (see page 175)
allows you to make various settings related to
audio monitor signals for playback.
The procedures are basically the same as those for
making settings related to audio monitor signals
for recording.
To adjust the level of audio output to the
EARPHONES jack
Turn the LEVEL knob.
4
Note
Playback audio levels cannot be adjusted during
recording.
The PB LEVEL settings window appears when
you select the PB LEVEL item. The subsequent
procedure is the same as steps 1 to 5 in “To set
recording audio levels” (page 86).
To set the display range of the audio level meters
See page 86.
92
Playback – Checking the Recording
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To play back with tracking control
Tracking control can be manually operated or
automatically optimized.
To play back with manual tracking control, use
the following procedure.
1
Insert the cassette to play back and
press the PLAY button.
2
In the VTR >SYSTEM Setup menu
select SERVO >TRACKING, and press
the SELECT/ENTER dial.
To adjust playback audio levels
The PB LEVEL item in the VTR >AUDIO Setup
menu (see page 176) allows you to adjust audio
levels separately for each channel.
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select CTL, TC (timecode), or UBIT
(user bits).
A setting window opens.
To automatically optimize the tracking
Select “AUTO” in step 3 of the procedure for
playback with manual tracking control.
Step 4 and following are not necessary.
When the tracking has been automatically
optimized, the tracking control is not released
even if the cassette is ejected or the system is
powered off.
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select “VARI”, and press the dial.
4
Select ADJUST and press the SELECT/
ENTER dial.
The Tracking Adjust window appears.
When SYSTEM Setup >SERVO >REC
REVIEW in the VTR menu is set to NORM (the
factory default), you can review the last three
seconds of the recording. Pause the recording and
simultaneously press the FUNC and PLAY
buttons on the control panel. The last three
seconds of the recording are played back in the
viewfinder. You can also keep the FUNC +
PLAY buttons pressed to rewind the tape. The
unit rewinds the tape for as long as you keep the
buttons pressed (up to 10 seconds), and then
begins playback.
When SYSTEM Setup >SERVO >REC
REVIEW is set to ALL, you can review the whole
cut. Pause the recording and press the FUNC +
PLAY buttons. The unit rewinds to the start of the
last cut and plays it back.
The REC REVIEW function can also be assigned
to the assignable buttons.
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
The “CH.COND” indication in the HOME
screen flashes in yellow.
Checking the Last Three Seconds
of the Recording –Recording
Review
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Buttons/Switch” (page 51).
Note
The recording review functions only works if the
recording you have made is at least three seconds long.
5
While viewing the channel condition
display, turn the ADJUST knob or
SELECT/ENTER dial to adjust so that
the channel condition display lights in
green.
To release tracking control
Eject the cassette, or power the system off.
The setting of SERVO >TRACKING in the
SYSTEM Setup menu returns to “UNITY”.
Checking the Recording on a
Color Video Monitor –Playback in
Color
Connect an HD color video monitor with an
HDSDI input connector to the HD SDI MON1
connector or the HD SDI MON2 connector of the
camcorder. By pressing the PLAY button, you
can view the recorded picture of high quality.
The signals output from these connectors depend
on menu settings.
Playback – Checking the Recording
93
For details, see “Setting the Camera Outputs” (page
56).
To output VTR playback signals to the HD SDI
MON1 and HD SDI MON2 connectors, and output
the camera picture to the viewfinder and the
TEST OUT connector
On the <PB/MON LUT> page (see page 121) of
the OPERATION menu, set MON to AUTO and
set VF/VBS to CAM.
HD monitor /SD monitor
Video input
(analog)
Chapter 4 Recording/Playback
HDSDI input
HD monitor
Note
No video appears if MONITOR OUT in the <POWER
SAVE> page of the Camera >MAINTENANCE menu is
set to PWR SAVE. Set it to ACTIVE.
Checking the Camera Picture on
the Viewfinder and/or Color Video
Monitor
Normally, the signals output from the TEST OUT
connector, HD SDI MON1 connector and the HD
SDI MON2 connector switch from the camera
picture to the recorded picture during playback.
The viewfinder and an external monitor also
switch to the recorded picture. However, by
setting VF/VBS and MON on the <PB/MON
LUT> page of the Camera >OPERATION menu,
you can choose to output the camera picture even
during playback.
To output VTR playback signals to the
viewfinder, TEST OUT connector, HD SDI MON1
connector and HD SDI MON2 connector
Set VF/VBS and MON on the <PB/MON LUT>
page (see page 131) of the OPERATION menu to
AUTO.
94
Playback – Checking the Recording
HDSDI input
HD monitor
Chapter
5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
You can use the memory on the optional HKSR9002 Picture Cache Board to perform the
following kinds of recording while maintaining
the high quality of the HDCAM-SR (1920 ×
1080) format.
• SR Motion: Provides slow and quick motion
effects.
• Timer Rec: Captures and records images at
specified intervals.
• Cache Rec: Allows you to record video and
audio from a few seconds before the time when
you press the recording start button (in standby
on mode).
When installing the HKSR-9002 in this unit, refer to
the HKSR-9002 Installation Manual.
For details on SR Motion, see Chapter 6 “SR Motion
(With HKSR-9002 Installed)” (page 99).
Timer Rec
Note
Timer Rec cannot be used at the same time as Cache Rec.
Manual Timer Rec
Note
Set SELECT FPS in the SYSTEM Setup menu to “OFF”.
1
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, set EDIT
>TIMER REC to “MANU”.
2
In the submenu window, select “Manu
Frm” and then press the SELECT/
ENTER dial.
Chapter 5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
The Timer Rec function allows you to use the
memory of the optional HKSR-9002 board to
capture and record images at specified intervals.
It is comparable to the Interval Rec function of
previous models, but enables time-lapse
recording and recording over longer periods.
The following two methods are available.
Manual Timer Rec: Specifies the number of
frames to record in a single take. Each time
that recording starts, the specified number of
frames are captured continuously.
Auto Timer Rec: Specifies the number of frames
to record in a single take and the interval
(seconds) between takes. Each time that
recording starts after the specified interval,
the specified number of frames are captured
continuously.
The following formats can be recorded by Timer
Rec.
1080 422: 23.98/24/25/29.97PsF, 50P, 59.94P
1080 444SQ/444HQ: 23.98/24/25/29.97PsF
A setting window opens.
Timer Rec
95
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the number of frames to record in
one take.
4
Start recording.
In Manual Timer Rec mode, “M” appears on
the HOME screen before the number of lines
of the signal format.
Auto Timer Rec
Note
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, set SELECT FPS to
“OFF”.
1
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, set EDIT
>TIMER REC to “AUTO”.
2
In the submenu window, select
“Interval” and then press the SELECT/
ENTER dial.
A setting window opens.
Chapter 5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
96
After about 0.5 seconds of normal tape
recording, the specified number of frames are
accumulated in the memory of the HKSR9002. Recording to tape starts again when the
amount of data reaches the specified amount.
The tally indicator of this unit lights during
storage to memory and during recording to
tape.
During Manual Timer Rec recording, each
time the PAUSE button is pressed, the
specified number of frames are accumulated
in the memory and the unit is put into
recording standby mode.
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to set
the recording interval (hours/minutes/
seconds).
4
In the submenu window, select “Auto
Frm” and then press the SELECT/
ENTER dial.
A setting window opens.
5
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
specify the number of frames to record
in one take.
6
Put the unit into recording paused
mode.
In Auto Timer Rec mode, “T” appears on the
HOME screen before the number of lines of
the signal format.
To check the amount of data in memory
Press FUNC + HOME twice. The amount
appears at the bottom of the display (see page
101).
To cancel Manual Timer Rec mode
Press the STOP button.
Note
Do not stop recording until the amount of data in
memory exceeds 20%. When there is only a small
amount of data in memory, recording may stop without
transferring the images to tape.
Timer Rec
Recording at the specified intervals of
specified time begins, and the specified
number of frames are accumulated in the
memory of the HKSR-9002. Recording to
tape starts when the amount of data reaches
the specified amount. The tally indicator of
this unit lights during storage to memory and
during recording to tape.
To check the amount of data in memory
Press FUNC + HOME twice. The amount
appears at the bottom of the display, together
with information such as the time remaining
until the start of the next recording (see page
101).
Cache Rec
Note
Do not stop recording until the amount of data in
memory exceeds 20%. When there is only a small
amount of data in memory, recording may stop without
transferring the images to tape.
The Cache Rec function captures about 200
frames of the video and audio that the camera is
currently shooting (or about 100 frames in HQ
mode) to the memory. Thus, when you press the
recording start button, the recording starts with
the data stored about 200 frames (or about 100
frames in HQ mode) before (if the unit is in
standby on mode and SR Motion is not being
used).
Notes
With the formats which support SR Motion,
Cache Rec can be used together with SR Motion.
For details on the formats, see the table on page 102.
To record using the Cache Rec function
1
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, set EDIT
>CACHE REC to “25%”, “50%”,
“75%”, “100%”, or “Quick Rec”.
When the Cache Rec function is active, “C”
appears on the HOME screen before the
number of lines of the signal format.
Cache Rec
Chapter 5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
• To maximize the Cache Rec effect, it is recommended
that the Cache Rec function be used in standby on
mode and with SR Motion disabled. Though the Cache
Rec function can be used in standby off mode or
together with SR Motion, the unit may be unable to
record video and audio from immediately before you
press the recording start button.
• Cache Rec cannot be used at the same time as Timer
Rec.
97
2
Put this unit into standby on mode (the
mode in which the drum is rotating).
To switch from standby off mode to
standby on mode
When the unit is in stop mode, press the
STOP button. When recording is paused,
press the REC button.
Note
To make the most effective use of the Cache Rec
capability, be sure to start recording with the unit in
standby on mode. The time after which the unit
leaves standby on mode and enters standby off
mode can be selected with the SERVO >STBY
OFF item in the SYSTEM Setup menu. Select a
time that will be long enough for your shooting
conditions.
3
Do one of the following to start
recording.
• With the REC button held down, press the
PLAY button.
Note
Chapter 5 Memory Recording (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
98
Be sure to press the REC button first. If you press
the PLAY button first, playback starts and the video
and audio data that has been saved to memory is
cleared.
• Perform sequential recording (you will
need to record at least four seconds before
pausing) (see page 90).
• Record after pausing.
Record four seconds or more, and then
press the PAUSE button to pause. The unit
starts to save video and audio data to
memory.
Then press the PAUSE button again to
resume recording. The unit starts to transfer
data from memory to the tape.
Maximizing the Cache Rec effect
The Cache Rec function advances recording start
timing by up to about 100 frames (or about 200
frames for 422 or 444SQ, when the frame rate is
30PsF or lower). (The number of frames is
equivalent to about 4 seconds (or about 8 seconds
for 422 or 444SQ, when the frame rate is 30PsF
or lower).)
The recording start timing varies depending on
whether the SR Motion is used for recording. The
following table shows how many seconds of data
are recorded in advance of the time that the REC
Cache Rec
button is pressed. (The values shown are
approximate and obtained when the frame
frequency is 1080/59P.)
Status of this unit
Recording start timing
Standby on Standby off
mode
mode
Not using SR Motion About three About three
seconds
seconds
before
before 0 to
two seconds
after
Using SR Motion
About two
About two
seconds
seconds after
before
Note
The values listed above vary depending on the frame
frequency and the current operating conditions. You
should make a test recording before using the Cache Rec
function to record important material.
Chapter
6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Overview
The SR Motion functions of HDCAM-SR allow
you to obtain slow and quick motion effects in
high-quality, high-resolution full HD
(1920×1080). By selecting the number of frames
to shoot (the number of frames recorded each
second), you can obtain slow and quick motion
effects on playback. You can review the motion
effects immediately after shooting. Since only the
required number of frames are recorded to tape,
no format conversion is needed before playback.
SR Motion has the following function.
Function
Select FPS
Notes
• The optional HKSR-9002 Picture Cache Board is
required to use SR Motion.
• Audio signals are not recorded correctly during SR
Motion recording.
SR Motion allows you to obtain motion effects by
setting the number of frames at shooting time to a
different value than the number of frames in the
recorded material (number of frames at playback
time, target frame frequency).
Target frame frequency
Normally, the frame frequency of recorded
material is set before shooting. For example, it is
usually 24 Hz for movies, and usually 29.97 Hz or
25 Hz for TV programming.
After shooting, when the material is played back,
it is played at that set rate. In SR Motion, the
number of frames per second in the recorded
material is called the “target frame frequency”.
SR Motion achieves motion effects by
appropriately setting three variables: the “target
frame frequency”, the “system frequency” at
shooting time, and the “number of frames shot” at
shooting time.
In SR Motion shooting, you can obtain slow or
quick motion effects by recording with a system
frequency or number of frames set to a value
different from the target frame frequency. If you
record with the system frequency and the number
of frames set to the same value as the target frame
frequency, normal speed video can be obtained.
Examples of how to use SR Motion
Example of slow motion
This example describes shooting and recording
with Select FPS function at the system frame
frequency of 59.94P, and playback at the system
frame frequency of 23.98PsF. When video shot
and recorded at 60 frames/second (FPS) is played
back at 24 FPS, it is played back in slow motion
at 24/60 = 0.4 times normal playback speed. If
you set the format for recording according to the
target frame frequency (system frequency at
playback), the timecode can continuously
advance during playback. The recorded tape can
Overview
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Interval
Frame
Features
Reference
Provides smooth slow Page 106
and quick motion
effects without skipped
frames. Changing the
number of frames to
extract during
recording provides
motion effects with
variable speeds (Ramp
function).
Provides slow and
Page 113
quick motion effects
without afterimaging.
Changing the number
of frames to extract
during recording
provides motion effects
with variable speeds
(Ramp function).
Overview of SR Motion
Recording/Playback
99
be used for editing or other postprocessing in
1080/23.98PsF format.
Example of quick motion
This example describes shooting at the system
frame frequency of 23.98PsF, recording at 6
frames/second (FPS) and played back at the
system frame frequency of 23.98PsF, it is played
back in quick motion at 24/6 = 4 times normal
playback speed. The recorded tape can be used
for editing or other post-processing in 1080/
23.98PsF format.
Number of frames
FPS (Frames/second)
60
Slow motion
Target frame 30
frequency:
23.98PsF
Relation between the target frame
frequency and the number of frames shot
To obtain the desired slow and quick motion
effects, it is necessary to set the appropriate
number of frames according to the target frame
frequency. To obtain quick motion effects, shoot
with undercranking. To obtain slow motion
effects, shoot with overcranking.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Example at the target frame frequency of
23.98PsF
To obtain quick motion effects: Set the number
of frames to 1 to 23 FPS.
To obtain slow motion effects: Set the number of
frames to 25 to 60 FPS.
For example, shooting at 60 FPS causes playback
in slow motion at 0.4 times normal playback
speed.
24 FPS
Normal
speed
playback
Quick motion
1
Relation between the target frame
frequency and timecode
When the system frequency is 23.98 Hz,
timecode normally advances from 0 to 23 frames.
This becomes the timecode of the recorded
material (target frame frequency). If the rate at
which timecode advances is not constant within
the recorded material, a timecode discontinuity
occurs at playback time. For this reason, set the
target frame rate at recording time to the same
value as the timecode at playback time.
In SR Motion shooting, it is possible to set the
target frame frequency and the system frequency
at recording time to different values. For
example, if 60 frames are recorded with the target
frame frequency set to 23.98 Hz and the system
frequency set to 59.94 Hz, then 60 frames per
second are recorded, but the timecode does not
advance from 0 to 59 frames. Instead, it advances
from 0 to 23 frames, which matches the target
frame frequency. If one second is recorded with
these settings, beginning with second 00 frame
00, then the timecode advances quickly from
second 00 frames 00 to 23, and then continues to
advance as second 01 frames 00 to 23, and finally
as second 02 frames 00 to 11, at which point 60
frames have been recorded (see the following
figure).
When a tape recorded in this way is played on a
VTR that has been set to a system frequency of
23.98 Hz (the tape is played at a target frame
frequency of 23.98PsF), then the video is 24/60 =
100
Overview
0.4 times normal speed. But the timecode
advance by one second in the space of one
second. Even if the slow-motion section follows a
section recorded at normal speed, the playback
timecode is continuous and no discontinuity
occurs.
1 second recorded
S59P(23PsF)
60 frames in total
Record at 60 fps
1 second played back
Play back at
23PsF
24 frames in total
24 frames playback/60 frames recorded = 0.4 times normal speed
Operation during slow and quick motion
shooting
FPS value
Operation Flow
The operation flow is shown below.
Set the target frame frequency (playback
timecode)
r
Notes
• During recording, data transfer to the tape starts when
you press the STOP button or PAUSE button to stop or
temporarily stop the recording. The tally indicator on
the rear side of this unit flashes four times per second
during data transfer. Be sure not to power off this unit
until the data transfer to the tape is complete.
• Tape recording is not performed until the amount of
data stored in the memory exceeds the specified value.
• Input data is not recorded while the bar graph shows
0%.
Select the system signal format to use
during shooting
r
Set SELECT FPS to ON
r
Set the number of frames to shoot
r
Shoot the scene
r
Review
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
During slow and quick motion shooting, input
data is stored in the memory of the HKSR-9002.
Transfer of the data to tape starts when a specified
amount of data has been stored. Therefore, the
tape does not run for a short time after recording
starts. The tape starts running when data transfer
from the memory starts, and stops running when
the specified amount of data has been transferred.
Recording proceeds by repeating this series of
operations. You can check the amount of data
stored in the memory of the HKSR-9002 with the
numeric value and bar graph shown in the MEM:
area at the bottom of the control panel display.
Playback of tapes recorded with SR Motion
When you play a tape that was recorded with SR
Motion, the FPS value in SR Motion recording is
shown in the playback frequency position of the
PB line.
Target Frame Frequencies and Signal Formats
The following table shows the combinations of
target frame frequencies and signals formats that
are required for SR Motion shooting.
Overview
101
Menu Settings
Format
SIGNAL FRAME
(target
frame
frequency)
4:2:2
23.98
24
25
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
102
29.97
Overview
State of the unit
FPS
SELECT
FORMAT FPS
System
Format
frame
indication
frequency
(Hz)
Reference
signal
frame
frequency
(Hz)
TEST
OUT
output
(when VBS
is selected)
23/24
23.98
1080 S23PsF
(23PsF) 4:2:2
23.98
525/59.94i
29/30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
(23PsF) 4:2:2
29.97
525/59.94i
DEF or 59/
60
59.94
1080 S59P
(23PsF) 4:2:2
29.97
525/59.94i
23/24
24
1080 S24PsF
(24PsF) 4:2:2
24
625/50i
25
25
1080 S25PsF
(24PsF) 4:2:2
25
625/50i
29/30
30
1080 S30PsF
(24PsF) 4:2:2
30
525/60i a)
50
50
1080 S50P
(24PsF) 4:2:2
25
625/50i
DEF or 59/
60
60
1080 S60P
(24PsF) 4:2:2
30
525/60i a)
25
25
1080 S25PsF
(25PsF) 4:2:2
25
625/50i
29/30
30
1080 S30PsF
(25PsF) 4:2:2
30
525/60i a)
DEF or 50
50
1080 S50P
(25PsF) 4:2:2
25
625/50i
59/60
60
1080 S60P
(25PsF) 4:2:2
30
525/60i a)
29/30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
(29PsF) 4:2:2
29.97
525/59.94i
DEF or 59/
60
59.94
1080 S59P
(29PsF) 4:2:2
29.97
525/59.94i
When set to
“ON” b
Menu Settings
Format
SIGNAL FRAME
(target
frame
frequency)
4:4:4 SQ
23.98
24
25
4:4:4 HQ 23.98
24
25
29.97
System
Format
frame
indication
frequency
(Hz)
23/24
23.98
1080 S23PsF
23.98
(23PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/59
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(23PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/59
59/60
59.94
1080 S59P
29.97
(23PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/59
23/24
24
1080 S24PsF
24
(24PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
625/50i
25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(24PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
625/50i
DEF or 29/
30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(24PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/60i a)
50
50
1080 S50P
25
(24PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
625/50i
59/60
60
1080 S60P
30
(24PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/60i a)
25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(25PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
625/50i
DEF or 29/
30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(25PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/60i a)
50
50
1080 S50P
25
(25PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
625/50i
59/60
60
1080 S60P
30
(25PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/60i a)
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(29PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/59
59/60
59.94
1080 S59P
29.97
(29PsF) 4:4:4 SQ
525/59
23.98
1080 S23PsF
23.98
(23PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
525/59.94i
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(23PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
525/59.94i
23/24
24
1080 S24PsF
24
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
625/50i
25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
625/50i
DEF or 29/
30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
525/60i a)
DEF or 25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(25PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
625/50i
29/30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(25PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
525/60i a)
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(29PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
525/59.94i
23/24
When set to
“ON” b
When set to
“ON” b
Reference
signal
frame
frequency
(Hz)
TEST
OUT
output
(when VBS
is selected)
Overview
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
29.97
State of the unit
FPS
SELECT
FORMAT FPS
103
Menu Settings
Format
SIGNAL FRAME
(target
frame
frequency)
4:4:4 HQ 23.98
12bit
24
25
29.97
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
104
State of the unit
FPS
SELECT
FORMAT FPS
System
Format
frame
indication
frequency
(Hz)
23/24
23.98
1080 S23PsF
23.98
(23PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
525/59.94i
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(23PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
525/59.94i
23/24
24
1080 S24PsF
24
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
625/50i
25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
625/50i
DEF or 29/
30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(24PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
525/60i a)
DEF or 25
25
1080 S25PsF
25
(25PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
625/50i
29/30
30
1080 S30PsF
30
(25PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
525/60i a)
DEF or 29/
30
29.97
1080 S29PsF
29.97
(29PsF) 4:4:4 HQ
12bit
525/59.94i
When set to
“ON” b
a) Characters can be displayed. However, camera images
are not output.
Example settings
Signal format (SIGNAL): 4:2:2
Target frame frequency (FRAME): 24 Hz
In this case, 23/24, 25 or 29/30 can be selected for
“FPS FORMAT”.
These selections differ in their system
frequencies, slow motion effects, and VBS
output.
• When 23/24 is selected
The system frame frequency is set to 24 Hz.
Input a 24 Hz signal as reference signal. The
maximum number of frames is 24 FPS. The
VBS output is converted to 625/50i.
When 1FRM is selected while using the Interval
Frame function, the number of frames is 24 FPS
(1x speed).
• When 25 is selected
The system frame frequency is set to 25 Hz.
Input a 25 Hz signal as reference signal. VBS
Overview
Reference
signal
frame
frequency
(Hz)
TEST
OUT
output
(when VBS
is selected)
output is 625/50i. The maximum number of
frames is 25 FPS.
• When 29/30 is selected
The system frame frequency is set to 30 Hz.
Input a 30 Hz signal as reference signal. Since
the number of frames can be set up to 30 FPS,
this selection is effective for further enhancing
slow motion effects. However, VBS output is
525/60i and camera images are not output.
• When 50 is selected
The system frame frequency is set to 50 Hz.
Input a 25 Hz signal as reference signal. Since
the number of frames can be set up to 50 FPS,
this selection is effective for further enhancing
slow motion effects. VBS output is 625/50i.
• When 59/60 is selected
The system frame frequency is set to 60 Hz.
Input a 30 Hz signal as reference signal. Since
the number of frames can be set up to 60 FPS,
this selection is effective for obtaining the
maximum slow motion effect. However, VBS
output is 525/60i and camera images are not
output.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Overview
105
Select FPS Function
Select FPS allows you to obtain smooth motion
effects without skipped frames by adjusting the
number of frames to be shot. Changing the
number of frames to extract during recording
provides motion effects with variable speeds
(Ramp function).
The number of frames recorded in one second is
displayed in units of FPS (frames per second).
It can be set at steps of 1 FPS within the following
range.
For 4:2:2 formats: 1 to 60 FPS
For 4:4:4 formats: 1 to 60 FPS
For details on the Ramp function, see “Using the
Ramp Function” (page 110).
Relation Between the Number of Frames Shot and the Number of
Playback Frames (Outline of Select FPS)
To obtain the desired slow or quick motion effects using the Select FPS function, it is necessary to set the
appropriate number of frames to shoot.
If you shoot with the number of frames shot set to 50 FPS, the camera module generates 50 frames (50
FPS) while the data is transferred from the camera module to the VTR module at 60P. As a result,
transferred data is padded with frames (ineffective frames) in which no signal is recorded. This unit
extracts and stores only effective frames and records them onto tape. When the tape is played back at 24P,
a slow motion effect of 0.48 times normal playback speed is obtained.
The following figure illustrates the operation described above.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
106
Select FPS Function
Format: S59P (23PsF) SELECT FPS = ON
Number of frames shot: 50 FPS
Shooting at 50 FPS
Data transfer at 60P
NV: Ineffective frame
HKSR-9002
Store only effective frames in memory.
Record only effective frames onto tape (record with continuous 24F timecode).
Converted to 23.98PsF when SELECT FPS is set to “OFF”
Playback: 23.98PsF
Playback at 23.98PsF
Using the Select FPS Function
1
2 Set as shown below.
Make system settings.
Select the target frame frequency (24, 25, or
30PsF), and select the recording format
(4:2:2, 4:4:4 SQ, 4:4:4 HQ, or 4:4:4 HQ
12bit).
On formats available for Select FPS shooting,
see page 109.
Example settings: Settings for 24 frames of
target frame frequency (23.98PsF) and
4:4:4 SQ recording format.
1 Carry out step 1 of “To set with
FORMAT” (page 78) in “Selecting the
System Signal Format”.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Smooth slow motion playback at 0.48 times
normal playback speed
3 In the submenu window, select [SET].
The format is switched, and “S59P(23PsF)”
appears in the display (for about 30 seconds).
Select FPS Function
107
Playback speed
The S in S59P indicates that SR Motion is
enabled (SELECT FPS is set to “ON”). The
59P indicates that FPS FORMAT is set to
59.94P. (23PsF) indicates that the target
frame frequency setting is 23.98PsF.
Number of frames (FPS)
To confirm the new setting, press the
SELECT/ENTER dial or leave it unrotated
for three seconds. The display returns to the
original screen. A screen like the one shown
below appears if you hold down the FUNC
button and press the SELECT/ENTER dial
again while the above screen is displayed.
This new screen remains even if three
seconds pass with no operation. While this
screen is visible, you can check the setting
that specifies the number of frames to shoot.
To do so, hold down the FUNC button and
press the HOME button. The signal format
display at the bottom of the screen changes
into the SR Motion display, allowing you to
check the number of frames setting.
To make the timecode continuous
Make the following settings in the TC Setup
menu.
RUN MODE: R RUN (Rec Run)
TCG MODE: PRST (Preset) or RGN
(Regen), both are available.
REGEN SOURCE: INT L (Internal LTC)
(following the timecode recorded on the
tape)
For details on the TC Setup menu, see “TC
(Timecode) Setup Menu” (page 172).
2
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
Set the number of frames to shoot.
1 While holding the FUNC button down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
2 Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to set
the number of frames to shoot. (The
setting range is 1 to 60 FPS.)
You can also change the number of frames as
you are shooting (Ramp function). For details,
see “Using the Ramp Function” (page 110)
3
108
Select FPS Function
Start shooting.
1 Check the timecode of the current
position (make a memo), so that you
will be able to rewind after shooting.
2 Set the number of frames to be shot
(FPS value).
3 Start recording. During recording,
change the FPS value as required by
Turning the SELECT/ENTER dial.
4 Stop recording.
4
Conduct a review.
1 Rewind to the timecode position that
you noted in step 3 1.
2 Set SELECT FPS in the SYSTEM
Setup >FORMAT menu to “OFF” to
set the playback timecode to 24
frames/sec (the target frame frequency
to 23.98PsF).
3 Press the SET button to switch the
format.
4 Press the PLAY button to start
playback.
You can check the slow or quick motion
effect at the target frame frequency of
23.98PsF. The timecode advances from 0 to
23 frames per second. You can also review
the recording by using simple playback
without checking the slow or quick motion
effect.
Notes
• Audio cannot be recorded normally when SR Motion
is used for shooting.
• When the FPS is set to a lower value than the value set
for FPS FORMAT (system frame frequency),
recording to the tape proceeds in starts and stops,
because data is recorded only when a certain amount
has been accumulated in the unit’s internal memory.
Start recording. During recording,
change the FPS value as required.
3
Stop recording.
4
While holding the FUNC button down,
press the PLAY button.
This starts a recording review. The unit
rewinds the tape for three seconds and then
starts playback of the scene you have just
shot. When playback ends, the unit enters
recording pause mode at the point where
recording ended.
To check more than three seconds earlier
If you hold down the FUNC button while
pressing the PLAY button for three seconds
or more, the unit rewinds as long as you keep
the buttons held down. If the setting of
SERVO >REC REVIEW in the SYSTEM
Setup menu is “NORM”, you can rewind up
to 10 seconds. If the setting is “ALL”, you
can hold down the FUNC button and press
the PLAY button once. The unit will rewind
to the start of the most recently recorded cut
and start playback.
Formats available for Select FPS
shooting
Note
The 4:4:4 format is not available when the scan method
is progressive and the target frame frequency is 50 Hz or
higher.
The following table shows the combinations of
setting items in the SYSTEM Setup >FORMAT
menu.
a: Available
z: Not available
To perform simple playback without checking
motion effects
Simple playback allows you to check recorded
video in fewer steps than normal playback.
Simple playback does not use the specified target
frame frequency, so it does not allow you to check
slow or quick motion effects.
1
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
For more information about simple playback,
see the next section “To perform simple
playback without checking motion effects”.
2
Set the number of frames to shoot (FPS
value).
Select FPS Function
109
SELECT FPS: ON
FPS
FORMAT
(system
frame
frequency)
FRAME SIGNAL (signal format)
(target
4:2:2
4:4:4 4:4:4
frame
(YCbCr) SQ
HQ/
frequency)
(RGB) 4:4:4
HQ
12bit
(RGB)
23.98
23.98
a
a
a
24
24
a
a
a
25
24
a
a
a
25
a
a
a
23.98
a
a
a
29.97
a
a
a
24
a
a
a
25
a
a
a
24
a
a
z
25
a
a
z
50
a
z
z
23.98
a
a
z
29.97
a
a
z
59.94
a
z
z
29.97
30
50
59.94
60
24
a
a
z
25
a
a
z
50
a
z
z
manually vary the speed within that range, and
auto mode, in which you specify start and end
frames and a duration, and allow the unit to vary
the speed automatically according to preset rules.
Proceed as follows to set up the Ramp function.
1
A setting window opens.
2
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
FRAME SIGNAL (signal format)
(target
4:2:2
4:4:4 4:4:4
frame
(YCbCr) SQ
HQ/
frequency)
(RGB) 4:4:4
HQ
12bit
(RGB)
–
23.98
a
a
a
24
a
a
a
25
a
a
a
29.97
a
a
a
50
a
z
z
59.94
a
z
z
Using the Ramp Function
The Ramp function allows you to achieve speed
variations by changing the number of frames shot
(FPS) during Select FPS recording.
There are two Ramp modes: manual mode, in
which you specify upper and lower limits and
110
Select FPS Function
Select the Ramp function operating
mode from the following.
Auto(Linear): Varies the number of frames
shot (FPS) linearly.
Auto(Inverse): Varies the inverse of the
number of frames shot (frm) linearly.
Auto(Even): Varies the number of frames
shot so that there are the same number of
frames for each frequency.
Auto(User): Varies the number of frames
shot along a user-specified curve.
Manual: Varies the number of frames shot
manually within preset upper and lower
limits.
Off: Varies the number of frames shot
manually with no range limits.
SELECT FPS: OFF
FPS
FORMAT
(system
frame
frequency)
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, select
EDIT >RAMP.
3
Make the settings required by the
selected mode.
When Auto(Linear), Auto(Inverse), or
Auto(Even) was selected, see the next section,
“To vary the number of frames shot
automatically”.
When Auto(User) was selected, see “To vary the
number of frames shot along a user-specified
curve” (page 111).
When Manual or Off was selected, see “To vary
the number of frames shot manually” (page
112).
To vary the number of frames shot
automatically
When the number of frames shot changes to that
of the end point, the values of the ramp start
point and the ramp end point are exchanged.
Operating mode: Auto (Linear), Auto (Inverse),
or Auto (Even)
To stop the number of frames shot
changes
1
With the FUNC button held down, press the
SELECT/ENTER dial again.
This also causes the values of the ramp start
point and the ramp end point to be exchanged.
Turn the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to set the Auto
Spd1, Auto Spd2, and Duration items.
Auto Spd1: The number of frames shot of
the ramp start point, or the number of
frames shot of the ramp end point (FPS)
Auto Spd2: The number of frames shot of
the ramp start point, or the number of
frames shot of the ramp end point (FPS)
(This is the end point number of frames
shot when the start point number of
frames shot was set with Auto Spd1.
Otherwise it is the start point number of
frames shot.)
Duration: The time (seconds) from the start
of the ramp to its end.
2
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
3
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
To vary the number of frames shot along
a user-specified curve
Note
You will need to prepare a curve file in advance before
carrying out this procedure.
For details on how to create a curve file, see “To
create a curve file” (page 112).
Operating mode: Auto(User)
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” containing a
curve file into the Memory Stick slot.
For details on “Memory Stick” operations, see
“Using a “Memory Stick”” (page 189).
2
Select Load Curve.
A list of curve files saved in the “Memory
Stick” appears.
End number of frames shot
Duration
Start number of
frames shot
Operating mode
Frames recorded
on tape
3
Select a file.
The curve saved in the selected file appears,
allowing you to check it.
4
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
A screen like the following appears, in which
you can check the settings. (This example
shows the information that appears when the
Auto(Even) mode is selected.)
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The number of frames shot starts to change.
Select FPS Function
111
2
Open a new file in a text editor.
3
Enter two or more number of frames
shot values. Enter each value on its own
line.
4
Save the file as a CSV file (file extension
“.csv”) in the “Memory Stick” (located
in /MSSONY/PRO/VTR/SRW9000).
Note
4
If you specify a folder other than the above folder,
the function does not work.
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The selected file is loaded.
For example, you could enter the following
values.
10
50
6
30
24
24
60
30
A curve like the following is produced when
you save the values entered in the text file as
a CSV file.
To change the file selection
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to select
“CANCEL”, and then press the dial.
5
Select “Duration”, and then turn the
ADJUST knob or the SELECT/ENTER
dial to set the time (seconds) from the
start to the end of the ramp.
6
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
7
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
A screen like the following appears, allowing
you to check the settings.
Ramp start
Ramp end
To vary the number of frames shot
manually
8
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
Variation of the number of frames shot
begins along the selected curve.
To create a curve file
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the
Memory Stick slot of the PC.
For details on “Memory Stick” operations, see
“Using a “Memory Stick”” (page 189).
112
Duration
Select FPS Function
Set the number of frames shot manually if you
want to set upper and lower number of frames
shot limits.
Operating mode: Manual
1
Turn the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to set the Manu
Spd1 and Manu Spd2 items.
Manu Spd1: The upper or lower limit of the
number of frames shot (FPS)
Manu Spd2: The upper or lower limit of the
number of frames shot (FPS)
(This is the lower limit when the upper
limit was set with Manu Spd1.
Otherwise it is the upper limit.)
2
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
3
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
A screen like the following appears, in which
you can check the settings.
4
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
5
Turn the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to vary the
number of frames shot.
Interval Frame Function
Even when you use a camera that does not
support the Select FPS function, you can obtain
motion effects without afterimaging by using the
Interval Frame function. You can obtain variablespeed motion effects by changing the frame
frequency during recording (Ramp function).
This function extracts frames from video material
at a frame frequency set on this unit, stores them
in memory, and records the stored frames onto
tape.
The frame interval of shot frames is set in units of
FRM (frames).
It can be set in steps of 1FRM within the
following ranges.
For 4:2:2 formats: 1 to 64FRM
For 4:4:4 formats: 1 to 32FRM
For details on the Ramp function, see “Using the
Ramp Function” (page 110).
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
To temporarily remove the upper and
lower limits
With the FUNC button held down, press the
SELECT/ENTER dial again.
Interval Frame Function
113
Relation Between the Number of Frames Shot and the Frame interval
(Outline of Interval Frame)
To obtain the desired slow or quick motion effects using the Interval Frame function, you need to set the
appropriate frame interval according to the number of frames shot.
When the camera has shot the material in 24P format (at 24 FPS, or in other words at a system frequency
of 24 frames), and you set the frame interval to 6FRM, then a frame is extracted once every 6th frame
from the 24 frames of video signals shot by the camera. In other words, 4 frames of video signals are
extracted every second and recorded onto tape.
When the signals are played back at 24PsF, a quick motion effect of 6 times normal playback speed is
obtained.
The following figure illustrates the operation described above.
Format: S23PsF (23PsF) SELECT FPS = VTR
Frame interval: 6FRM (4 FPS)
Shooting and transfer at 24P
22 23 24 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
24P
Selection of frames to record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
24P
Store in memory at intervals of 6 frames.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
114
1 7 13 19 25
HKSR-9002
Selected
frames
Record only extracted frames onto tape (record with continuous 24F timecode).
Converted to 23.98PsF when SELECT FPS is set to “OFF”.
Playback: 24P
Playback at 24P
1 7 13 19 25
Quick motion at 6 times normal playback speed without
afterimaging
Interval Frame Function
139 145 151
To make the timecode continuous
Make the following settings in the TC Setup
menu.
RUN MODE: R RUN (Rec Run)
TCG MODE: PRST (Preset) or RGN
(Regen), both are available.
REGEN SOURCE: INT L (Internal LTC)
(following the timecode recorded on the
tape)
Using the Interval Frame Function
1
Make system settings.
Select the target frame frequency (24, 25, or
30PsF), and select the recording format and
picture quality (4:2:2, 4:4:4 SQ, 4:4:4 HQ, or
4:4:4 HQ 12bit).
Example settings: Settings for 24 frames of
target frame frequency (23.98PsF) and
4:2:2 recording format and picture
quality.
1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “To set with
FORMAT” (page 83) in “Selecting the
System Signal Format”.
2 Set as shown below, according to the
camera system format.
For details on the TC Setup menu, “TC
(Timecode) Setup Menu” (page 172).
2
Set the frame interval (FRM).
1 Exit the menu, and press the SELECT/
ENTER dial with the FUNC button
held down in the HOME screen.
The popup window displays the
current frame interval (FRM), the
current number of frames (FPS), and
the playback speed.
dB
0
-10
-20
-30
-60
PB
ANA
ANA
SDI
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
1
2
OOOO
EE
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 2
STBY OFF
SRW-9000(E)
TCG
KEYINHI
RECINHI
01 01 51 11
H
12.2V
REMAIN
- - -
M
CH.COND
S
F
IN: --:--:--:-1080
LOCAL
S59P
EE
(23PsF)
17:11
4:2:2
The S in S59P indicates that SR
Motion is enabled. (SELECT FPS is
set to “VTR”, and the Interval Frame
function is used.) The 59P indicates
that FPS FORMAT is set to 59.94P.
(23PsF) indicates that the target frame
frequency is 23.98PsF.
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
A/E
A/E
EMP
EMP
EMP
SYSTEM
:
L R
L R
L R
SEL-FPS :
3 MODE
4
5
6:
SIGNAL :
PLAY
LOCK :
MEMORY
LTC INTRP
FRM
DF
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
23.98PsF
L R
L R
L R
L R
L R
L R
59.94P
7
8
9 10 11 12
VTR
6 FRM SRW-9000(E)
21 %
EXT-LK
6
10.000
[ x 2.400 ]
KEYINHI
FRM
RECINHI
00 00 00 00
FPS
INDLY:
SYS :
FRM :
MEM :
H
M
FPS
S
F
LTC VITC AU
IN: --:--:--:-1080 S59P(23PsF) 4:2:2
8 / 8 FRM(MODE:VTR)
50min
21%
12.8V
Playback speed
(times normal playback speed)
Number of frames (FPS)
Frame Interval (FRM)
When you press the SELECT/ENTER
dial with the FUNC button held down
and do not perform any operation for
three seconds, the screen returns to the
previous state. When you press the
SELECT/ENTER dial with the FUNC
button held down and press the
SELECT/ENTER dial again with the
FUNC button held down, the following
screen appears. This screen remains on
the display even if you do not perform
any operation for three seconds or
more.
Interval Frame Function
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
dB
0
-10
-20
-30
-60
SDI
SR Motion Recording
TCG
3 In the submenu window, select [SET].
The format of the unit is switched, and
“S59P(23PsF)” appears in the display
(for about 30 seconds).
SDI
115
dB ANA ANA
0
-10
SYSTEM
:
-20
SEL-FPS
:
-30
MODE
:
-60
SIGNAL
:
SDI
SR
SDI Motion
SDI
SDI Recording
SDI
SDI
SDI
23.98PsF
59.94P
VTR
6 FRM
EMP
EMP
EMP
PB
MEMORY
:
41 LEMP
%R LEMPR
L R
L R
L R
1
2
OO1O
3
4
5
FRM
FPS
EMP
L R
EMP
L R
6
7
SDI
A/E
6
10.000
EMP
EMP
EMP
[
x LEMP
2.400
]
L R
R
L R
L R
8
9
10
A/E
FRM
FPS
EMP
L R
11
12
SRW-9000(E)
REC
TCG
KEYINHI
RECINHI
00 02 11 20
H
M
S
SYS : 1080 S59P(23PsF) 4:2:2
FRM : 8 / 8 F R M ( M O D E : V T R )
MEM : 4 1 %
F
50min
12.8V
2 Rotate the SELECT/ENTER dial or
ADJUST dial to select the value of
FRM.
The values of FPS and playback speed
are displayed according to the value of
FRM.
Note
In the Interval Frame function, the number of
frames cannot be set at steps of 1 FPS, which is
different from the Select FPS function. For
example, when you shoot using a camera of 60P
format at 1FRM intervals, the number of frames is
60 FPS. However, since the next interval which can
be set is 2 FRM, the number of frames becomes 30
FPS.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
116
3
Start shooting.
1 Check the timecode of the current
position (make a memo), so that you
will be able to rewind after shooting.
2 Set the frame frequency (FRM value).
3 Start recording. During recording,
change the FRM value as required by
rotating the SELECT/ENTER dial.
4 Stop recording.
4
Conduct a review.
1 Rewind to the timecode position that
you noted in step 4 1.
2 Set Select FPS in the SYSTEM
>FORMAT menu to “OFF” to set the
playback timecode to 24 frames/sec
(the target frame frequency to
23.98PsF).
3 Press the SET button to switch the
format.
4 Press the PLAY button to start
playback.
Interval Frame Function
You can check the slow or quick motion
effect at the target frame frequency of
23.98PsF. The timecode advances from 0 to
23 frames per second. You can also review
the recording by using simple playback
without checking the slow or quick motion
effect.
For more information about simple playback,
see “To perform simple playback without
checking motion effects” (page 109).
Notes
• Audio cannot be recorded normally when SR
Motion is used for shooting.
• When FRM is set to a value larger than one,
recording to the tape proceeds in starts and stops,
because data is recorded only when a certain
amount has been accumulated in the unit’s
internal memory.
Formats available for Interval Frame
shooting
Note
The 4:4:4 format is not available when the scan method
is progressive and the target frame frequency is 50 Hz or
higher.
A/B: Connection with two coaxial cables, HD SDI A/B
A: Connection with one coaxial cable, HD SDI A
*: Not available
Select FPS
setting
FPS
FORMAT
(system
frame
frequency)
The Ramp function allows you to achieve speed
variations by changing the frame frequency
(FRM) in Interval Frame recording.
There are two Ramp modes: manual mode, in
which you specify upper and lower limits and
manually vary the speed within that range, and
auto mode, in which you specify start and end
frames and a duration, and allow the unit to vary
the speed automatically according to preset rules.
Proceed as follows to set up the Ramp function.
1
In the SYSTEM Setup menu, select
EDIT >RAMP.
A setting window opens.
2
Select the Ramp function operating
mode from the following.
Auto(Linear): Varies the frame frequency
(FRM) linearly.
Auto(Inverse): Varies the inverse of the
frame frequency (fps) linearly.
Auto(Even): Varies the frame frequency so
that there are the same number of frames
for each frequency.
Auto(User): Varies the frame frequency
along a user-specified curve.
Manual: Varies the frame frequency
manually within preset upper and lower
limits.
Off: Varies the frame frequency manually
with no range limits.
3
Make the settings required by the
selected mode.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
FRAME SIGNAL (signal format)
(target
frame
4:2:2
4:4:4 4:4:4
frequency) (YCbCr) SQ
HQ /
(RGB) 4:4:4
HQ
12bit
(RGB)
VTR 23.98 23.98
A
A/B
A/B
24
24
A
A/B
A/B
25
24
A
A/B
A/B
25
A
A/B
A/B
29.97 23.98
A
A/B
A/B
29.97
A
A/B
A/B
30
24
A
A/B
A/B
25
A
A/B
A/B
50
24
A/B
*
*
25
A/B
*
*
50
A/B
*
*
59.94 23.98
A/B
*
*
29.97
A/B
*
*
59.94
A/B
*
*
60
24
A/B
*
*
25
A/B
*
*
50
A/B
*
*
Off
23.98
A
A/B
A/B
24
A
A/B
A/B
25
A
A/B
A/B
29.97
A
A/B
A/B
50
A/B
*
*
59.94
A/B (F23 *
*
only)
Using the Ramp Function
When Auto(Linear), Auto(Inverse), or
Auto(Even) was selected, see the next section,
“To vary the frame frequency automatically”.
Interval Frame Function
117
When Auto(User) was selected, see “To vary the
frame frequency along a user-specified curve”
(page 118).
4
The frame frequency starts to change.
When the frame frequency changes to that of
the end point, the values of the ramp start
point and the ramp end point are exchanged.
When Manual or Off was selected, see “To vary
the frame frequency manually” (page 119).
To vary the frame frequency
automatically
To stop the frame frequency changes
With the FUNC button held down, press the
SELECT/ENTER dial again.
This also causes the values of the ramp start
point and the ramp end point to be
exchanged.
Operating mode: Auto (Linear), Auto (Inverse),
or Auto (Even)
1
Rotate the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to set the Auto
Spd1, Auto Spd2, and Duration items.
Auto Spd1: The frame frequency of the ramp
start point, or the frame frequency of the
ramp end point (FRM)
Auto Spd2: The frame frequency of the ramp
start point, or the frame frequency of the
ramp end point (FRM)
(This is the end point frame frequency
when the start point frame frequency
was set with Auto Spd1. Otherwise it is
the start point frame frequency.)
Duration: The time (seconds) from the start
of the ramp to its end.
2
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
3
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
To vary the frame frequency along a
user-specified curve
Note
You will need to prepare a curve file in advance before
carrying out this procedure.
For details on how to create a curve file, see “To
create a curve file” (page 119).
Operating mode: Auto(User)
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” containing a
curve file into the Memory Stick slot.
For details on “Memory Stick” operations,
“Using a “Memory Stick”” (page 189).
2
Select “Load Curve”.
A list of curve files saved in the “Memory
Stick” appears.
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
A screen like the following appears, in which
you can check the settings. (This example
shows the information that appears when the
Auto (Even) mode is selected.)
End frame frequency
Start frame frequency Duration
Frames recorded
Operating mode
on tape
SR Motion Recording
SYSTEM
SEL-PPS
MODE
SIGNAL
MEMORY
RAMP
:
:
:
:
:
:
23.98PsF
FRM
59.84P
FRM
VTR
FRS
O FRM
FRS
--( x 0.400 )
EVEN 1-20 5s (95F on Tape)
1
6 0.0 0 0
1 2
SRW-9000(E)
TCR
KEYINHI
RECINHI
09 18 55 01
H
13.0V
REMAIN
M
CH.COND
- - -
118
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
Interval Frame Function
S
F
IN: --:--:--:-1080
LOCAL
559P
EE
(23PsF)
15:07
422
3
Select a file.
The curve saved in the selected file appears,
allowing you to check it.
For details, “About a “Memory Stick”” (page
206).
4
2
Open a new file in a text editor.
3
Enter two or more frame frequency
values. Enter each value on its own line.
4
Save the file as a CSV file (file extension
“.csv”) in the “Memory Stick” (located
in /MSSONY/PRO/VTR/SRW-1).
For example, you could enter the following
values.
10
50
6
30
24
24
60
30
A curve like the following is produced when
you save the values entered in the text file as
a CSV file.
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
The selected file is loaded.
To change the file selection
Rotate the SELECT/ENTER dial to select
“CANCEL”, and then press the dial.
5
Select “Duration”, and then rotate the
ADJUST knob or the SELECT/ENTER
dial to set the time (seconds) from the
start to the end of the ramp.
6
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
7
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
Duration
SR Motion Recording
SYSTEM
SEL-PPS
MODE
SIGNAL
MEMORY
RAMP
:
:
:
:
:
:
23.98PsF
59.84P
VTR
O FRM
--USER
FRM
FPS
1 FRM
6 0.0 0 0 FPS
1 2
SRW-9000(E)
TCG
KEYINHI
RECINHI
00 00 08 16
H
13.0V
REMAIN
- - -
8
M
CH.COND
S
F
IN: --:--:--:-1080
LOCAL
559P
EE
(23PsF)
15:07
422
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
Variation of the frame frequency begins
along the selected curve.
To create a curve file
1
Ramp end
Ramp start
( x 0.400 )
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the
Memory Stick slot of the PC.
To vary the frame frequency manually
Set the frame frequency manually if you want to
set upper and lower frame frequency limits.
Operating mode: Manual
1
Rotate the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to set the Manu
Spd1 and Manu Spd2 items.
Manu Spd1: The upper or lower limit of the
frame frequency (FRM)
Manu Spd2: The upper or lower limit of the
frame frequency (FRM)
(This is the lower limit when the upper
limit was set with Manu Spd1.
Otherwise it is the upper limit.)
Interval Frame Function
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
A screen like the following appears, allowing
you to check the settings.
119
2
Press the HOME button to return to the
HOME screen.
3
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial twice.
A screen like the following appears, in which
you can check the settings.
SR Motion Recording
SYSTEM
SEL-PPS
MODE
SIGNAL
MEMORY
RAMP
23.98PsF
FRM
59.84P
FRM
VTR
FPS
O FRM
FPS
--( x 0.400 )
MANUAL 1-30
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
6 0.0 0 0
1 2
SRW-9000(E)
TCG
KEYINHI
RECINHI
09 18 55 01
H
13.0V
REMAIN
M
CH.COND
- - -
S
F
IN: --:--:--:-1080
LOCAL
559P
EE
(23PsF)
15:07
422
4
With the FUNC button held down,
press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
5
Rotate the ADJUST knob or the
SELECT/ENTER dial to vary the
frame frequency.
To temporarily remove the upper and
lower limits
With the FUNC button held down, press the
SELECT/ENTER dial again.
Chapter 6 SR Motion (With HKSR-9002 Installed)
120
Interval Frame Function
7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Camera Menu Configuration
The Camera menu enables various detailed settings of the camera. In addition to the subdisplay pages, the
menus are displayed in the control panel display, on the viewfinder, and on an external monitor.
The available menus are:
USER menu
This menu can include menu pages selected from among the OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE,
FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, for your convenience. Changing, adding, and deleting pages can be
performed with the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
The following pages are included on the factory-set USER menu:
Menu page title
USER menu No.
Source menu/Page No.
<VF DISPLAY>
U01
OPERATION
01
<‘ ! ’ IND>
U02
OPERATION
02
<MARKER SETTING>
U03
OPERATION
04
<VF/HD-Y DETAIL>
U04
OPERATION
05
<ZEBRA>
U05
OPERATION
06
<MONITOR OUTPUT>
U06
OPERATION
07
<PB/MON LUT>
U07
OPERATION
08
<PB MIX SETTING>
U08
OPERATION
09
<CHAR/MARK MIX>
U09
OPERATION
03
<SHUTTER ASSIGN>
U10
OPERATION
10
<SUBDISPLAY 1>
U11
OPERATION
11
<SUBDISPLAY 2>
U12
OPERATION
12
<SW ASSIGN 1>
U13
OPERATION
13
<SW ASSIGN 2>
U14
OPERATION
14
<GAIN ASSIGN>
U15
OPERATION
15
<BATTERY ALARM>
U16
OPERATION
16
<OPERATOR FILE>
U17
OPERATION
17
<LENS FILE>
U18
OPERATION
18
<LENS INFO>
U19
OPERATION
19
<GAMMA>
U20
PAINT
P03[P02] a)
<SHUTTER> or <SHUTTER/ U21
FPS> (when the optional
HKSR-9002 is installed)
PAINT
P13[P03] a)
<OTHERS 1> or <RAMP>
(when the optional HKSR9002 is installed)
MAINTENANCE
M13[M09] a) or
U22
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Chapter
P14[P04] a)
Camera Menu Configuration
121
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Menu page title
USER menu No.
Source menu/Page No.
<OTHERS 1> (when the
optional HKSR-9002 is
installed)
U23
MAINTENANCE
a) in Cine mode
For the items on each page, see the corresponding
source menu page in “Camera Menu List” (page
127).
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
This menu allows you to edit the USER menu.
For details, see “Editing the USER Menu” (page
167).
ALL menu
This menu permits you to control all items of the
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,
and DIAGNOSIS menus as a single menu.
OPERATION menu
This menu contains items for camera operators to
operate the unit. It mainly permits viewfinder and
switch settings.
For the pages and items of the OPERATION menu,
see “OPERATION Menu” (page 127).
PAINT menu
This menu contains items for making detailed
image adjustments while using a waveform
monitor to monitor the waveforms output from
the unit.
For the pages and items of the PAINT menu, see
“PAINT Menu” (page 141).
MAINTENANCE menu
This menu contains items for performing unit
maintenance, such as changing the system or
setting infrequently used “paint” items.
For the pages and items of the MAINTENANCE
menu, see “MAINTENANCE Menu” (page 150).
FILE menu
This menu is for performing file operations, such
as storing/retrieving menu setting data.
For the pages and items of the FILE menu, see“FILE
Menu” (page 161).
For details on files and file operations, see Chapter 8
“Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data”
(page 185).
DIAGNOSIS menu
This menu enables you to check the selfdiagnostic information.
For the pages and items of the DIAGNOSIS menu,
see “DIAGNOSIS Menu” (page 166).
122
Camera Menu Configuration
M13[M09] a)
For Camera menu operations, you can use the
display/menu operations section on the right side
of the main unit, the control panel, or the optional
AP-1 Assistant Panel.
Display/menu operations section
VF MENU/
DISPLAY button
(confirm a setting)
CANCEL/STATUS button
(cancel a setting)
SET button (return to a
page or enter data
modification mode by
pressing for one second)
Turn (change a
setting)
PAGE button
(advance to
Press (For confirming a setting)
the next page
or confirm a MENU SEL/
ENTER dial a)
setting)
a) Turning the dial changes a setting, and
pressing it confirms a setting (ENTER button
function).
Control panel
SELECT/ENTER dial b)
HOME button c)
BACK button d)
SYSTEM button
FUNC button
VIDEO button a)
a) Pressing the button to select “CAMERA
MENU” displays the Camera menu.
b) Turning the dial changes a setting, and
pressing it confirms a setting (ENTER button
function).
c) When pressed alone, functions as the VF
MENU/DISPLAY button. When pressed
together with the SYSTEM button, displays
the TOP MENU screen. To disable the “TOP”
indication, press this button while holding the
BACK button down.
d) When pressed alone, functions as the
CANCEL/STATUS button. When pressed
together with the FUNC button, returns to the
VIDEO Setup menu.
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Basic Camera Menu
Operations
For details on how to operate the above controls, see
“VTR Menu Operations” (page 170).
AP-1 Assistant Panel
CANCEL/STATUS button
MENU SEL/
VF MENU/
ENTER dial a)
DISPLAY button
Press
Turn
PAGE button
SET button
a) Turning the dial changes a setting, and
pressing it confirms a setting (ENTER button
function).
You can also use the display/menu operations
section to operate the subdisplay of the assistant
panel, and use the AP-1 to operate the subdisplay
on the right-side panel.
Basic Camera Menu Operations
123
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
However, the LOCK switches function
independently. When you want to lock the
operation section on the right side panel or the
AP-1, turn on the LOCK switch on that side.
TOP MENU screen
Note
When the subdisplay is in data modification mode (“?”
symbol shown at the right corner) (page 125), menu
operations on the viewfinder or monitor screen are
disabled.
Displaying Setting Pages
Press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
The most recently used menu page appears. (If
this is your first menu operation, the CONTENTS
page of the USER menu appears.)
The cursor on the menu screen is B in Cine mode
and c in Custom mode.
Selecting menu pages from the TOP
MENU screen
If you press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button
while pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial,
“TOP” appears at the upper right corner of the
screen.
Example
1
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
align the cursor with the desired menu.
2
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The CONTENTS page or the most recently
used page of the selected menu appears.
To return to the TOP MENU screen
Press the CANCEL/STATUS button, or move the
cursor to “TOP” and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
The TOP MENU screen is restored.
To disable the “TOP” indication
Turn the power once off then on again, or press
the VF MENU/DISPLAY button while holding
the CANCEL/STATUS button pressed.
Each time you turn the power off, the TOP
selection is disabled, putting the unit into a state
where only the USER menu (page 121) can be
accessed.
You can arrange the USER menu so that it
includes the pages and items you use most
frequently.
For details, see “Editing the USER Menu” (page
167).
Selecting a page from a CONTENTS page
Press the CANCEL/STATUS button, or move the
cursor to “TOP” and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial. This displays the TOP MENU
screen, which lists the available menus. You can
select a menus on this screen.
124
Basic Camera Menu Operations
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to align the
cursor with the desired page indication and then
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
CONTENTS page (Example: USER menu)
cursor
If a “?” symbol is flashing at the left of the page
number, press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
change it to the cursor (c or b). Making settings
on the displayed page is then enabled.
Changing the setting
1
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
align the cursor with the desired item.
2
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The cursor changes to a flashing “?” symbol.
The selected page is displayed.
Page number
3
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
change the setting value.
When the knob is turned quickly, the values
change quickly; when turned slowly, the
values change slowly.
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
If the screen can be scrolled, arrows indicate
the direction of scrolling.
Setting Menu Items
To reset a changed value
Press the CANCEL/STATUS button.
To interrupt settings
Press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
To restart the setting operation, press the VF
MENU/DISPLAY button again.
Changing the displayed page
1
Check that the cursor is located at the
left of the page number and then press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
4
The cursor changes to a flashing question
mark (? symbol).
5
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The “?” symbol changes back to the cursor
(c or b), and the new setting is registered.
flash
To change other setting items on the
same menu page, repeat steps 1 through
4.
Specifying a character string
When you press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial
with the cursor pointing to an item for which a
character string, such as a file ID, is to be
specified, a cursor x and a list of selectable
characters appear.
You can move cursor by turning the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
flip through the pages.
3
When the desired page appears, press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
1
Move the cursor to the position where
you want to enter a character then press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Another cursor appears on the character list.
The “?” symbol will change back to the
cursor (c or b), and operations with the
displayed page will be enabled.
Basic Camera Menu Operations
125
2
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Position the cursor the character to be
entered and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
To enter a space: Select INS on the line
below the character list.
To delete the character: Select DEL.
To return to step 1 without changing the
character: Select RET.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2.
If you enter the permitted maximum number of
characters (up to the stop mark at the right end
of the line), the cursor moves to ESC on the line
below the character list.
To register the string you have entered, select
END and press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
To restore the previous string
Select ESC and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
Ending menu operations
Press the VF MENU/DISPLAY button.
126
Basic Camera Menu Operations
The following tables list the menus and menu items in the Camera menu.
• For the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory, the USER menu page numbers
are indicated in parentheses in the No. column of the tables.
• A CONTENTS page (numbered 00) is also provided for each menu.
OPERATION Menu
The OPERATION menu items can be set in both Cine and Custom modes.
Execute by ENTER : Execute by pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
OPERATION menu
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<VF DISPLAY>
Select the basic
status indications
(page 61)
01(U01) FPS
Default
Settings
Remarks
ON
ON, OFF
FOCUS
OFF
ON, OFF
IRIS
OFF
ON, OFF
ZOOM
OFF
ON, OFF
EX
ON
ON, OFF
ND
ON
ON, OFF
CC
ON
ON, OFF
5600K
OFF
ON, OFF
WHITE
OFF
ON, OFF
GAIN
ON
ON, OFF
SHUTT
ON
ON, OFF
UNIT
deg
deg, sec
BATT
ON
ON, OFF
REC
ON
ON, OFF
TAPE
OFF
ON, OFF
TC
OFF
ON, OFF
AUDIO
OFF
ON, OFF
MESSAG
ALL
ALL, AT, WRN, ALL: Display all messages
OFF
AT: Display Auto Setup
information and higher
WRN: Display warning
messages and higher
OFF: Display warning
messages of the highest
level only
C TEMP
OFF
ON, OFF
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Camera Menu List
127
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<‘ ! ’ IND>
Specify
ABNORMAL
<‘ ! ’> display
conditions
02(U02) ND
Default
Settings
Remarks
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[IND]: Set whether to be
included in the ‘ ! ’
indications on the
ABNORMAL < ‘ ! ’ >
display
[NORMAL]: Specify the
conditions under which
the ‘ ! ’ indication is
not to be displayed
even if [IND] is ON.
(By specifying the
standard or normal
conditions here, nonstandard or abnormal
conditions can be
found with the
‘ ! ’ indication.)
[NORMAL] 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
1 ––––
(combination
allowed)
CC
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[NORMAL] A, B, C, D, E
A––––
(combination
allowed)
WHITE
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[NORMAL] ON, OFF
P––
5600K
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[NORMAL] ON, OFF
OFF
SHUTT
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[NORMAL] ON, OFF
OFF
FAN
[IND] ON
ON, OFF
[NORMAL] AUTO1,
AUTO1
AUTO2, MIN,
MAX
G-COMP
[IND] ON
(appears only
when the
optional HKSR9002 is installed)
ON, OFF
EXT
ON, OFF
[IND] ON
The normal
condition is fixed
to OFF.
The normal
condition is fixed
to OFF.
128
Camera Menu List
e.g.: With the default setting
of ND, the ‘ ! ’
indication is displayed
when an ND filter other
than 1 is selected.
OPERATION menu
No.
Item
<CHAR/MARK
03(U09) CHAR
MIX>
Turn characters and
markers ON/OFF
and adjust their
MARKER
brightness
CURSOR
Default
Settings
Remarks
VF ON
ON, OFF
MON ON
ON, OFF
Character superimposing
ON/OFF
HD-Y ON
ON, OFF
VBS OFF
ON, OFF
VF ON
ON, OFF
MON ON
ON, OFF
HD-Y ON
ON, OFF
VBS ON
ON, OFF
VF OFF
ON, OFF
MON OFF
ON, OFF
Markers ON/OFF
Cursor ON/OFF
HD-Y OFF ON, OFF
ZEBRA
VF OFF
ON, OFF
MON OFF
ON, OFF
Zebra ON/OFF
HD-Y OFF ON, OFF
VBS OFF
ON, OFF
CHAR/MARK
LEVEL
50
0 to 50
Adjust the brightness of the
character/marker
indications.
VF GATE
MARKER
OFF
ON, OFF
Zebra ON/OFF for SKIN
GATE and MULTI
MATRIX GATE on the
viewfinder
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
129
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
Default
Settings
<MARKER
SETTING>
Specify markers
04(U03) CENTER
OFF
ON, OFF
1
1, 2, 3, 4
OFF
ON, OFF
90.0%
80.0%, 90.0%,
92.5%, 95.0%
EFFECTIVE
OFF
ON, OFF
ASPECT
OFF
ON, OFF
4:3
2.40:1, 2.35:1,
1.66:1 : VISTA1 equivalent
1.85:1, 1.66:1,
1.85:1 : VISTA2 equivalent
16:9, 15:9, 14:9,
13:9, 4:3, VAR
H, VAR V
1440
12 to 1920
1016
12 to 1080
OFF
ON, OFF
90.0%
80.0%, 90.0%,
92.5%, 95.0%
OFF
ON, OFF
12
0 to 15
SAFETY
VARIABLE
SAFETY
MASK
CURSOR
130
BOX
BOX, CROSS
POSI H/V
0/0
–958 to +956/
–538 to +536
SIZE W/H
960/540
16 to 1920/16 to
1080
<VF HD-Y
05(U04) VF
DETAIL>
HD-Y
Adjust the detail on
LEVEL
the viewfinder and
CRISP
the HD-Y signal
OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
25%
0 to 100%
0
–99 to +99
<ZEBRA>
Set up the zebra
display
OFF
ON, OFF
MONITOR
OFF
ON, OFF
HD-Y
OFF
ON, OFF
VBS
OFF
ON, OFF
06(U05) VF
Camera Menu List
ZEBRA TYPE 1
1, 2, 1&2
ZEBRA1
LEVEL
70%
0 to 109%
ZEBRA1
WIDTH
10%
0 to 30%
ZEBRA2
100%
50 to 109%
Remarks
1: Entire cross
2: Entire cross with a hole
3: Center
4: Center with a hole
For the safety marker in
Aspect mode
Set the level to darken the
areas outside the aspect
marker.
OPERATION menu
No.
Item
<MONITOR
07(U06) COLOR
OUTPUT>
VF
Set up the monitor
output
Note
The MLUT
function is enabled
when you are using
S-LOG A.
Default
Settings
COLOR
COLOR, R, G, B
[SIG] VF
VF (display
only)
[SRC] CAM CAM, AUTO,
MIX (display
only)
[MLUT]
OFF
MON
TEST
RM
Remarks
ON, OFF
(display only)
[SIG] MON MON, VF
[SRC] PB
CAM, AUTO,
MIX (display
only)
[MLUT]
OFF
ON, OFF
(display only)
[SIG] VBS
VBS, HD-Y,
FRAME
[SRC] ---
CAM, AUTO,
MIX, --- (display
only)
[MLUT] ---
ON, OFF, --(display only)
[SIG] VBS
VBS, HD-Y
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
[SRC] CAM CAM, AUTO,
MIX (display
only)
<PB/MON LUT>
Set the gamma of
the playback
picture/monitor
picture
08(U07) MLUT/PBMIX
[MLUT]
OFF
ON, OFF
(display only)
MLUT
MLUT, PBMIX,
OFF
MLUT SEL
NOT
709(800%),
SELECTED HG8009G40,
HG8009G33,
709(180%)
User setting
--NOT
SELECTED
VF/VBS
[CAM/PB]
AUTO
AUTO, CAM, --(for PBMIX)
[MLUT]
(OFF)
ON, OFF, (OFF) (OFF): MLUT/PBMIX
Fixed when not MLUT
[CAM/PB]
AUTO
AUTO, CAM, --(for PBMIX)
[MLUT]
(OFF)
ON, OFF, (OFF) (OFF): MLUT/PBMIX
Fixed when not MLUT
Note
The MLUT
function is enabled
when you are using
S-LOG A.
MON
709: ITU-R709
HG: HyperGamma
User setting: User MLUT
name (up to 12
characters) read from a
“Memory Stick”
- - -: MLUT not available
NOT SELECTED: MLUT
not selected
Camera Menu List
131
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<PB/MON LUT>
Set the gamma of
the playback
picture/monitor
picture
08(U07) MLUT MARK
Default
Settings
OFF
ON, OFF
LEVEL
3
1, 2, 3, 4
H POS
99
0 to 99
V POS
99
0 to 99
MIX
MIX, WIPE
DIRECTION
CAM
CAM, PB
MODE
Y-MIX
Y-MIX,
WIRE(W),
WIRE(B)
LEVEL
80%
0 to 80%
HOR
HOR, VERT
Remarks
Note
The MLUT
function is enabled
when you are using
S-LOG A.
<PB MIX
SETTING>
Specify mixing of
the playback
picture
09(U08) MIX TYPE
MIX
WIPE
LAYOUT
<SHUTTER
ASSIGN>
Set shutter step
values
PB POSITION HOR:
RIGHT
VERT:
BOTTOM
HOR: RIGHT,
LEFT
VERT:
BOTTOM, TOP
BOUNDARY
HOR: 960
VERT: 540
HOR: 0 to 1920
VERT: 0 to 1080
1
216.0
360.0 to 4.3
2
180.0
360.0 to 4.3
3
172.8
360.0 to 4.3
4
150.0
360.0 to 4.3
5
144.0
360.0 to 4.3
6
90.0
360.0 to 4.3
7
45.0
360.0 to 4.3
8
22.5
360.0 to 4.3
10(U10) STEP
ADD
Execute by
ENTER
Add a shutter step value
DEL
Execute by
ENTER
Delete a shutter step value
PRESET
Execute by
ENTER
Resume the factory default
shutter step settings
<SUBDISPLAY
11(U11) FORMAT
1>
MEMORY
Register formats so
that they can be
selected on the AP1 (optional)
132
Camera Menu List
[deg] column: Shutter
angle value settings
[sec] column: The
converted speed values
(sec) depending on the
selected FPS value are
displayed.
OPERATION menu
No.
11(U11)
<SUBDISPLAY
1>
Register formats so
that they can be
selected on the AP1 (optional)
Item
1
Default
Settings
Remarks
23.98P 422
NO ASSIGN,
_23.98P 444HQ,
S23.98P 444HQ,
_23.98P 444SQ,
S23.98P 444SQ,
_29.97P 444HQ,
S29.97P 444HQ,
_29.97P 444SQ,
S29.97P 444SQ,
S59.94P 444SQ,
_23.98P 422,
S23.98P 422,
_29.97P 422,
S29.97P 422,
_59.94P 422,
S59.94P 422,
_24P 444HQ,
S24P 444HQ,
_24P 444SQ,
S24P 444SQ,
_25P 444HQ,
S25P 444HQ,
_25P 444SQ,
S25P 444SQ,
S30P 444HQ,
S30P 444SQ,
S50P 444SQ,
S60P 444SQ,
_24P 422,
S24P 422,
_25P 422,
S25P 422,
S30P 422,
S50P 422,
S60P 422,
_50I 444HQ,
_50I 444SQ,
_50I 422,
_59.94I 444HQ,
_59.94I 444SQ,
_59.94I 422
_23.98P 444 12,
S23.98P 444 12,
_29.97P 444 12,
S29.97P 444 12,
_24P 444 12,
S24P 444 12,
_25P 444 12,
S25P 444 12,
S30P 444 12,
_50I 444 12,
_59.94I 444 12
Register the formats to be
selected on the subdisplay.
Select from among the
formats displayed on the
corresponding <FORMAT
MEMORY> subpage.
Note
Select FPS format can be
selected when the optional
HKSR-9002 is installed.
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
133
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
11(U11)
<SUBDISPLAY
1>
Register formats so
that they can be
selected on the AP1 (optional)
<SUBDISPLAY
2>
Set the LOCK
switch mode and
select subdisplay
pages
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
2
24P 422
Same as above
3
25P 422
Same as above
4
29.97P 422
Same as above
5
50P 422
Same as above
6
59.94P 422
Same as above
Register the formats to be
selected on the subdisplay.
Select from among the
formats displayed on the
corresponding <FORMAT
MEMORY> subpage.
7
50I 422
Same as above
8
59.94I 422
Same as above
CAMERA
FULL
FULL, –RUN
Set the mode of the LOCK
switch in the display/menu
operations section.
–RUN: Enable the RUN
button even when the
LOCK switch is set to
ON
PANEL
FULL
FULL, –RUN
Set the mode of the LOCK
switch on the AP-1
(optional).
–RUN: Enable the RUN
button even when the
LOCK switch is set to
ON
Execute by
ENTER
Jump to the subpage
Select FPS format can be
selected when the optional
HKSR-9002 is installed.
12(U12) LOCK SW
MODE
PAGE SELECT
134
Note
Camera Menu List
OPERATION menu
<PAGE SELECT>
Select pages to be
displayed on the
subdisplay
No.
Item
Default
Settings
SHUTTER
ON
ON, OFF
RAMP (appears ON
only when the
optional HKSR9002 is installed)
ON, OFF
FORMAT
ON
ON, OFF
ND/CC
ON
ON, OFF
GAIN/WHITE/ ON
5600K
ON, OFF
GAIN L/M/H
ON
ON, OFF
LENS FILE
ON
ON, OFF
VTR STATUS
ON
ON, OFF
TIME CODE/
TAPE REM
ON
ON, OFF
VOLTAGE/FAN ON
MODE
ON, OFF
CHARACTER
MIX
ON
ON, OFF
ASSIGNABLE
SW1/SW2
ON
ON, OFF
ASSIGNABLE
SW3/SW4
ON
ON, OFF
ASSIGNABLE
SW5/SW6
ON
ON, OFF
ASSIGNABLE
SW7/SW8
ON
ON, OFF
ASSIGNABLE
SWN/SWC
ON
ON, OFF
BRIGHT
ON
ON, OFF
GAMMA
TABLE
ON
ON, OFF
Remarks
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
135
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
136
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<SW ASSIGN 1> 13(U13) ASSIGN SW1
Assign functions to
ASSIGN SW2
assignable buttons/
ASSIGN SW3
switch
Default
Settings
OFF
OFF, ND a),
Select from among the
CC a), REC
functions displayed on the
REVIEW,
corresponding subpage.
PB(VF/VBS),
MLUT(VFVBS),
MLUT(MON),
FAN MODE,
VTR SAVE,
BARS, STOP,
REW, PLAY,
F.FWD, GAIN,
WHITE BAL,
CACHE REC b)
OFF
OFF
Note
The monitor LUT
function is enabled
when you are using
S-LOG A.
Camera Menu List
ASSIGN SW4
OFF
OFF, AWB,
BARS, TEST1
ASSIGN SW5
STOP
ASSIGN SW6
PLAY
ASSIGN SW7
REW
ASSIGN SW8
F.FWD
OFF, ND a),
CC a), REC
REVIEW,
PB(VF/VBS),
MLUT(VFVBS),
MLUT(MON),
FAN MODE,
VTR SAVE,
BARS, STOP,
REW, PLAY,
F.FWD, GAIN,
WHITE BAL,
CACHE REC b)
Remarks
OPERATION menu
No.
Item
<SW ASSIGN 2> 14(U14) ASSIGN SWN
Assign functions to
ASSIGN SWC
assignable buttons
Default
Settings
OFF/ND a)
OFF, ND a),
CC a), REC
REVIEW,
PB(VF/VBS),
MLUT(VFVBS),
MLUT(MON),
FAN MODE,
VTR SAVE,
BARS, STOP,
REW, PLAY,
F.FWD, GAIN,
WHITE BAL,
CACHE REC b)
OFF/CC a)
RE. ROTATION STD
<GAIN ASSIGN> 15(U15) GAIN
Specify gain
switch settings
SHOCKLESS
GAIN
STD, RVS
Remarks
Specify the operation mode
of the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
STD: Clockwise rotation
advances the cursor or
increases values on the
menu screen.
RVS: Counterclockwise
rotation advances the
cursor or increases
values on the menu
screen.
[L] 0 dB
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, Assign the values for the
12 dB
assignable buttons or the
gain switch of the
RM-B150.
[M] 6 dB
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,
12 dB
[H] 12 dB
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,
12 dB
ON
OFF, ON
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
137
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
<BATTERY
ALARM>
Check the
operating power
voltage
16(U16) BATT TYPE
<OPERATOR
FILE>
Operations
Operator file
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
BP-GL
AC ADP,
LITHIUM,
BP-GL,
OTHERS1,
OTHERS2
NEAR END
(13.0)
11.0 to 15.0
Display only (Set in the
MAINTENANCE menu.)
END
(11.0)
11.0 to 12.0
Display only (Set in the
MAINTENANCE menu.)
DCIN TYPE
AC ADP
AC ADP,
LITHIUM,
BP-GL,
OTHERS1,
OTHERS2
NEAR END
(11.9)
11.0 to 15.0
Display only (Set in the
MAINTENANCE menu.)
END
(11.0)
11.0 to 12.0
Display only (Set in the
MAINTENANCE menu.)
17(U17) READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Read the operator file from
a “Memory Stick”
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by
ENTER
Write the current settings of
the operator file items to a
“Memory Stick”
PRESET
Execute by
ENTER
Set the operator file items to
the preset values in internal
memory
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Enter a comment for the
operator file to be written to
a “Memory Stick”.
See “Specifying a character
string” (page 125).
CAM CODE
DATE
138
Camera Menu List
SRW-9000
Camera code
Display only
Date
Display only
OPERATION menu
No.
Item
<LENS FILE>
Lens files
operations
18(U18) FILE
Default
Settings
1
1 to 32
No Offset
Lens file name
Display only
F1.7
F1.0 to F3.4
Display only
CENTER
MARKER
H POS
0
V POS
0
STORE
–96 to +95
–54 to +53
Execute by
ENTER
Remarks
Set and store the center
marker position:
H POS: Increasing the
value moves it to the
right.
V POS: Increasing the
value moves it
downwards.
Note
This item is not displayed in
Cine mode.
WHITE R/G/B
<LENS INFO>
Show the lens
information
19
(U19)
ON
ON, OFF
Turn WHITE R/G/B
compensation by the lens
file on or off
NAME
Lens name
Display only
(when aserial
lens is mounted)
SERIAL
Serial number of Display only
the lens
FOCUS
0 to 255
IRIS
F1.7 to F22, CL Iris setting (display only)
ZOOM
0 to 99
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
Focus setting (display only)
Zoom setting (display only)
Camera Menu List
139
OPERATION menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<VTR
FUNCTION>Set
the VTR function
20
VTR SAVE/
STBY
Remarks
SAVE, STBY
VTR power supply mode
display
30SEC
1SEC to 30MIN See “STBY OFF” for
“SERVO” (page 181).
CACHE REC
OFF
OFF, 25%, 50%, See “CACHE REC” for
75%, 100%,
“EDIT” (page 182).
QUICK
TIMER REC
OFF
OFF, MANU,
AUTO
See “TIMER REC” for
“EDIT” (page 182).
M.REC
1F
FRAME
(appears only
during TIMER
REC MANU)
1F to 10F
See “Manu Frm” for
“EDIT” (page 182).
M.REC
1F
FRAME
(appears only
during TIMER
REC AUTO)
1F to 10F
See “Auto Frm” for “EDIT”
(page 182).
a) When the optional HKSR-9004 is installed
b) When the optional HKSR-9002 is installed
Camera Menu List
Settings
STBY OFF
TIMER
INTERVAL
(appears only
during TIMER
REC AUTO)
140
Default
<AUTO REC INTERVAL>
Jump to subpage
See “Interval” for “EDIT”
(page 182).
PAINT Menu
Notes
• When the setting is fixed, it is shown in parentheses.
Example: (OFF)
• The markings [P01] to [P03] in the No. column indicate the page numbers in Cine mode.
The pages marked with [ - - ] in the No. column are not displayed in Cine mode.
PAINT menu
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<SW STATUS>
P01[P01] FLARE
List of paint
functions and their
GAMMA
on/off setting
<VIDEO LEVEL> P02[ - - ]
Adjust the various
video balance
functions
Default
Settings
Remarks
(OFF)
ON, OFF
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
(ON)
ON, OFF
Fixed to ON in Cine
mode
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
BLK GAM
(OFF)
ON, OFF
KNEE
(OFF)
ON, OFF
WHT CLIP
(OFF)
ON, OFF
DETAIL
(OFF)
ON, OFF
LVL DEP
(OFF)
ON, OFF
SKIN DTL
(OFF)
ON, OFF
MATRIX
(OFF)
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
5600K
OFF
WHITE
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0
BLACK
0
0
0
FLARE
0
0
0
GAMMA
0
0
V MOD
0
0
FLARE
OFF
ON, OFF
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
V MOD
ON
ON, OFF
Fixed to ON in Cine
mode
TEST
OFF
OFF, TEST1,
TEST2
0
–99 to +99
0
0
–99 to +99
0
0
–99 to +99
–99 to +99
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
: Enabled in Custom mode only (Switch settings, such as ON/OFF, are fixed to the
defaults in Cine mode.)
: Enabled in both Cine and Custom modes
Execute by ENTER : Execute by pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
R, G, B, and M
(master) values can be
independently set. (M
cannot be set for
WHITE or FLARE.)
V MOD: Adjust the
vertical shading
caused by the lens
Camera Menu List
141
PAINT menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
142
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<GAMMA>
P03[P02] LEVEL
Select or adjust the (U20)
gamma
Camera Menu List
Default
Settings
Remarks
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
R, G, B, and M
(master) values can be
set independently.
BLACK
[M] 0
–99 to +99
Only M (master) value
can be set.
COARSE
0.45
0.35 to 0.90 (in 0.05 Fixed to 0.45 when
steps)
HYPER GAMMA,
SPECIAL or USER is
selected
TABLE
USER
STANDARD,
For details, see
HYPER GAMMA, “Selecting the
SPECIAL, USER
Gamma” (page 73).
1
STANDARD
1: CAMCORDER
2: × 4.5
3: × 3.5
4:SMPTE-240M
5: ITU-R709
6: × 5.0
7: × 5.0-709
HYPER GAMMA
1: HG3250G36
2: HG4600G30
3: HG3259G40
4: HG4609G33
5: HG8000G36
6: HG8000G30
7: HG8009G40
8: HG8009G33
SPECIAL
1: S-LOG A
USER
1 to 5:
HG8009G33
GAMMA
ON
ON, OFF
Fixed to ON in Cine
mode
KNEE
(OFF)
ON, OFF, (OFF)
(OFF): Fixed to OFF
with the gamma
settings other than
STANDARD
TEST
OFF
OFF, TEST1,
TEST2
PAINT menu
No.
<BLACK
P04[ - - ]
GAMMA>
Adjust the contrast
near black
Item
Default
LEVEL
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
RANGE
HIGH
TEST
<SATURATION>
Adjust the color
saturation
P05[ - - ]
RANGE
<KNEE>
Adjust the
compression for
high-luminance
areas
P06[ - - ]
ON, OFF
OFF
OFF, TEST1,
TEST2
R, G, B, and M
(master) values can be
set independently.
–99 to +99
OFF
ON, OFF
0
–99 to +99
HIGH
LOW, L.MID,
H.MID, HIGH
OFF
ON, OFF
TEST
OFF
OFF, TEST1,
TEST2
K POINT
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
K SLOPE
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
KNEE
OFF
KNEE MAX
OFF
ON, OFF
KNEE SAT
0
–99 to +99
OFF
ON, OFF
AUTO KNEE OFF
Remarks
LOW, L.MID,
H.MID, HIGH
OFF
SATURATION 0
LOW KEY
SAT
Settings
R, G, B, and M
(master) values can be
set independently.
K POINT: To adjust
the point to apply
the change
K SLOPE: To adjust
the slope of
compression
Absolute values
are displayed in
ABS mode except
for M (master).
ON, OFF
Adjust the color
saturation of highluminance areas
OFF, AUTO
POINT
LIMIT
0
–99 to +99
Absolute value is
displayed in ABS
mode.
SLOPE
0
–99 to +99
Absolute value is
displayed in ABS
mode.
ABS
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
Highlighted: ABS
(Absolute) mode
Camera Menu List
143
PAINT menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
Default
<WHITE CLIP>
Adjust the clip
level for highluminance areas
P07[ - - ]
W CLIP
[R] [G] [B] [M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
R, G, B, and M
(master) values can be
set independently.
Absolute values are
displayed in ABS
mode except for [M]
(master).
OFF
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
ON, OFF
ABS
<DETAIL 1>
Adjust the
emphasis of edges
in video
P08[ - - ]
Camera Menu List
Remarks
Highlighted: ABS
(Absolute) mode
DETAIL
OFF
ON, OFF
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
LEVEL
0
–99 to +99
Absolute value is
displayed in ABS
mode.
LIMITER
[M]
–99 to +99
Adjust the level to clip
the maximum value of
the emphasis signal
(absolute values are
displayed for [WHT]
and [BLK] only in
ABS mode).
0
[WHT] 0
–99 to +99
[BLK] 0
–99 to +99
CRISP
0
–99 to +99
Adjust the level for
noise suppression
(absolute values are
displayed in ABS
mode.)
LVL DEP
0
–99 to +99
To adjust the emphasis
elements suppressed by
gamma (Absolute
values are displayed in
ABS mode).
OFF
ON, OFF
ABS
144
Settings
Highlighted: ABS
(Absolute) mode
PAINT menu
No.
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
<DETAIL 2>
Adjust the
emphasis of edges
in the video
P09[ - - ]
H/V RATIO
0
–99 to +99
Specify the vertical
factor of the contour
emphasis (absolute
values are displayed in
ABS mode).
FREQ
0
–99 to +99
Adjust the video
frequency components
to be emphasized
(Absolute values are
displayed in ABS
mode).
MIX RATIO
0
–99 to +99
Absolute value is
displayed in ABS
mode.
KNEE APT
0
–99 to +99
Edge emphasis in highluminance areas
compressed by the
KNEE function
(absolute values are
displayed in ABS
mode).
OFF
ON, OFF
ABS
<SKIN DETAIL>
Emphasize the
edges of specific
color components
P10[ - - ]
ON, OFF
Highlighted: ABS
(Absolute) mode
SKIN DTL
OFF
ON, OFF
Fixed to OFF in Cine
mode
SKIN GATE
OFF
OFF, 1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3: Skin gate can
be set to ON for
the specified
channel only.
With the ON setting, a
zebra pattern is
displayed for the color
component affected by
the DETAIL function.
ABS
CH SW
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
Highlighted: ABS
(Absolute) mode
[1] [2] [3] ON, OFF
(ON) OFF OFF
HUE
EXEC
PHASE
0
WIDTH
29
SAT
–89
LEVEL
0
The skin tone detail
function can be
Execute by ENTER independently set for
each channel (channel
0 to 359
1 is always ON).
0 to 90
HUE: For automatic
–99 to +99
detection of the
target color
–99 to +99
Absolute values are
indicated for LEVEL
only in ABS mode.
Camera Menu List
145
PAINT menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
<USER MATRIX> P11[ - - ]
Adjust the color
components
without affecting
the black and white
components
Item
P12[ - - ]
0
–99 to +99
0
–99 to +99
G-R
0
–99 to +99
G-B
0
–99 to +99
B-R
0
–99 to +99
B-G
0
–99 to +99
MATRIX
OFF
ON, OFF
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
--
SMPTE-240M,
ITU-709, SMPTEWIDE, NTSC,
EBU, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
USER
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
MULTI
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
0
0, 23, 45, 68, 90,
113, 135, 158, 180,
203, 225, 248, 270,
293, 315, 338
Select an axis (angle)
at PHASE for which
the multimatrix
adjustment is to be
made, and set HUE and
SAT (HUE and SAT
can be adjusted
independently for 16
axes).
B
B, B+, MG–, MG,
MG+, R, R+, YL–,
YL, YL+, G–, G,
G+, CY, CY+, B–
HUE
0
–99 to +99
SAT
0
PHASE
–99 to +99
Execute by ENTER
GATE
OFF
ON, OFF
MATRIX
OFF
ON, OFF
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
--
SMPTE-240M,
ITU-709, SMPTEWIDE, NTSC,
EBU, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
USER
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
MULTI
--
ON, OFF, - -
Invalid when MATRIX
is OFF (- - indication)
PRESET
Camera Menu List
Remarks
R-B
ALL CLEAR
146
Settings
R-G
PRESET
<MULTI
MATRIX>
Adjust the color
components
independently by
dividing into 16
axes
Default
PAINT menu
No.
Item
Default
<SHUTTER> or
P13[P03] SHUTTER
OFF
<SHUTTER/FPS> (U21)
(appears only when
the optional
HKSR-9002 is
installed)
Adjust the shutter
while observing the
shutter angles and
speeds (make
settings regarding
shutter and Select
FPS when the
STEP
optional HKSR9002 is installed)
CONTINUOUS
Settings
Remarks
ON, OFF
Setting to ON displays
the current shutter
values in the [deg] and
[sec] columns.
[deg]: Shutter angle
(360.0 to 4.3)
[sec]: Shutter speed
obtained
according to the
angle in [deg] and
the FRAME
RATE value
Change the shutter
value in Step mode
Change the shutter
value in Continuous
mode
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
STEP
ASSIGN
ADD
Execute by ENTER Add a step shutter
value
DELETE
Execute by ENTER Delete a step shutter
value
FRAME
-RATE
(appears only
when the
optional
HKSR-9002
is installed)
COMP
OFF
MODE
(appears only
when the
optional
HKSR-9002
is installed)
S23.98PsF/S24PsF:
1 to 24
S25PsF: 1 to 25
S29.97PsF/S30PsF:
1 to 30
S50PsF: 1 to 50
S59.94PsF/S60PsF:
1 to 60
( ): When the format is
fixed.
The setting range
depends on the selected
format and the gain
compensation mode
setting.
OFF, ANGLE,
GAIN
Selects the
compensation mode.
For details, see
“Detailed Shutter
Settings” (page 71).
Camera Menu List
147
PAINT menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
Item
Default
Settings
24 FPS
Same as FRAME
RATE on the
<SHUTTER/FPS>
page
Sets the starting FPS.
24 FPS
Same as FRAME
RATE on the
<SHUTTER/FPS>
page
Sets the ending FPS.
DURATION
0s
0 to 30 s
Sets the ramp time
(seconds).
COMP
MODE
OFF
OFF, ANGLE,
GAIN
Selects the video level
compensation mode.
RAMP
MODE
OFF
OFF, LINEAR,
EXPONENTIAL
Selects ramp mode
(FPS ramp curve).
DIR
Execute with
ENTER
Switches the starting
and ending FPS values.
RAMP
Execute with
ENTER
Executes the ramp
function (disabled
when RAMP MODE is
set to OFF).
OFF
ON, OFF
LOW (30%)
LOW (30%), MID
(60%), HIGH
(90%), MAX
(100%)
See “Noise
Suppression” (page
149).
<RAMP>
P14[P04] CURRENT
(appears only when (U22)
START
the optional
HKSR-9002 is
installed)
Setup and
END
execution of the
ramp function
<NOISE
SUPPRESS>
Set the noise
suppression
function
148
No.
P15[ - - ]
Camera Menu List
NOISE SUP
LEVEL
Remarks
Current FPS value
PAINT menu
No.
<SCENE FILE>
Storing and
retrieving scene
files (data set by
the PAINT menu)
P16[ - - ]
Item
Default
Settings
1
Remarks
When storing a file in
internal memory,
specify the number
before executing
STORE.When reading,
only specify the
number.
2
3
4
5
01
01 to 32
Specify the scene file
number 01 to 32 when
32 SCENE FILE of
<OTHERS 2> of the
MAINTENANCE
menu is ON.
STORE
Execute by ENTER
STANDARD
Execute by ENTER Read the standard paint
data
READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by ENTER Load scene files from a
“Memory Stick” to
internal memory.
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by ENTER Write scene files in
internal memory to a
“Memory Stick”.
FILE ID
Max.14 characters
Enter a comment for
the scene files to be
written to a “Memory
Stick”.
Camera code
Display only (when
files made by the unit
are detected, “SRW9000” is displayed).
CAM CODE
SRW-9000
DATE
Noise Suppression
You can enable this function on the <NOISE
SUPPRESS> page of the PAINT menu. It allows
you to effectively suppress noise components
while preserving fine-grained edge components.
The noise suppression function of this unit
employs a system that extracts and suppresses
noise within frames. Compared to inter-frame
methods, it delivers excellent results when
applied to moving subjects.
You can select from among 4 effect levels; LOW
(30%), MID (60%), HIGH (90%), MAX (100%).
LOW: To mainly cut noise components in the
high range
MID: To mainly cut noise components in the
high and middle ranges
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
Date of file creation Display only
HIGH: To mainly cut noise components in the
high, middle, and low ranges
MAX: To mainly cut noise components in the
high, middle, and low ranges
The percentage values are approximate
indications of the effect, when the maximum is
100%.
Note
Because this function has some effect on the
frequency components of the video, the edges of
low-luminance blocks may be weakened. A
preliminary test shooting is recommended.
Camera Menu List
149
MAINTENANCE Menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
: Enabled in Custom mode only
: Enabled in both Cine and Custom modes
Execute by ENTER : Execute by pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Notes
• The markings [M01] to [M12] in the No. column indicate the page numbers in Cine mode.
• The pages marked with [ - - ] in the No. column are not displayed in Cine mode.
MAINTENANCE menu
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
Default
Settings
<BASE
SETTING>
Set the basic
operation mode
M01
[M01]
SHOOT
MODE
CINE
CINE, CUSTOM
<AUTO
SETUP>
Various auto
balance
adjustments
M02
[--]
AUTO
BLACK
Execute by ENTER
AUTO
WHITE
Execute by ENTER
AUTO
LEVEL
Execute by ENTER
AUTO
WHITE
SHADING
Execute by ENTER
AUTO
BLACK
SHADING
Execute by ENTER
TEST
150
Camera Menu List
OFF
OFF, TEST1, TEST2
Remarks
Note
Do not execute if a flat
white subject is not
available.
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
<WHITE
M03
SHADING>
[--]
Adjust the
shading of white
level
<BLACK
M04
SHADING>
[--]
Adjust the
shading of black
level
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
V SAW
[R][G][B]
0 0 0
–99 to +99
R, G, and B values can be
set independently.
V SAW, H SAW: To
vertically or
horizontally adjust the
slope of shading
compensation
V PARA, H PARA: To
vertically or
horizontally adjust the
irregularity of shading
compensation
V PARA
0 0 0
–99 to +99
H SAW
0 0 0
–99 to +99
H PARA
0 0 0
–99 to +99
WHITE
0 0 0
–99 to +99
AUTO
WHITE
SHADING
Execute by ENTER
WHITE
RB
SHAD MODE
RGB, RB
V SAW
[R][G][B][M] –99 to +99
0 0 0 0
V PARA
0 0 0 0
–99 to +99
H SAW
0 0 0 0
–99 to +99
H PARA
0 0 0 0
–99 to +99
BLK SET
0 0 0 0
–99 to +99
BLACK
0 0 0 0
–99 to +99
MASTER
GAIN
0 dB
AUTO
BLACK
SHADING
2D BLACK
SHAD
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
RGB: To adjust the shading
independently for R, G,
and B
RB: To adjust R and B
according to G
R, G, and B values can be
set independently. M
(master) value can also be
set for BLACK.
V SAW, H SAW: To
vertically or
horizontally adjust the
slope of shading
compensation
V PARA, H PARA: To
vertically or
horizontally adjust the
irregularity of shading
compensation
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12
dB
Execute by ENTER
ON
ON, OFF
Camera Menu List
151
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
152
Page title &
purpose
No.
<OHB
M05
MATRIX>
[--]
Adjust the colors
at the CCD block
(OHB) to match
the colors among
multiple cameras
(can be stored in
the OHB file)
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
PHASE
0
0, 23, 45, 68, 90, 113,
135, 158, 180, 203,
225, 248, 270, 293,
315, 338
Select an axis (angle) at
PHASE for which the OHB
matrix adjustment is to be
made, and set HUE and SAT
(HUE and SAT can be
adjusted independently for
16 axes).
B
B, B+, MG–, MG,
MG+, R, R+, YL–,
YL, YL+, G–, G, G+,
CY, CY+, B–
HUE
0
–99 to +99
SAT
0
–99 to +99
ALL CLEAR
Camera Menu List
Execute by ENTER
Clear the HUE and SAT
values for all PHASE
settings
OHB
MATRIX
ON
ON, OFF
Always ON in Cine mode
MATRIX
OFF
ON, OFF
Always OFF in Cine mode
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
<AUTO IRIS>
Auto iris
adjustment
M06
[M02]
AUTO IRIS
OFF
ON, OFF
Fixed to OFF with Select
FPS formats
WINDOW
1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Select the auto iris windows:
The shaded parts indicate
the area where light
detection occurs.
OVERRIDE
--
–99 to +99, --
Set the override to
temporarily change the
reference value for
brightness of the automatic
iris level, in the range of ±2
steps:
–99: Two steps to fully
closed iris
+99: Two steps to fully open
iris
The setting returns to
“0” when the power is
turned off.
IRIS LEVEL
0
–99 to +99
±4 steps
APL RATIO
65
–99 to +99
Adjust the response of the
iris for high-luminance
subjects
IRIS GAIN
0
–99 to +99
Adjust the iris operation
sensitivity
IRIS CLOSE
OFF
ON, OFF
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
153
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
154
Page title &
purpose
No.
<OUTPUT
M07
FORMAT>
[M03]
Select the output
video format
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
CURRENT
23.98PsF
422
Display only
NEXT
23.98PsF
422
Display only
SCAN
PROGRESSIVE PROGRESSIVE,
INTERLACE
FRAME
23.98
23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, Appears when
50, 59.94
PROGRESSIVE is selected
for SCAN.
FIELD
59.94
59.94, 50
SIGNAL
4:2:2
4:2:2, 4:4:4 SQ,
4:4:4 HQ, 4:4:4 12
SELECT FPS OFF
(appears only
when the
optional
HKSR-9002 is
installed)
ON, OFF
SET FORMAT
Execute by ENTER
Appears when
INTERLACE is selected for
SCAN.
<DOWN
M08
CONVERTER> [M04]
Set the aspect
ratio for VBS
output
ASPECT
LB
SQ, LB, EC
SQ: Squeeze
LB: Letter Box
EC: Edge Crop
<POWER
M09
SAVE>
[M05]
Select the output
power save mode
MONITOR
OUT
ACTIVE
PWR SAVE,
ACTIVE
Fixed to the default value
for AC ADP
DOWN
ACTIVE
CONVERTER
(VBS/RMVIDEO)
PWR SAVE,
ACTIVE
REMOTE
PWR SAVE,
ACTIVE
Camera Menu List
ACTIVE
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
<BATT ALARM M10
SET>
[M06]
Set the voltage
values to trigger
alarm indications
for each battery
<GENLOCK> M11
Adjusting
[M07]
Genlock with
status indications
<DATE>
Set the built-in
clock
M12
[M08]
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
BATT TYPE
BP-GL
NEAR END
11.9(AC),
13.0(Li),
13.1(BP-GL),
13.0(OTHERS1,
2)
AC ADP, LITHIUM, For settings about
BP-GL, OTHERS1, remaining battery power,
OTHERS2
see item “BATTERY” (page
184) in “VTR Menu List”.
11.0 to 15.0 V
END
11.0 V
11.0 to 12.0 V
DCIN TYPE
AC ADP
AC ADP, LITHIUM,
BPGL, OTHERS1,
OTHERS2
NEAR END
11.9(AC),
11.0 to 15.0 V
13.0(Li),
13.1(BP-GL),
13.0(OTHERS1,
2)
END
11.0 V
11.0 to 12.0 V
REFERENCE GENLOCK
IN
INTERNAL,
GENLOCK IN,
AUX IN
STATUS
OK, NG, NO
SIGNAL
Display only
H PHASE
0
–511 to +511
Adjust the H phase for
genlock
GL MODE
MON
MON, SDI
Select an output source for
H phase synchronization
(when the optional HKSR9001 is installed)
DATE/TIME
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
yyyy/mm/dd
hh : mm
Camera Menu List
155
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
<OTHERS 1>
Set various
subsidiary
functions
M13
FAN MODE
[M09]
(U22 or
U23
when the
optional
HKSR9002 is
installed)
Default
Settings
Remarks
AUTO1
AUTO1, AUTO2,
MIN, MAX
Select the operation modes
of the fans
AUTO1: Automatically
controlled according to
the internal
temperature, quiet
during recording.
AUTO2: Normally
controlled in MIN
mode, quieter during
recording (only for
short recording under
ordinary ambient
temperature).
MIN: The quietest fan
operation is maintained
regardless of whether
the unit is recording
(only for use under
ordinary ambient
temperature).
MAX: The fans rotate at the
maximum speed.
For details on fan
operations, see “Checking
the Power Voltage and
Selecting the Fan Mode”
(page 50).
CAM BARS
156
Camera Menu List
OFF
ON, OFF
Turn the built-in color bar
generator on or off
HD-BAR
(VF/MON)
BAR 16:9
(100%)
BAR 16:9 (100%)
BAR 16:9 (75%)
SMPTE 16:9
(BLACK)
BAR 4:3 (100%)
BAR 4:3 (75%)
SMPTE 4:3
(BLACK)
MF-ARIB (75%)
MF-ARIB (100%)
MF-ARIB (+I)
MF-SMPTE (–I, Q)
Select the color bar format
for HD output
SD-BAR
SMPTE
SMPTE, EIA, FULL Select the color bar format
(EBU), 95%,
for SD output
NTSC100%
EBU, PAL100%: With
(PAL100%)
1.000 formats
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
Item
<OTHERS 1>
Set various
subsidiary
functions
M13
AUDIO SG
[M09]
(U22 or
U23
when the
optional IMAGE
HKSR- INVERT
9002 is
installed)
Default
Settings
Remarks
OFF, 1 KHz, OFF
NONE
Turn the 1 KHz sine wave
test signal on or off (when
the color bar selected with
HD-BAR(VF/MON) is
displayed)
OFF
Turn the image-inversion
function on or off (ON to
turn the camera picture
upside-down)
SDI REMOTE OFF
ON, OFF
OFF, CHAR, G-TLY, Specify the function which
R-TLY
enables synchronized
recording of this unit and the
SRW-1/SRPC-1 connected
to the SDI MON1
connector, HD SDI MON2
connector or HD SDI OUT
A/B connectors (when the
optional HKSR-9001 is
installed) by feeding the
SRW-1/SRPC-1 with
recording trigger.
Select the indicator
displayed when Rec Trigger
signals are output from the
HD SDI MON1 or HD SDI
MON2 connector or the HD
SDI OUT A/B connector
(when the HKSR-9001 is
installed).
OFF: Disable synchronized
recording.
CHARA: Flash “REC2” in
the indication area of
the viewfinder.
G-TLY: Light the green
tally of the viewfinder,
and light the tally
indicator of the unit
green.
R-TLY: Light the red tally
of the viewfinder, and
light the tally indicator
of the unit red.
(Be aware that the
indicators light even if
there is no cassette
loaded in the unit or if
the tape ends.)
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
For details on other indications,
see “Outputting Rec Trigger
Signals” (page 60).
Camera Menu List
157
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
<OTHERS 2>
Set various
subsidiary
functions
M14
[M10]
DATE TYPE
5 M/D/Y
1 Y/Mn/D
2 Mn/D
3 D/M/Y
4 D/M
5 M/D/Y
6 M/D
Select the date display mode
Y: Year
Mn: Month (numeric)
M: Month (abbr. in English)
D: Day
F NO. DISP
CONTROL
CONTROL,
RETURN
Select the IRIS position
indication
CONTROL: To display the
value from the unit
RETURN: To display the
value returned from the
lens
V DTL
Y
NAM, G, R+G, Y
Specify from which signal
the vertical detail volume is
to be created
NAM: The highest signal
among R, G, and B
G: G signal
R+G: Additional value of
the R signal and G
signal
Y: Y signal
H/V
H/V, V ONLY
H/V: Change the H detail at
the same time when
adjusting the V detail
V ONLY: Adjust V detail
while maintaining the
H detail
CREATION a)
DTL H/V
MODE a)
158
Camera Menu List
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
Item
Default
<OTHERS 2>
Set various
subsidiary
functions
M14
[M10]
TEST2 MODE 20% STEP
Settings
20% STEP, 10STEP 20% STEP: 20%-steps up
to full scale when
gamma is OFF
10STEP: 10%-steps up to
100% when gamma is
OFF
A.LVL
AWB, A.LVL
A.LVL: Return the white
value to “0” when
STANDARD is
executed
AWB: Return the white
value to the AWB value
when STANDARD is
executed
FPS LIMITER LIMIT
(appears only
when the
optional
HKSR-9002 is
installed)
LIMIT, FREE
LIMIT: Set a limitation on
the variable range of
FPS values
FREE: Remove the
limitation from the
variable range of FPS
values
32 SCENE
FILE
ON, OFF (5)
Turn the function to expand
the number of scene files to
be registered to 32 on or off
SHOCKLESS 1
WHITE
OFF, 1, 2, 3
Specify the transition time
for switching the white
memory (1 is fastest)
VF COLOR
SPACE
AUTO, STD
AUTO: To synchronize
with the camera’s color
space
STD: To fix to F900
WHITE
SETUP
MODE a)
<OTHERS 3>
Set various
subsidiary
functions
M15
[M11]
Remarks
OFF (5)
AUTO
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
159
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title &
purpose
No.
Item
Default
Settings
Remarks
<TIME
CODE1>
Set timecode
settings
M16
[M12]
TIMER SEL
TC
CTL, TC, UBIT
See “TIMER SEL” (page
172).
TIMER
RESET
EXEC
TIMER
PRESET
<TIME
CODE2>
Set timecode
settings
M17
[M13]
See “TIMER RESET” (page
172).
TCG TC, TCG
UBIT, CTL
See “TIMER PRESET”
(page 172).
TCR SEL
LTC
AUTO, LTC, VITC
See “TCR SEL” (page 172).
TCG MODE
PRST
PRST, RGN
See “TCG MODE” (page
172).
REGENE SRC (INT L)
INT L, EXT L, AUX See “REGENE SOURCE”
L, AUX V
(page 173).
RUN MODE
R RUN
F RUN, R RUN
See “RUN MODE” (page
173).
DF/NDF
(DF)
DF, NDF
See “DF/NDF” for “TCG
SET (MAIN)” (page 173).
UBG SRC
TCG
TCG, INT
See “UBG SOURCE” for
“TCG SET (MAIN)” (page
173).
12H/24H
24H
12H, 24H
See “12H/24H” for “TCG
SET (MAIN)” (page 173).
TC OUT
AUTO
AUTO, TCG, THRU See “TC OUT” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
173).
RT REC
OFF
OFF, VITC, V+L,
LTC
RT SET
a) Not displayed in Cine mode
160
Camera Menu List
See “RT REC” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
See “RT SET” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
RT SRC
RTC
RTC, DATE
See “RT SRC” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
VITC REC
TCG
TCG, AUX IN
See “VITC REC” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
LTC DELAY
0
0 to +5F
See “LTC Delay” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
VITC DELAY 0
0 to +5F
See “VITC Delay” for
“OTHERS (MAIN)” (page
174).
FILE Menu
For details on the files, see Chapter 8 “Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data” (page 185).
Note
The markings [F01] to [F04] in the No. column indicate the page numbers in Cine mode.
The pages marked with [ - - ] in the No. column are not displayed in Cine mode.
FILE menu
Page title
No.
Item
Settings
Remarks
<OPERATOR
FILE>
F01
[F01]
READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Read an operator file from a
“Memory Stick”
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by
ENTER
Write the current settings of
the operator file items to a
“Memory Stick”
PRESET
Execute by
ENTER
Set the operator file items to
the factory default values in
internal memory
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Enter a comment for the
operator file to be written to a
“Memory Stick”.
See “Specifying a character
string” (page 125).
Camera code
Display only
Date
Display only
CAM CODE
DATE
Default
SRW-9000
Camera Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
: Enabled in Custom mode only
: Enabled in both Cine and Custom modes
Execute by ENTER : Execute by pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
161
FILE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title
No.
<SCENE FILE>
F02[ - - ] 1
Item
Settings
3
4
5
01
01 to 32
Specify the scene file number
01 to 32 when 32 SCENE
FILE of <OTHERS 2> of the
MAINTENANCE menu is
ON
STORE
Execute by
ENTER
STANDARD
Execute by
ENTER
Read the standard paint data
stored in the reference file
READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Load five scene files from a
“Memory Stick” to the
camera’s memory
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by
ENTER
Write five scene files in the
internal memory to a
“Memory Stick”
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Enter a comment for the
scene files to be written to a
“Memory Stick”
See “Specifying a character
string” (page 125).
Camera code
Display only
Date
Display only
DATE
Camera Menu List
Remarks
To store and load scene files
(paint data): When
storing a file in the
internal memory, specify
the number after
executing STORE.When
reading, only specify the
number.
2
CAM CODE
162
Default
SRW-9000
FILE menu
No.
Settings
Remarks
<REFERENCE>
F03[ - - ] STORE FILE
Item
Execute by
ENTER
Store the current settings of
the reference file items in the
reference file in the internal
memory
STANDARD
Execute by
ENTER
Read the standard values in
the reference file in the
internal memory
READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Load a reference file from a
“Memory Stick”
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by
ENTER
Write the current settings of
the reference file items as a
reference file to a “Memory
Stick”
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Enter a comment for the
reference file to be written to
a “Memory Stick”
See “Specifying a character
string” (page 125).
Camera code
Display only
Date
Display only
READ
(MSt
CAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Load a user gamma table
from a “Memory Stick”
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Display only
CAM CODE
DATE
<USER GAMMA> F04
[F02]
Default
SRW-9000
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title
USER
GAMMA
CAM CODE ------------------- Camera code
Display only
DATE
Date
Display only
Execute by
ENTER
Load a monitor look-up table
from a “Memory Stick”
MLUT
READ
(MSt
CAM)
Camera Menu List
163
FILE menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title
No.
Item
<LENS FILE>
F05
[F03]
STORE
Default
Settings
FILE a)
No.
1
NAME
No Offset
F NO
F1.7
1 to 32
Display only in Cine mode
F1.0 to F3.4
CENTER a)
Set and store the center
marker position:
H: Increasing the value
moves it to the right.
V: Increasing the value moves
it downwards
0
H a)
0
V a)
STORE
a)
WHITE R/G/ ON
B
<LENS FILE>
subpage
Remarks
Execute by
ENTER
ON, OFF
Turn the WHITE R/G/B
compensation by the lens file
on or off
LENS MS
READ/
WRITE
Execute by
ENTER
Jump to the subpage
READ
(MStCAM)
Execute by
ENTER
Load lens files from a
“Memory Stick” (max. 32
files)
WRITE
(CAMtMS)
Execute by
ENTER
Write the current settings of
the lens file items as a lens
file to a “Memory Stick”
FILE ID
Max.14
characters
Enter a comment for the lens
file to be written to a
“Memory Stick”.
See “Specifying a character
string” (page 125).
CAM CODE
Camera code
Display only
Date
Display only
Execute by
ENTER
Store the offset values of the
items specific to the CCD (no
repeated store operation is
necessary even if the CCD is
reattached).
OPERATOR
FILE
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults
USER MENU
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults
M. S.
FORMAT
Execute by
ENTER
Initialize a “Memory Stick”
DATE
<OHB FILE>
F06[ - - ] STORE FILE
<FILE PRESET 1> F07
[F04]
164
Camera Menu List
SRW-9000
FILE menu
No.
<FILE PRESET 2> F08
[F05]
Item
Settings
Remarks
USER
GAMMA
FILE
Default
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults
USER MLUT
FILE
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults
LENS FILE
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults for
all lens files
(ALL) a)
No. a)
1 to 32 (when a Resume the factory defaults
non-serial lens for a selected lens file
is mounted) 1
to 33 (when a
serial lens is
mounted)
CLEAR a)
Execute by
ENTER
REFERENCE
Execute by
ENTER
Restore factory defaults
ON, OFF
ON: Return a specific item in
the reference file to the
factory-set value
FILE a)
10 SEC
OFF
CLEAR a)
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Page title
For details, see “Resetting to
the Factory Defaults” (page
194).
OHB FILE a)
Execute by
ENTER
Return all files except the
OHB file to their factory
defaults
FILE PRESET
(–OHB) a)
<OHB FILE
PRESET>
(<FILE PRESET
2> subpage)
[--]
Jump to the <OHB FILE>
subpage
WHITE
SHADING
(ALL)
Execute by
ENTER
Return all the WHITE
SHADING data in the OHB
file to their factory defaults
BLACK
SHADING
Execute by
ENTER
Return only the BLACK
SHADING setting to its
factory defaults
BLACK SET
Execute by
ENTER
Return only the BLACK SET
setting to its factory defaults
ND OFFSET
Execute by
ENTER
Return only the ND OFFSET
setting to its factory defaults
MATRIX
Execute by
ENTER
Return only the MATRIX
setting to its factory defaults
a) Not displayed in Cine mode
Camera Menu List
165
DIAGNOSIS Menu
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
This menu is for viewing only and no setting is possible.
DIAGNOSIS menu
Page title
No.
Item
Indication
Remarks
<BOARD
STATUS>
D01
OHB
OK, NG
AD
OK, NG
Display only (If NG is displayed, consult
your local Sony representative.)
VPR
OK, NG
<PLD VERSION> D02
<ROM
VERSION>
<OPTION
BOARD>
166
D03
D04
Camera Menu List
VDA
OK, NG
TG
Vx.xxx
Display only
AD
Vx.xxx
Display only
PRE
Vx.xxx
Display only
POST
Vx.xxx
Display only
VDA
Vx.xxx
Display only
CPLD
Vx.xxx
Display only
AT
Vx.xxx
Display only
MAIN
Vx.xx, M/D/Y Display only
NET
Vx.xx, M/D/Y Display only
BOOT
Vx.xx, M/D/Y Display only
HD-SDI
EXPANSION
Display only
When the optional
HKSR-9001 is
installed
PICTURE
CACHE
Display only
When the optional
HKSR-9002 is
installed
FILTER
SERVO UNIT
Display only
When the optional
HKSR-9004 is
installed
3
If the CONTENTS page is appears,
turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to any of USER 1 EDIT
to USER 19 EDIT, and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
If a different page is appears, turn the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial until the desired page
appears, and then press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial to select the page.
You can select pages and items from the
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,
and DIAGNOSIS menus and register them in the
USER menu. By adding frequently used pages
and items to the USER menu, you can work more
efficiently.
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to add, delete and replace menu pages and
settings to configure an easy-to-use USER menu.
Example: To select the USER 2 EDIT page
Creating New Pages
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to add new pages to the USER menu. The
EDIT page contains factory-preset items, but the
USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages are
initially blank. You can register up to 10 items,
including blank lines, on each of these pages.
To create a new page, proceed as follows.
1
4
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Editing the USER Menu
Move the cursor to the location where
you want to add a new item, (this
operation is unnecessary if no item
exists on the page, as shown in the figure
for step 3), and then press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial.
The EDIT FUNCTION screen appears.
While holding down the CANCEL/
STATUS button, press the VF MENU/
DISPLAY button.
The TOP MENU screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to “USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE,” and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page of the menu appears.
5
Move the cursor to “INSERT” and
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The page that contains the most recently
added item appears.
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has
been used before, the most recently accessed
page appears.
6
Add the item.
Editing the USER Menu
167
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
1Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial until
the page that has the desired items appears,
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
2Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to the desired item, then
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The USER 2 EDIT page appears again,
displaying the newly added item.
7
Add more items by repeating steps 4 to
6.
The item selected in step 1 moves to the
position that you selected in step 3.
In the above example, “AS1” is moved to the
top and the other items are moved down one
line.
You can add up to 10 items on one page.
To delete items from a page
Proceed as follows:
1
2
Move the cursor to the item to be
deleted, and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
To insert a blank line
The EDIT FUNCTION screen appears.
1
Select “DELETE,” and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK? Yes
cNo” appears at the upper right.
3
Proceed as follows:
The EDIT FUNCTION screen appears.
2
Select “BLANK,” and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and a blank line is inserted above the
specified item.
To delete, turn the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial to move the cursor to “YES,” and
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Note
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10
items have already been registered.
To change the order of items on a page
Proceed as follows:
Adding/deleting/replacing pages
1
You can add a new page to the USER menu,
delete a page from the USER menu or replace
pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
Move the cursor to the item to be
moved, and then press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
The EDIT FUNCTION screen appears.
2
Select MOVE, and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The previously displayed page appears
again.
3
To add a page
Proceed as follows.
1
Turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to the position where
you wish to move the item, and then
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Editing the USER Menu
Select “USER MENU CUSTOMIZE”
on the TOP MENU screen.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page of the menu appears. If the
menu has been used before, the most recently
accessed page appears.
2
168
Move the cursor to the item above
which you wish to insert a blank line.
If the CONTENTS page appears, move
the cursor to “EDIT PAGE”, and then
If a different page appears, turn the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial until the EDIT PAGE
screen appears, and then press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial to select the page.
the cursor to “ESC” at the top right of the screen,
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
To delete a page
Proceed as follows.
1
On the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, move the
cursor to the page to be deleted, and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
2
3
Move the cursor to where you wish to
add the page, and then press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK?”
appears at the upper right.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
4
Select INSERT, and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Select “DELETE,” and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
3
The selection screen appears.
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to
display the EDIT PAGE page.
To delete, turn the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial to move the cursor to “YES,” and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
To move a page
Proceed as follows:
1
5
Display the EDIT PAGE screen of the
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
Move the cursor to the page that you
wish to move, and then press the dial.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
Move the cursor to the desired page,
and then press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
This adds the number and name of the
selected page above the item selected in step
3.
To cancel the addition of a page
Before pressing the MENU SEL/ENTER dial in
step 5, turn the MENU SEL/ENTER dial to move
2
Select “MOVE,” and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The EDIT PAGE page appears again.
3
Turn MENU SEL/ENTER dial to move
the cursor to the position to which you
wish to move the page.
Editing the USER Menu
169
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
VTR Menu Operations
Displaying VTR Menus
4
Press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The page selected in step 1 is moved to the
position selected in step 3.
In the above example, <PB MIX SETTING>
moves to the “03” position, and the
<MARKER SETTING> and following
pages move down one line.
Returning the USER Menu to the
Factory Defaults
The VTR menu of this unit contains three setup
menus.
• TC Setup menu (page 172)
• AUDIO Setup menu (page 175)
• SYSTEM Setup menu (page 177)
To display menus
Press the menu button (TC, AUDIO, or
SYSTEM) corresponding to the menu that you
want to display.
TC button
Use the <FILE PRESET> page of the FILE menu.
HOME button
SELECT/ENTER dial
BACK button
For details, see “Resetting to the Factory Defaults”
(page 194).
VIDEO button
SYSTEM button
AUDIO button
To return to the HOME screen
Press the HOME button or repeatedly press the
BACK button.
Changing Menu Settings
1
170
VTR Menu Operations
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
move the cursor to the target item.
Cursor
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
2
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial.
A submenu window opens for the selected
item. If the selected item is a command, the
command is executed.
Submenu window
3
Turn the SELECT/ENTER dial to
select the desired setting in the submenu
window if necessary.
A setting window opens.
Setting window
4
Turn or press the SELECT/ENTER
dial to select the desired setting.
To return to an upper level
Press the BACK button.
VTR Menu Operations
171
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
VTR Menu List
TC (Timecode) Setup Menu
The TC (timecode) Setup menu allows you to make settings related to timecode.
• Factory default settings are underlined.
• Square brackets indicate settings as displayed in setting windows (see page 171).
Item
Settings
TIMER SEL
Selects the type of time data to use.
CTL [CTL Timer]: Display the tape running time in
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames format.
TC [Time Code]: Display timecode.
UBIT [User Bit]: Display user bits.
TIMER RESET
Resets the internal timecode generator. Time data is
displayed as 00:00:00:00 (timecode) or 00 00 00 00 (user
bits).
Note
The values read by the timecode reader cannot be reset.
The timecode generator cannot be reset when it is locked to
external timecode or to the values read by the internal timecode
reader.
172
TIMER PRESET
Selects the type of time data to preset to an arbitrary value.
TCG TC: Timecode generated by the timecode generator
TCG UBIT: User bits generated by the timecode
generator
CTL: CTL signal count
TCR SEL
Selects the type of timecode which you want the internal
timecode reader to read during playback.
AUTO [AUTO]: Read VITC when the playback speed is
less than ±1/2 times normal speed, and LTC when the
playback speed is more than ±1/2 times normal speed.
LTC [LTC]: Read LTC.
VITC [VITC]: Read VITC.
TCG MODE
Selects the type of timecode to which the internal
timecode generator synchronizes.
PRST [Preset]: Synchronize to a preset value. You can
use the TIMER PRESET item to preset the initial
value of the timecode generated by the internal
timecode generator.
RGN [Regen]: Synchronize to the timecode selected in
the following item REGENE SOURCE (regenerate).
VTR Menu List
Settings
REGENE SOURCE
Selects the timecode to be regenerated by the internal
timecode generator.
INT L [Internal LTC]: Timecode recorded in the
longitudinal direction on the tape
EXT L [External LTC]: Timecode input to the TC IN
connector
AUX L [AUX LTC]: LTC time data of the multiplexed
signal input to the AUX IN connector (when the
optional HKSR-9001 is installed)
AUX V [AUX VITC]: VITC time data of the multiplexed
signal input to the AUX IN connector (when the
optional HKSR-9001 is installed)
RUN MODE
Selects the timecode generator run mode.
F RUN [Free Run]: Timecode advances without pause
from the time that the system is powered on.
R RUN [Rec Run]: Timecode advances only during
recording.
TCG SET (MAIN)
Timecode generator
settings for the main
timecode
DF/NDF
(Valid only when the
frame frequency of
this system is 29.97
Hz)
Selects the frame count mode.
DF [Drop Frm]: Drop-frame mode
NDF [Non Drop Frm]: Non-drop frame mode
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Item
Note
These settings are valid when the TCG MODE item is set to
PRST.
UBG SOURCE
Selects the source timecode of user bits.
TCG [TCG Source]: The same source as the source of
the internal timecode generator
INT [Internal]: Timecode generated by the timecode
generator. Arbitrary user bits settings (see page 89)
are possible, regardless of the TCG setting.
12H/24H
Selects the CTL display mode.
12H [+/–12H]: 12-hour display mode
24H [24H]: 24-hour display mode
Note
When +/–12H display is selected, the tens digit of the hours
value is dropped for values less than 10.
OTHERS (MAIN)
Other settings related to
main timecode
TC OUT
Selects the timecode output from the TC OUT connector.
AUTO [Auto]: During playback, timecode read by the
internal timecode reader. During recording (including
E-E mode), timecode generated by the timecode
generator is output.
TCG [TCG]: Timecode generated by the timecode
generator is output.
THRU [Through]: Through output of timecode input to
the TC IN connector
VTR Menu List
173
Item
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
OTHERS (MAIN)
Other settings related to
main timecode
Settings
RT REC
Selects whether or not to record the real time in user bits
(see page 89).
OFF [Off]: Do not record.
VITC [VITC UB]: Record in VITC.
V+L [VITC UB+LTC UB]: Record in VITC and LTC.
LTC [LTC UB]: Record in LTC.
RT SET
Sets the real time.
RT SRC
Selects the real time to record in user bits.
RTC [RTC]: Record real time set in RT REC and RT
SET. (Select this normally.)
DATE [DATE]: Record real time of the internal clock
(real time shown as status information in the control
panel display). This does not guarantee that frame
count advances continuously.
VITC REC
Selects the delay for VITC user bits, for use in recording.
TCG [TCG]: User bits are delayed by one frame in both
VITC and LTC (same as previous versions).
AUX IN [AUX IN]: VITC user bits are not delayed. (LTC
user bits are delayed by one frame.)
LTC Delay
Sets the phase difference between the timecode generator
and timecode consisting of the LTC input from the TC IN
or AUX IN connector with the addition of the camera
picture delay.
0 [NO Delay]: Same timing
+1F [+1F Delay]: The generator is delayed by one frame.
+2F [+2F Delay]: The generator is delayed by two frames.
+3F [+3F Delay]: The generator is delayed by three
frames.
+4F [+4F Delay]: The generator is delayed by four
frames.
+5F [+5F Delay]: The generator is delayed by five frames.
VITC Delay
Sets the phase difference between the timecode generator
and timecode consisting of the VITC input from the AUX
IN connector with the addition of the camera picture delay.
0 [NO Delay]: Same timing
+1F [+1F Delay]: The generator is delayed by one frame.
+2F [+2F Delay]: The generator is delayed by two frames.
+3F [+3F Delay]: The generator is delayed by three
frames.
+4F [+4F Delay]: The generator is delayed by four
frames.
+5F [+5F Delay]: The generator is delayed by five frames.
VIDEO Setup Menu
The VIDEO Setup Menu allows you to make Camera menu settings.
To display the Camera menu, press the VIDEO button and select “CAMERA MENU”.
To close the Camera menu, press the FUNC + BACK buttons.
For details on how to operate the camera menu, see “Basic Camera Menu Operations” (page 123).
174
VTR Menu List
AUDIO Setup Menu
Item
INPUT SEL
Input signal selection
Settings
TRACK1
Selects the signal to assign to track 1.
SDI1 [SDI CH1] to SDI12 [SDI CH12] (when the optional
HKSR-9001 is installed), ANA1 [Analog CH1], ANA2
[Analog CH2], OFF
TRACK2
Selects the signal to assign to track 2. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK3
Selects the signal to assign to track 3. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK4
Selects the signal to assign to track 4. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK5
Selects the signal to assign to track 5. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK6
Selects the signal to assign to track 6. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK7
Selects the signal to assign to track 7. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK8
Selects the signal to assign to track 8. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK9
Selects the signal to assign to track 9. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK10
Selects the signal to assign to track 10. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK11
Selects the signal to assign to track 11. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
TRACK12
Selects the signal to assign to track 12. Same settings as
TRACK1 (OFF)
ALL MODE
Specify whether to assign signals to each track at one time.
USER [User]: Select the signal to record to each track
individually.
ALL SDI [All SDI]: Set tracks 1 to 12 to SDI (1 to 12) at
one time.
ALL ANALOG [All Analog]: Set tracks 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and
11 to ANA, and set tracks 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 to
ANA2.
OFF [All Off]: Set tracks 1 to 12 to OFF at one time.
VTR Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
The AUDIO Setup menu allows you to make settings related to audio signals.
• Factory default settings are underlined.
• Square brackets indicate settings as displayed in setting windows (see page 171).
175
Item
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
176
OUTPUT SEL
Track selection (when the
optional HKSR-9001 is
installed)
Settings
CH1
Selects the track to assign to channel 1 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12
CH2
Selects the track to assign to channel 2 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 2)
CH3
Selects the track to assign to channel 3 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 3)
CH4
Selects the track to assign to channel 4 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 4)
CH5
Selects the track to assign to channel 5 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 5)
CH6
Selects the track to assign to channel 6 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 6)
CH7
Selects the track to assign to channel 7 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 7)
CH8
Selects the track to assign to channel 8 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 8)
CH9
Selects the track to assign to channel 9 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 9)
CH10
Selects the track to assign to channel 10 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 10)
CH11
Selects the track to assign to channel 11 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12 (Track 11)
CH12
Selects the track to assign to channel 12 of the SDI output.
Track1 to Track12
PHONE SEL
Selects the audio signals output to the EARPHONES jack.
MIX MODE
Selects the method of mixing audio signals output to the
EARPHONES jack.
ADD [Add]: Simple addition
RMS [RMS]: Multiplied average (root mean square)
AVG [Average]: Simple average
REC LEVEL
Adjusts the audio recording level (see page 92). (This
adjustment is impossible during playback.)
PB LEVEL
Adjusts the audio playback level (see page 86). (This
adjustment is impossible during recording.)
METER TYPE
Sets the audio level meter display range.
PEAK [Full Peak]: Display 0 dBFS as the peak value.
REF [Full Ref]: Display the reference level (+4 dBu) as 0
dB.
FINE [Fine]: Display a scale with 0.25 dB steps centered
around –20 dB.
PEAK HOLD
Selects whether to use the peak hold function.
ON [On]: Use.
OFF [Off]: Do not use.
VTR Menu List
Item
Settings
Track1
Track2
Track3
Track4
Specifies limiter ON or OFF settings for the audio levels
of microphones connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors.
–34dB/Off, –34dB/On, –46dB/Off, –46dB/On, –58dB/Off,
–58dB/On
Track5
Track6
Track7
Track8
Track9
Track10
Track11
Track12
BEEP(PHONE)
Volume of beep tones
output from the
EARPHONES jack
BEEP(BOARD)
Volume of beep tones on
system board
ALARM
Specifies whether to generate alarm tones.
OFF [Off]: Do not generate alarm tones.
HIGH [High]: Generate loud alarm tones.
LOW [Low]: Generate quieter alarm tones.
WARN
Determines whether to generate warning tones.
OFF [Off]: Do not generate warning tones.
HIGH [High]: Generate loud warning tones.
LOW [Low]: Generate quieter warning tones.
ALARM
Determines whether to generate alarm tones.
OFF [Off]: Do not generate alarm tones.
HIGH [High]: Generate loud alarm tones.
LOW [Low]: Generate quieter alarm tones.
WARN
Determines whether to generate warning tones.
OFF [Off]: Do not generate warning tones.
HIGH [High]: Generate loud warning tones.
LOW [Low]: Generate quieter warning tones.
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
MIC LEV/LIM
Microphone level and
limiter settings
(Only when INPUT SEL is
set to “ANA1”, “ANA2” or
“All Analog” and the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connector input selection
switches are set to “MIC”.)
SYSTEM Setup Menu
The SYSTEM Setup menu allows you to make system settings.
• Factory default settings are underlined.
• Square brackets indicate settings as displayed in setting windows (see page 171).
VTR Menu List
177
Item
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
FORMAT
Signal format settings
Settings
LINE
Sets the number of effective lines and the scanning system.
1080I [1080I]
1080P [1080PsF/P]
FRAME
When SELECT FPS is set to “OFF”, sets the operation
frame frequency.
When SELECT FPS is set to “ON”, sets the target frame
frequency.
23.98 [23.98]: Frame frequency 23.976 Hz
24 [24]: Frame frequency 24 Hz
25 [25]: Frame frequency 25 Hz (field frequency 50 Hz)
29.97 [29.97]: Frame frequency 29.97 Hz (field frequency
59.94 Hz)
50 [50]: Frame frequency 50 Hz
59.94 [59.94]: Frame frequency 59.94 Hz
For more information, see “Using the Select FPS Function”
(page 107).
SIGNAL
Sets the sampling method and video signal recording rate.
422 [4:2:2]: 4:2:2 (Y/Pb/Pr), 440 Mbps (880 Mbps for 50P
or 59.94P)
444SQ [4:4:4 SQ]: 4:4:4 (R/G/B), SQ mode, 440 Mbps
(880 Mbps for 50P or 59.94P)
444HQ [4:4:4 HQ]: 4:4:4 (R/G/B), HQ mode, 880 Mbps,
bit length 10
444 12 [4:4:4 HQ 12bit]: 4:4:4 (R/G/B), HQ mode, 880
Mbps, bit length 12
Note
Tapes recorded with the 444HQ or 444 12 setting cannot be
played back on the SRW-5000/5500. Also, certain limitations
apply to when tapes recorded in other 880 Mbps formats are
played back on the SRW-5000/5500.
For details, see “About Recording/Playback Formats”
(page 208).
SELECT FPS
When the HKSR-9002 is installed, selects the operating
mode of the Select FPS function.
OFF [Off]: Do not use the Select FPS function.
ON [On]: Enable Select FPS function with frame rate (FPS)
set on the subdisplay, control panel, or optional AP-1
Assistant Panel.
DUB [DUB (bypass MY)]: Record without using the
HKSR-9002. (Select this when dubbing tapes recorded
using the Select FPS function.)
VTR [VTR]: Enable the Select FPS function, and configure
the frame rate (FPS) on the unit.
For details on the settings, see “Select FPS Function” (page
106).
Note
To record 4:4:4 SQ 50P/59.94P format signals, the optional
HKSR-9002 must be installed, and SELECT FPS must be set to
“ON”.
178
VTR Menu List
Item
Settings
FPS FORMAT
Selects the system format when the Select FPS function is
enabled.
DEF [Default]: Use the factory default settings.
23/24 [23.98/24]
25 [25]
29/30 [29.97/30]
50 [50]
59/60 [59.94/60]
For details on the settings, see “Select FPS Function” (page
106).
3G/DUAL
When the optional HKSR-9001 is installed, selects the
output from the HD SDI A/B connectors.
DUAL [AUX OUT 1.5G]: 1.5G Dual Link
3G [3G]: 3G Single Link
For details, see “What Are Dual Link and 3G?” (page 210).
INPUT
SEL
BARS
TEST SG
Test signal output settings
Note
Powering off the unit returns
the setting to “OFF” (factory
default).
AUDIO
Selects the monitoring or recording target between the
camera picture and the video signal input to the AUX IN
connector. “AUX Input” can be selected only when a 4:2:2
video signal is input to the AUX IN connector.
CAM [CAM]: Camera picture
AUX [AUX Input]: Video signal input to the AUX IN
connector
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
FORMAT
Signal format settings
Turn the internal color bar generator ON/OFF.
OFF [Off]: Output color bar signals.
ON [On]: Do not output color bar signals.
Selects the test signal generated by the internal audio signal
generator.
OFF [Off]: Generate no test signal.
1KHz [1KHz Sine]: Generate a sine wave signal of 1 kHz.
NONE [Silence]: Generate a silent signal.
VTR Menu List
179
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Item
Settings
LCD
LIGHT OFF
Display backlight settings
Determines whether to turn the backlight off after a
specified interval.
DIS [Disable]: Do not turn off.
5sec [5sec]: Turn off after 5 seconds.
10sec [10sec]: Turn off after 10 seconds.
30sec [30sec]: Turn off after 30 seconds.
1min [1min]: Turn off after 1 minute.
3min [3min]: Turn off after 3 minutes.
5min [5min]: Turn off after 5 minutes.
KEYMAP
Key map settings
BRIGHT
Sets the brightness of backlight.
0 to 31 (20)
SAVER
Determines whether to display a screen saver after a
specified interval.
DIS [Disable]: Do not display.
1min [1min]: Display after 1 minute.
3min [3min]: Display after 3 minutes.
5min [5min]: Display after 5 minutes.
10min [10min]: Display after 10 minutes.
20min [20min]: Display after 20 minutes.
30min [30min]: Display after 30 minutes.
1hour [1hour]: Display after 1 hour.
SAVER MSG
Sets a screen saver message.
EJECT
EJECT button
function
DIS [Disable]: Disable the button.
ENA [Enable]: Enable the button.
STOP
STOP button
function
PLAY
PLAY button
function
REC
REC button function
REW
REW button
function
FFWD
F FWD button
function
PAUSE
PAUSE button
function
KEY INHI
Button inhibit settings
180
VTR Menu List
ALL [ALL]: Lock all buttons.
MAP [MAP]: Lock only buttons which have been disabled
with KEYMAP settings.
Item
REC INHI
Record inhibit settings
Settings
STBY OFF
Sets the time after the tape stops until the system enters tape
protect mode (still timer).
1sec [1sec]: After 1 second
5sec [5sec]: After 5 seconds
10sec [10sec]: After 10 seconds
20sec [20sec]: After 20 seconds
30sec [30sec]: After 30 seconds
40sec [40sec]: After 40 seconds
50sec [50sec]: After 50 seconds
1min [1min]: After 1 minute
2min [2min]: After 2 minutes
3min [3min]: After 3 minutes
4min [4min]: After 4 minutes
5min [5min]: After 5 minutes
6min [6min]: After 6 minutes
7min [7min]: After 7 minutes
8min [8min]: After 8 minutes
30min [30min]: After 30 minutes
TRACKING
UNITY [Unity]: Disable tracking control during playback.
VARI [Variable]: Allow manual tracking control during
playback.
AUTO [Auto]: Automatically optimize tracking control
during playback.
ADJUST
Sets the tracking value when TRACKING is set to “VARI”.
–15 to +15 (0)
EOS MODE
NORM [Normal]: When the FUNC + PLAY buttons are
pressed with tape transport stopped, the unit rewinds
for about five seconds and then plays for about 10
seconds. If the recording end point is located in that
section, playback stops at that point and the unit enters
recording pause mode. If the recording end point is not
located in that section, playback continues for about 10
seconds and then stops. The unit enters recording pause
mode.
LONG [Long]: The 10-second search time limit described
above does not apply. Once playback starts, the search
continues until the recording end point is found.
REC REVIEW
NORM [Normal]: Pressing the FUNC+PLAY buttons once
during recording pause mode rewinds the tape
approximately three seconds and then starts playback.
Holding down the FUNC+PLAY buttons rewinds the
tape by the number of seconds that the buttons are held
down (up to 10 seconds) and then starts playback from
that position.
ALL [All]: Pressing the FUNC+PLAY buttons once
rewinds tape to the beginning of the most recently
recorded cut and plays back the cut.
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
SERVO
OFF [Off]: Do not inhibit recording.
ON [On]: Inhibit recording.
VTR Menu List
181
Item
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
EDIT
Settings
IN POINT
Set time data to cue up (Mark IN data). (The time data set is
displayed in the format “IN: xx:xx:xx:xx” in the time data
field of the display.)
TIMER REC
Sets the Timer Rec operating mode when the HKSR-9002 is
installed.
For details on the settings, see “Timer Rec” (page 95).
OFF [Off]: Do not use the Timer Rec function.
MANU [Manual]: Select Manual Timer Rec.
AUTO [Auto]: Select Auto Timer Rec.
Manu
Frm
Selects the number of frames to record in one take when
TIMER REC is set to “MANU”.
1 to 10 Frame (1 Frame)
Auto Frm Selects the number of frames to record in one take when
TIMER REC is set to “AUTO”.
1 to 10 Frame (1 Frame)
Interval
CACHE REC
Specifies the recording interval (hours/minutes/seconds)
when TIMER REC is set to “AUTO”.
Specifies whether to use the Cache Rec function (only when
the HKSR-9002 option board is installed).
For details on the settings, see “Cache Rec” (page 97).
OFF [Off]: Do not use the Cache Rec function.
25%: Use 25% of the memory for the Cache Rec function.
50%: Use 50% of the memory for the Cache Rec function.
75%: Use 75% of the memory for the Cache Rec function.
100%: Use 100% of the memory for the Cache Rec
function.
QUICK REC [Quick Rec]: Record the image at the instant
the REC button is pressed to memory.
RAMP
Specifies the Ramp operating function when SELECT FPS
is set to “ON”.
For details on the settings, see “Using the Ramp Function”
(page 110).
OFF [Off]: Vary the number of frames shot (FPS)
manually with no range limits.
LINE [Auto(Linear)]: Vary the number of frames shot
linearly.
INV [Auto(Inverse)]: Vary the inverse of the number of
frames shot (frm) linearly.
EVEN [Auto(Even)]: Vary the number of frames shot so
that there area the same number of frames for each
frequency.
USER [Auto(User)]: Vary the number of frames shot along
a user-specified curve.
MANU [Manual]: Vary the number of frames shot
manually within preset upper and lower limits.
Auto
Spd1
182
VTR Menu List
When RAMP is set to “LINE”, “INV”, or “EVEN”, sets the
number of frames shot of the ramp start point or the number
of frames shot of the ramp end point (1FRM/FPS).
Item
Settings
RAMP
Auto
Spd2
When RAMP is set to “LINE”, “INV”, or “EVEN”, sets the
number of frames shot of the ramp start point or the number
of frames shot of the ramp end point (1FRM/FPS).
(This is the number of frames shot at the end point when the
number of frames shot of the start point was set with Auto
Spd1. Otherwise it is the number of frames shot of the start
point.)
Duration When RAMP is set to “LINE”, “INV”, “EVEN”, or
“USER”, specifies the time (seconds) from the start of the
ramp to its end.
0 to 30s (0s)
POWER
Settings to reduce power
consumption
Load
Curve
When RAMP is set to “USER”, displays a list of files saved
to a “Memory Stick”.
Manu
Spd1
When RAMP is set to “MANU”, specifies the upper or
lower limit of the number of frames shot (1FRM/FPS).
Manu
Spd2
When RAMP is set to “MANU”, specifies the upper or
lower limit of the number of frames shot (1FRM/FPS).
(This is the lower limit when the upper limit was set with
Manu Spd1. Otherwise it is the upper limit.)
LED
Controls the power indicator.
ON [On]: Normally light.
LOW [Low]: Slightly dim.
OFF [Off]: Disable lighting.
TALLY
Controls the tally indicator.
ON [On]: Normally light.
LOW [Low]: Slightly dim.
OFF [Off]: Disable lighting.
VTR Menu List
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
EDIT
183
Item
Chapter 7 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
BATTERY
Settings relating to
remaining battery power
display
VTR Menu List
Selects the type of battery to attach to the battery attachment
section.
AC [AC Adapter]: AC adaptor
Li-ion [Li-ion Battery]
BP-GL [BP-GL Battery]: BP-GL95
OTH1 [Other 1]
OTH2 [Other 2]
Near
END
(BATT)
For the battery type selected with the previous item BATT
TYPE, sets the threshold voltage to issue a “near-end
(almost exhausted)” warning.
11.0 to 15.0 (13.1 V)
END
(BATT)
For the battery type selected with the previous item BATT
TYPE, sets the threshold voltage to issue an “end
(exhausted)” warning.
11.0 to 12.0 (11.0 V)
DCIN TYPE
OTHERS
184
Settings
BATT TYPE
Selects the type of battery to connect to the DC IN 11-17V
connector.
AC [AC Adapter]: AC adaptor
Li-ion [Li-ion Battery]
BP-GL [BP-GL Battery]: BP-GL95
OTH1 [Other 1]
OTH2 [Other 2]
Near
END
(DCIN)
For the battery type selected with the previous item DCIN
TYPE, sets the threshold voltage to issue a “near-end
(almost exhausted)” warning.
11.0 to 15.0 (11.9 V)
END
(DCIN)
For the battery type selected with the previous item DCIN
TYPE, sets the threshold voltage to issue an “end
(exhausted)” warning.
11.0 to 12.0 (11.0 V)
SOFT VERSION
Displays the software version installed in the unit.
HOURS METER
Display count values of the digital hours meter (totals since
the start of use, or totals during a certain period).
SYSTEM: Total system operation time
DRUM: Total drum revolution time
TAPE: Total tape running time
THREADING: Total number of threadings and
unthreadings
FORMAT LIST
Displays a list of supported formats and the currently
selected format. You can also change the format.
OPTION LIST
Displays a list of the installed options.
Chapter
8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
File Configuration
Notes
• To use a “Memory Stick” to save and read data files,
insert a “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot
on the right-side panel of the unit.
• Some limitations apply to file operations in Cine mode.
You can use the following six types of files on
this unit. Operate in the subdisplay or the Camera
menu.
Operator files
Operator files store operational settings not
related to picture quality.
At shipment, an operator file with default settings
is stored in the unit’s internal memory. After you
change the default settings, you can store the
modified setting data as an operator file on a
“Memory Stick” for later use.
For file operations, use the <OPERATOR FILE>
page of the USER (OPERATION) or FILE menu.
Items stored
The setting items in the OPERATION menu
(page 127) and the customized USER menu
(page 167) are stored.
Lens files
Names of different lenses, their minimum f-stops,
and standard values for these lenses can be
registered in lens files in the unit’s internal
memory (maximum 64 files: 32 files for serial
lenses and another 32 files for non-serial lenses).
Files for lenses equipped with lens extenders can
contain two sets of data for extender ON or OFF.
For non-serial lenses
Select the lens file (File No. 1 to 32)
corresponding to the mounted lens using the
subdisplay or the <LENS FILE> page of the
USER (OPERATION) menu.
For serial lenses
When the lens is mounted, the unit automatically
recognizes the lens name and selects the
corresponding file from the registered files
(maximum 32 files).
Create and modify lens files in Custom mode.
Adjust the necessary items by using the PAINT
and MAINTENANCE menus or the MSU-900/
950 Master Setup Unit. Then store the adjustment
data, by using the <LENS FILE> page of the
FILE menu or by using the MSU-900/950.
You can back up lens files on “Memory Stick”
media.
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
You can store settings and adjustment values as
data files in the unit’s internal memory or on
“Memory Stick” media in order to facilitate later
operations and adjustments. Data files can be
retrieved as required to reproduce stored states.
When you remount a lens after using another lens,
you can easily recall the appropriate
compensation for that lens by loading the
corresponding lens file.
Note
In Cine mode, only retrieval of lens files is possible.
You cannot modify file data or create lens files.
Items stored
The items that are stored in lens files are marked
with “√” in the “L” column of the table in “List of
Items Stored in Files” (page 187).
Scene files
Scene files store data adjusted in the PAINT
menu for specific scenes.
For example, if you store data prepared in
rehearsal for a particular scene in a scene file, the
data can be retrieved to reproduce the same
camera settings for the actual take.
For file operations, use the <SCENE FILE> page
of the PAINT or FILE menu. You can also use the
MSU-900/950 Master Setup Unit for file
operations.
Scene files are stored in built-in memory. You
can also back up scene files on a “Memory Stick”.
File Configuration
185
Note
In Cine mode, scene file operations are disabled.
To use 32 scene files
Set 32 SCENE FILE to ON on the <OTHERS 2>
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Note
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
If you return 32 SCENE FILE to OFF, all scene files No.
6 to 32 are initialized when you next set it to ON. (Scene
files No. 1 to 5 are maintained.)
Items stored
The items that are stored in scene files are marked
with “√” in the “S” column of the table in “List of
Items Stored in Files” (page 187).
Reference files
Reference files store standard settings that can be
used as reference settings when adjusting the unit.
If STANDARD is executed on the <SCENE
FILE> page of the PAINT menu or the
<REFERENCE> page of the FILE menu, or if
STANDARD is selected with the MSU-900/950
Master Setup Unit, manually adjusted values are
reset to the reference values stored in the current
reference file.
At shipment, a reference file with the initial
settings is stored in built-in memory.
The initial settings can be modified, as required,
and then stored in a new reference file.
For file operations, use the <REFERENCE> page
of the FILE menu. You can also use the MSU900/950 Master Setup Unit for file operations.
You can back up reference files on “Memory
Stick” media.
Notes
Note
In Cine mode, you cannot load user gamma files from
“Memory Stick” media.
User MLUT files
This unit is equipped with four types of monitor
LUTs (Look-Up Tables) to apply the types of
gamma to displayed images on monitors and
viewfinder other than that of recorded images.
In addition to these built-in data, user-defined
LUT data can be read. User-defined LUT data can
be created using CvpFileEditor V4.2 (see page
75) and loaded to the camera from a “Memory
Stick”.
For details, refer to “CvpFileEditor User’s Guide
V4.20”.
Note
Monitor LUTs cannot be used with the gammas
belonging to STANDARD and HYPER GAMMA,
because these are gammas intended for checking video
with no modification.
OHB files
OHB files store the offset values of items specific
to the CCD unit. For file operations, use the
<OHB FILE> page of the FILE menu. You can
also use the MSU-900/950 Master Setup Unit for
file operations.
• In Cine mode, reference file data is fixed as the factory
default settings and cannot be modified.
• The adjustment values stored in scene files are relative
to reference file data. If the data in the reference file is
modified, the scene files must also be modified.
In Cine mode, an OHB file can be retrieved
automatically, but the data in the OHB file cannot be
modified.
Items stored
The items that are stored in reference files are
marked with “√” in the “R” column of the table in
“List of Items Stored in Files” (page 187).
Items stored
The items that are stored in OHB files are marked
with “√” in the “O” column of the table in “List of
Items Stored in Files” (page 187).
User-Gamma files
You can create gamma curve data (user gamma)
using the CvpFileEditor application, and load it
into this unit from a “Memory Stick”. This makes
186
it easier to reproduce the look that you want on
this unit.
For file operations, use the <USER GAMMA>
page of the FILE menu.
User gamma files are stored in built-in memory.
They cannot be backed up to “Memory Stick”
media.
File Configuration
Note
List of Items Stored in Files
For details on setting values, see the corresponding items in the table in “Camera Menu List” (page 127).
S: Scene file
R: Reference file
L: Lens file
O: OHB file
Menu page (No. in Custom mode)
<VIDEO LEVEL>
(P02)
<GAMMA>
(P03)
<BLACK GAMMA>
(P04)
<SATURATION>
(P05)
<KNEE>
(P06)
<WHITE CLIP>
(P07)
<DETAIL 1>
(P08)
Item
WHITE [R] [G] [B]
BLACK [R] [G] [B] [M]
FLARE [R] [G] [B]
V MOD [R] [G] [B] [M]
FLARE ON/OFF
V MOD ON/OFF
LEVEL [R] [G] [B] [M]
BLACK [M]
COARSE
TABLE
GAMMA ON/OFF
LEVEL [R] [G] [B] [M]
RANGE
BLACK GAMMA ON/OFF
SATURATION
SATURATION ON/OFF
LOW KEY SAT
RANGE
K POINT [R] [G] [B] [M]
K SLOPE [R] [G] [B] [M]
KNEE ON/OFF
KNEE SAT
KNEE SAT ON/OFF
AUTO KNEE
POINT LIMIT
SLOPE
W CLIP [R] [G] [B] [M]
W CLIP ON/OFF
DETAIL ON/OFF
LEVEL
LIMITER M
LIMITER WHT
LIMITER BLK
CRISP
LVL DEP
LVL DEP ON/OFF
S
√
√
√
R
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
L
√
O
√
List of Items Stored in Files
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
The items that are stored in scene files, reference files, lens files, and OHB files are listed in the table
below.
187
Menu page (No. in Custom mode)
<DETAIL 2>
(P09)
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
<SKIN DETAIL>
(P10)
<USER MATRIX>
(P11)
<MULTI MATRIX>
(P12)
<SHUTTER>
(P13)
<NOISE SUPPRESS>
(P15)
<WHITE SHADING>
(M03)
<BLACK SHADING>
(M04)
<OHB MATRIX>
(M05)
<AUTO IRIS>
(M06)
Non-menu items
188
List of Items Stored in Files
Item
H/V RATIO
FREQ
MIX RATIO
KNEE APT
KNEE APT ON/OFF
SKIN DTL ON/OFF
PHASE
WIDTH
SAT
LEVEL
R-G
R-B
G-R
G-B
B-R
B-G
MATRIX ON/OFF
USER MATRIX ON/OFF
MULTI MATRIX ON/OFF
HUE
SAT
SHUTTER
VAR
NOISE SUP
LEVEL
V SAW [R] [G] [B]
V PARA [R] [G] [B]
H SAW [R] [G] [B]
H PARA [R] [G] [B]
V SAW [R] [G] [B]
V PARA [R] [G] [B]
H SAW [R] [G] [B]
H PARA [R] [G] [B]
BLK SET [R] [G] [B]
MASTER GAIN
HUE
SAT
OHB MATRIX
AUTO IRIS
WINDOW
IRIS LEVEL
APL RATIO
IRIS GAIN
ND filter selection
CC filter selection
ND offset
S
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
R
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
L
O
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Removing a “Memory Stick”
Confirm that the access lamp is not lit in red, then
lightly push in the “Memory Stick” to release the
lock.
File Operations
Note
You can use “Memory Stick PRO” media with
the camera module of the unit. “Memory Stick
PRO Duo” can also be used without using a
Memory Stick Duo adaptor.
Unit operations have been checked using
“Memory Stick PRO” media up to 8 GB.
Operations checked with:
MSH-128
MSX-512S
MSX-M2GS
MSX-M4GS
MSX-M8GS
Protecting saved data
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup
data, use the LOCK switch on the “Memory
Stick”.
Slide the switch right to the write protect position.
This ensures that you cannot inadvertently
overwrite data on the “Memory Stick”.
For details on “Memory Stick” media, see “About a
“Memory Stick”” (page 206).
LOCK switch
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
Using a “Memory Stick”
If the access lamp is lit in red, data is being read from or
written to the “Memory Stick” At this time, do not shake
the product or subject it to shock. Do not turn off the
power to the product or remove the “Memory Stick”.
Doing so may damage the data.
Inserting a “Memory Stick”
Insert a “Memory Stick” with the label side up
into the “Memory Stick” slot until it clicks and
the access lamp lights in red.
When the “Memory Stick” is properly set, the
lamp lights in green.
Access lamp
Note
If your “Memory Stick PRO Duo” media does not have
a LOCK switch, be careful not to inadvertently overwrite
or erase your data.
To format a “Memory Stick”
Use the <FILE PRESET 1> page of the FILE
menu.
Label side
“Memory Stick”
Note
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” you wish to
format into the “Memory Stick” slot of
the unit.
2
Display the <FILE PRESET 1> page of
the FILE menu.
3
Move the cursor to M.S. FORMAT and
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may
be turned around or upside-down. Do not force the
“Memory Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of
the notch and arrow on the “Memory Stick” before
inserting the “Memory Stick,” and then try inserting it
again.
File Operations
189
You can add a comment (maximum: 14
characters) to be sotred with the operator file by
specifying it on the FILE ID line.
For details on how to enter a comment, see
“Specifying a character string” (page 125).
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
To retrieve on operator file stored on a
“Memory Stick”
During formatting, “MEMORY STICK
ACCESS” is displayed.
When formatting is completed, “COMPLETE”
appears.
Note
Do not use a personal computer to format a “Memory
Stick”.
Storage and Retrieval of the
Operator File
Use the <OPERATOR FILE> page of the FILE
menu.
The operator file stored in the “Memory Stick”
can be read out into built-in memory of the unit.
1
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
2
Move the cursor to READ (MS t
CAM) and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
Unit settings change to reflect the settings loaded
from the operator file.
To return operator file items to the
factory defaults
Move the cursor to PRESET and press the MENU
SEL/ENTER dial.
You can also use the <FILE PRESET> page of
the FILE menu (see page 194) for this purpose.
Registration and Retrieval of Lens
Files
You can also use the <OPERATOR FILE> page
of the USER (OPERATION) menu (see page 72)
for this purpose.
To store an operator file on a “Memory
Stick”
Before starting, set the operation items and
configure the USER menu to the state that you
want to save.
190
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
2
Move the cursor to WRITE (CAM t
MS) and press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
File Operations
You can retrieve registered lens files by using the
subdisplay or the <LENS FILE> page of the
OPERATION menu.
To register the data you have adjusted for the
mounted lens as a lens file, or to use a “Memory
Stick,” use the <LENS FILE> page of the FILE
menu.
1
For details on how to enter a comment, see
“Specifying a character string” (page 125).
For a non-serial lens, select the No. (file
number), and set the NAME (lens
name) and the F NO (minimum f-stop).
For details about setting file names, see
“Specifying a character string” (page 125).
Note
This step is not required for a serial lens
because these settings are made
automatically.
2
Move the cursor to STORE FILE and
press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
To retrieve
Move the cursor to READ (MS t CAM) and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Storage and Retrieval of the
Scene Files
Use the <SCENE FILE> page of the FILE menu
or the PAINT menu.
Storage of the position settings for the center
marker can be performed independently.
You can check the effect of the WHITE R/G/B
compensation that has been set in the file, by
changing the setting for WHITE R/G/B to OFF.
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
As required, set the items marked with “√” in the
L column of the table in “List of Items Stored in
Files” (page 187) to the state that you want to
store.
To store
Move the cursor to WRITE (CAM t MS) and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
You can add a comment (maximum length: 14
characters) to be saved with the lens file on the
“Memory Stick” by specifying it on the FILE ID
line.
To store the data as a lens file in built-in
memory
Note
The WHITE R/G/B item is provided only for checking
the effect of compensation (comparison between when
the file is used and not used). The file cannot be stored
with WHITE R/G/B set to OFF.
To write the date or retrieve it from a
“Memory Stick”
Move the cursor to LENS MS READ/WRITE
and press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial. The
following subpage appears.
To store a scene file in built-in memory
Set the items for the scene file you wish to store.
1
Move the cursor to STORE and press
the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
2
Move the cursor to the number of the
file in which you wish to store your
settings and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
During the storage process, “MEMORY STICK
ACCESS” is displayed.
When storage is completed, “COMPLETE”
appears.
To retrieve a scene file stored in built-in
memory
Move the cursor to the number of the file that you
wish to retrieve and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
File Operations
191
The state specified in the retrieved file is
reproduced.
Setting 32 SCENE FILE to ON on the <OTHERS
2> page of the MAINTENANCE menu expands
the number of usable scene files to 32.
Note
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
If you return 32 SCENE FILE to OFF, all scene files No.
6 to 32 are initialized when you next set it to ON. (Scene
files No. 1 to 5 are maintained.)
To store a scene files in a “Memory
Stick”
To retrieve the reference file (standard
settings) stored in built-in memory
Scene files stored in the built-in memory of the
unit can be read out to a “Memory Stick”.
Move the cursor to STANDARD and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
To store a reference file to the built-in
memory
2
Move the cursor to WRITE (CAM t
MS) and press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
Set the reference-file items you want to store.
Move the cursor to STORE FILE and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
You can add a comment (maximum length: 14
characters) to be stored with the scene file on the
“Memory Stick” by specifying it on the FILE ID
line.
To store a reference file on a “Memory
Stick”
For details on how to enter a comment, see
“Specifying a character string” (page 125).
To retrieve scene files stored on a “Memory
Stick”
Scene files stored on a “Memory Stick” can be
read into the built-in memory of the unit.
1
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
2
Move the cursor to READ (MS t
CAM) and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
Storage and Retrieval of
Reference Files
Use the <REFERENCE> page of the FILE menu.
192
File Operations
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
2
Move the cursor to WRITE (CAM t
MS) and press the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial.
You can add a comment (maximum length: 14
characters) to be stored with the reference file on
the “Memory Stick” by specifying it on the FILE
ID line.
For details on how to enter a comment, see
“Specifying a character string” (page 125)
To retrieve a reference file stored on a
“Memory Stick”
You can read a reference file stored on a
“Memory Stick” into the built-in memory of the
unit.
1
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the unit.
2
Move the cursor to READ (MS t
CAM) and press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
Unit settings change to reflect the settings loaded
from the reference file.
Reading User Gamma Curves
Execute STANDARD on the
<REFERENCE> page of the FILE
menu.
2
Use the MAINTENANCE menu to set
the items marked with “√” in the “O”
column of the table in “List of Items
Stored in Files” (page 187) to the state
that you want to store.
3
Display the <OHB FILE> page of the
FILE menu, move the cursor to STORE
FILE, and then press the MENU SEL/
ENTER dial.
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory
Stick” slot of the unit. Move the cursor to READ
(MS t CAM) in the USER GAMMA section
and press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Adjusting ND offset values
Reading User MLUT Files
You can read MLUT-curve (user gamma) data
that has been created using the CvpFileEditor
application software and saved to a “Memory
Stick”. Use the <USER GAMMA> page of the
FILE menu.
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory
Stick” slot of the unit. Move the cursor to READ
(MS t CAM) in the MLUT section and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
Storing OHB Files
Use the <OHB FILE> page of the FILE menu.
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
You can read gamma-curve (user gamma) data
that has been created using the CvpFileEditor
application software and saved to a “Memory
Stick”. Use the <USER GAMMA> page of the
FILE menu.
1
The white balance may shift slightly when the ND
filters are used. In this case, adjust the ND offset
values.
The ND offsets hold white balance compensation
values for each filter, using the white balance
when the ND:1 and CC:A filters are selected as a
reference.
1
Switch the camera to Custom mode,
referring to “Switching between the
Basic Operation Modes” (page 40).
2
Execute STANDARD on the
<REFERENCE> page of the FILE
menu.
3
Execute AUTO BLACK on the <AUTO
SETUP> page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
4
Connect a waveform monitor to the HD
SDI MON1 connector or HD SDI
MON2 connector of the unit.
5
Select ND:4 and CC:E and shoot a grayscale chart.
File Operations
193
Check that the lighting permits a video level
in the range of 560 to 630 mV to be obtained,
and write down the current video level.
edited files and reconfigured USER menus to the
factory default settings, either by specified file
type or all at once.
Note
If you cannot obtain a video level in the range 560
to 630 mV, do not adjust the ND offsets.
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
6
Select ND:1 and CC:A.
7
Adjust iris of the lens so that the video
level you wrote down in step 5 is
obtained.
8
Perform the auto white balance
adjustment.
9
Change to ND:2 and repeat steps 7 and
8.
10 Change to ND:3 and repeat steps 7 and
8.
11 Change to ND:4 and repeat steps 7 and
8.
12 Change to ND:1 and CC:E, and repeat
steps 7 and 8.
13 Repeat steps 9 to 11.
14 Store the ND offset values in the OHB
file by executing STORE FILE on the
<OHB FILE> page of the FILE menu.
Note
Be sure to accurately adjust to the video level you noted.
If the level cannot be obtained through iris adjustment of
the lens, use the shutter function or master gain
adjustment.
To load the ND offset values
The appropriate ND offset value is retrieved
automatically when you switch from one ND
filter to another.
To initialize the ND offset values
On the <FILE PRESET> page of the FILE menu,
switch to the <OHB FILE> subpage and then
execute ND OFFSET.
Resetting to the Factory Defaults
By using the <FILE PRESET 1> page and <FILE
PRESET 2> page of the FILE menu, you can reset
194
File Operations
To reset data by file type
To reset the data of the current operator file, user
gamma file, user MLUT file, or reference file
Move the cursor to the corresponding line and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The data in the corresponding file in built-in
memory is reset to the factory defaults.
The configuration of the USER menu can be reset
in the same manner.
To reset the data of the lens files
• To reset the data of all lens files, move the
cursor to LENS FILE (ALL) and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
• To reset the data of a specific lens file, specify
the file number in the No. column and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial. Then move the
cursor to the CLEAR column and press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial again.
• When a serial lens is mounted, the
corresponding lens file can be reset by selecting
33 in the No. column.
To reset the data of the OHB file
Reset items in the OHB file individually.
Move the cursor to OHB FILE and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial. The <OHB FILE
PRESET> page appears.
Chapter 8 Storage and Retrieval of User Setting Data
Move the cursor to the item you wish to reset and
then press the MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
To reset a specific item in the reference
file to the initial setting
The items in the reference file can be reset
individually.
1
On the <FILE PRESET 2> page, set 10
SEC CLEAR to ON.
2
Shift to the menu page on which the
item you wish to reset is located. Move
the cursor to the item you wish to reset,
and then keep the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial pressed.
Continue to hold the MENU SEL/ENTER
dial pressed after the cursor changes to a “?”
symbol.
After about three seconds, the current setting
of the corresponding item is reset to the
initial setting, and “CLEARED” appears.
If you keep the dial pressed for about seven
seconds, the setting of the corresponding
item that is stored in the reference file is reset
to the initial setting, and “REF CLEARED”
appears.
To reset the files and settings all at once
You can reset all files except the OHB file
simultaneously.
Move the cursor to FILE PRESET (–OHB) on the
<FILE PRESET> page, and then press the
MENU SEL/ENTER dial.
The message “POWER OFF TO SET” appears.
Turn off the power.
File Operations
195
Appendixes
Using the RM-B750
• Set VBS of CHAR to ON on the <CHAR/
MARK MIX> page of the USER
(OPERATION) menu.
Settings on the RM-B750
MONITOR button
Appendixes
When the RM-B750 Remote Control Unit
(optional) is connected, you can control the menu
settings of the unit and monitor the camera
images on the display of the RM-B750.
Connection
Using the remote control cable supplied with the
RM-B750, connect the CAMERA connector of
the RM-B750 and the REMOTE connector of the
unit.
MAINTENANCE menu [RM Config]
MAINTENANCE/VF MENU button
This unit
1
Press the MAINTENANCE/VF MENU
button to display the maintenance menu
on the LCD/touch panel.
2
Press [RM Config] on the touch panel to
display the RM configuration menu.
3
Press [Security] to set the unit to
Engineering Mode.
4
Press [SW Setting] to change to the SW
Setting display and set the VF Menu to
Control Enable.
5
Press [Exit] to cancel the menu mode.
RM-B750
Operating the Camera Menu
You can display and operate the Camera menu of
this unit on the display of the RM-B750.
Settings on this unit
Make the following settings in the Camera menu.
• Set RM VIDEO to VBS on the <MONITOR
OUTPUT> page of the USER (OPERATION)
menu.
196
Using the RM-B750
If you press the MONITOR button, a menu page
of this unit will be displayed on the display of the
RM-B750. Pressing the MAINTENANCE/VF
MENU button enables the menus of the unit to be
set from the RM-B750.
For details on the operations, refer to the Operation
Manual for the RM-B750.
Monitoring the Camera Image
Camera images are output as VBS signals and can
be monitored on the display of the RM-B750 and
on a monitor connected to the MONITOR
connector of the RM-B750.
Settings on this unit
Set RM VIDEO to VBS on the <MONITOR
OUTPUT> page of the USER (OPERATION)
menu.
Appendixes
Settings on the RM-B750
Press the MONITOR button.
Using the RM-B750
197
Warning System
When an error is detected immediately after the unit is powered on, or during operation, an message
appears (see A in the following table) on the viewfinder screen, on an external monitor, in the subdisplay
on the right-side panel, and in the control panel display, and the tally indicator (see page 19) flashes (see
B in the following table) to alert you to the error. In addition, warning and alarm tones are output from the
EARPHONES jack and the buzzer mounted on a circuit board inside the unit (see C and D in the following
table).
Notes
Appendixes
• Warning tones are not output unless BEEP(PHONE)/BEEP(BOARD) >WARN in the VTR >AUDIO Setup menu (see
page 177) is set to HIGH or LOW.
• Alarm tones are not output unless BEEP(PHONE)/BEEP(BOARD) >ALARM in the VTR >AUDIO Setup menu (see
page 177) is set to HIGH or LOW.
Layout of the table of warning messages
Message
A
Problem
Tally indicator
B
Operation on the VTR module
Warning tone
C
Action to take
Alarm tone
D
• The operation of the tally indicator is represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning and alarm tones are represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: 1 beep/s
: 4 beeps/s
: Continuous beep
Warning indications/tones
Message
Tally indicator
See “Warning
–
messages” (page 203).
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
A warning message
Continues operation.
condition occurred
(except “0060 LOST
LOCK” described
below).
Message
Tally indicator
a)
0060 LOST LOCK
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
Servo lock lost during Recording continues, but
recording.
the results may be invalid.
198
Warning System
Warning tone
–
Alarm tone
–
Action to take
Check the warning message, and resolve the condition,
referring to the “Description” column in the table of
“Warning messages” (page 203).
Warning tone
b)
Alarm tone
–
Action to take
Turn off the power and contact a Sony service
representative.
Message
Tally indicator
See “Error messages”
(page 201).
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
An error occurred
Continues operation or
(except “0050 NO
stops, depending on the
REC RF”).
type of error.
Warning tone
Action to take
Tally indicator
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
Recording continues, but
the results may be invalid.
Action to take
Message
–
Tally indicator
Warning tone
–
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
Operation continues.
Tally indicator
• Recording error
occurred.
• RF signals cannot be
detected.
• Video head clogging
or failure in recording
system.
Near tape end.
Message
–
Problem
Tape end.
Message
–
Problem
Battery is almost
exhausted. c)
Message
–
Operation on the VTR
module
Recording, playback, and
fast forward stop.
Tally indicator
Operation on the VTR
module
Operation continues.
Tally indicator
Problem
Operation on the VTR
module
Battery is exhausted. c) Operation stops.
a) Flashes only during recording.
b) Output only during recording.
c) You can use the battery level/external power display
in the control panel display (see page 26 and page 29),
on the viewfinder screen, on an external monitor, and
Clean the video heads.
If recording fails after head cleaning, turn off the power
and contact a Sony service representative.
Appendixes
Check the error message, and resolve the condition,
referring to the “Description” column in the table of
“Error messages” (page 201). Or contact a Sony service
representative.
If a slack error occurs, refer to the maintenance manual
and remove the cassette, or contact a Sony service
representative.
Warning tone
Alarm tone
b)
–
Message
0050 NO REC RF
a)
Alarm tone
–
Alarm tone
b)
Action to take
Prepare an exchange cassette.
Warning tone
Alarm tone
–
Action to take
Exchange the cassette, or rewind the tape.
Warning tone
–
Alarm tone
b)
Action to take
Exchange the battery.
Warning tone
–
Alarm tone
Action to take
Exchange the battery.
in the subdisplay to check the state of the battery (see
page 50 and page 68).
Warning System
199
Warning/Error Messages
Warning and Error Messages Related to the Camera Module
If low battery power is detected, or if an error or other abnormal condition occurs on power on or during
operation, the RUN indicator flashes and alarm message flash on the viewfinder, on an external monitor,
and in the subdisplay.
Appendixes
Viewfinder screen
Basic status
Message
display (see
page 61)
BATT flashes
BATT flashes
OHB FAN NG!
MAIN FAN NG!
OHB NG!
AD BOARD NG!
VDA BOARD NG!
VPR BOARD NG!
XXXX
VTR ERROR
TEMPERATURE
CARE
TEMP WARNING/
FAN MAX
POWER OFF TO SET
CAM ERROR!
POWER OFF->ON
REF UNLOCK
VTR WARNING
XXXX
200
RUN indicator Meaning
BATT flashes
Flashes
BATT flashes
quickly
SHUTDOWN
CAMERA/FAN MAX
CAM?
CAM?
CAM?
CAM?
Subdisplay
Warning/Error Messages
Power voltage is low (has reached
the specified NEAR END value).
Flashes quickly Power voltage is exhausted (has
reached the specified END value).
The unit must be powered off for
safety. FAN MODE has been
forcibly set to MAX.
The fan near the CCD has stopped.
The fan in the main unit has
stopped.
CCD unit error
AD board error
VDA board error
VPR board error
Error in the VTR module
XXXX: error code (see page 201)
The temperature inside the unit is
high.
The temperature inside the unit has
risen to the limit. FAN MODE has
been forcibly set to MAX.
Memory checksum error or other
error occurred.
The unit must be powered off.
Changing formats or other
operation failed.
The unit must be powered off and
on again.
When REFERENCE on the
<GENLOCK> page of the Camera
>MAINTENANCE menu is set to
GENLOCK IN or AUX IN, an
improper signal was detected.
Warning in the VTR module
XXXX: error code (see page 201)
Viewfinder screen
Basic status
Message
display (see
page 61)
VDA ROM
MISMATCH
ANOTHER TYPE
OHB
Subdisplay
Error Messages Related to the
VTR Module
Example:
Popup window displaying error
message “007F HUMID ERROR”
(condensation detected)
A wrong VDA_PLD version has
written.
Software (ROM data) for the
camera module does not match to
the CCD unit.
If the error involved the tape transport
mechanisms (SLACK-35, etc.), contact a Sony
service representative.
For other errors, power the unit off and on again.
If the same error message appears again when the
unit is powered on, contact a Sony service
representative.
Appendixes
When the unit stops operating correctly because
of an internal error, a warning tone sounds and a
popup window appears on the display of the
control panel with an error message.
Only one message is displayed at one time, even
if multiple errors occur. But the number of current
errors appears at the bottom of the popup
window.
At the same time, a VTR module error message
appears in the viewfinder and in the message
display section of the monitor screen.
RUN indicator Meaning
To close the error message popup window
Press the menu selection button “HOME” or
“BACK” on the control panel.
If you press the HOME button, an error code
appears in the operation status and warnings
section of the control panel display (see page 25).
If you press the BACK button, the same error
code appears in the operation status and warnings
section of the display when you move back as far
as the HOME screen.
The error code remains visible until the cause of
the error is eliminated.
Tape protection mode
To protect the tape and the mechanical parts of
the unit, the servo control system automatically
stops tape transport and the drum motor and
enters tape protection mode when an error occurs.
Cassettes may not be inserted or ejected while the
unit is in tape protection mode.
Error messages
There is one current error.
There are two current warnings (see page 202).
To view the other messages, turn the SELECT/
ENTER dial on the control panel.
When an error message appears
Check the message and eliminate the cause of the
error.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for more detailed
information about the content of error messages, and
about errors not listed here.
Code Message
0010 FAN STOP
0011
0012 ACC POWER
NG
Description
A cooling fan stopped.
Error was detected in
current flow monitoring
circuits. Check the
connected accessories.
Warning/Error Messages
201
Code Message
0014 DC VOLTAGE
DOWN
Appendixes
202
Description
Decline in power
supply voltage was
detected.
0015 BATTERY
The internal
TEMPERATURE temperature of the Info
NG
Battery (battery with a
communication
function such as BPGL95) is over the rated
value.
0050 NO REC RF
Recording error
occurred. Could not
detect RF signal.
0057 EQ NVRAM
EQ NVRAM operating
SUM ERROR
error was detected.
0058 CONT REC NG Continuous recording
TC
error was detected.
005A CONT REC NG Continuous recording
SV
error was detected.
005C TIMER REC NG Timer Rec error was
detected.
005F EQ TEMP NG
Abnormal EQ
temperature was
detected.
0060 SLACK-10
Drum drive voltage
error was detected.
0061 SLACK-11
Drum FG error was
detected.
0062 SLACK-12
Drum PG error was
detected.
0063 SLACK-35
S reel rotation was
detected in stop mode.
0064 SLACK-45
Abnormal ratio of T
reel speed to capstan
speed was detected
during fast forward.
0065 SLACK-75
It is necessary to check
the cassette.
0066 SLACK-70
Servo NVRAM
communications error
was detected.
0067 SLACK-71
System control
initialization command
error was detected.
0068 SLACK-20
Capstan drive voltage
error was detected.
0069 SLACK-21
Capstan FG error was
detected.
006B SLACK-23
Capstan rotation
direction error was
detected.
Warning/Error Messages
Code Message
006C SLACK-24
006D
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
007A
007C
007D
007F
02XX
Description
Capstan speed error was
detected.
SLACK-100
Tension error was
detected during rewind.
SLACK-61
Function cam forward
rotation time-out error
was detected.
SLACK-62
Function cam reverse
rotation time-out error
was detected.
SLACK-63
Tape top detection timeout error was detected.
SLACK-64
Full top detection timeout error was detected.
SLACK-65
Tape end detection
time-out error was
detected.
SLACK-66
Cassette ejection error
was detected.
F-TOP SENSOR FULL TOP sensor error
ERR
was detected.
(Exchange the sensor.)
SLACK-32
S-reel FG error was
detected.
SLACK-42
T-reel FG error was
detected.
SLACK-33
S-reel direction error
was detected.
SLACK-34
S-reel speed error was
detected.
SLACK-44
T-reel speed error was
detected.
HUMID ERROR Condensation detector
detected condensation.
(An error
An error was detected
message related in the camera module
to the camera
(see page 200).
module)
Warning Messages Related to the
VTR Module
If one of the conditions described in the table of
warning messages (see page 203) is detected, a
warning message code appears in the operation
status and warnings section of the control panel
display (see page 25). This section is visible when
the display is showing the HOME screen.
Note
Warning messages do not appear unless the display is
showing the HOME screen. To display the HOME
screen, press the menu selection button “HOME” on the
control panel.
Example:
Message
REC INHIBIT
MODE
0008
INVALID FMT
CONV
0009
TEMPERATURE
LOW
000A
RTC BATTERY
WARN
000C
CP MISSING
000D
CAM MISSING
000E
TEMPERATURE
HIGH
0010
TELEFILE FULL
0011
TELEFILE NO
ROOM
0012
TELE-FILE
BROKEN
Popup window displaying warning message
“VTR: 0010 TELEFILE FULL”
There is no current error
(see page 200).
There are three current warnings.
To view the other messages, turn the
SELECT/ENTER dial on the control
panel.
When a warning message appears
Take any action that may be needed to eliminate
the cause of the warning.
Warning messages
Code
0001
Message
PB FREQ
MISMATCH
0004
NO PB LTC
0005
NO PB VITC
Description
System frequency of
this system does not
match system
frequency on the
tape.
Playback LTC cannot
be detected.
Playback VITC
cannot be detected.
Description
The system cannot
record because of a
record inhibit menu
setting. Or the tape is
not formatted for
recording.
Format conversion is
not possible with the
current settings.
The temperature
inside the unit is
lower than the
specified values.
The battery for RTC
(Real Time Clock)
has been exhausted.
Exchange the battery.
The control panel is
not connected. The
main unit operates
normally without the
control panel. On
how to clear this
message, contact a
Sony service
representative.
An internal
communication error
was detected. Power
off and restart the
unit.
The temperature
inside the unit has
risen.
Telefile memory is
almost full. The next
recording will erase
existing data,
beginning with
oldest.
Free memory in a
Telefile has been
completely
exhausted.
Defect of the Telefile
label on the cassette
was detected.
Change the cassette.
(If this message
appears, playback
operation is not
affected.)
Warning/Error Messages
Appendixes
To check the content of warning messages
Press the SELECT/ENTER dial on the control
panel. A popup window appears to display
messages for the current warnings.
Only one message is displayed at one time, even
if multiple warnings occur. But the number of
current warnings appears at the bottom of the
popup window.
Code
0007
203
Code
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
Appendixes
001A
001C
001D
001E
001F
0020
0022
0030
204
Message
TELEFILE FMT
NG
Description
Telefile format is
invalid in one or
more locations.
TELEFILE RD
Telefile read failure
FAIL
occurred.
TELEFILE WR
Telefile write failure
FAIL
occurred.
TELEFILE WR
Attempt to record
INHI
was made when
entire Telefile is
write inhibited.
NO TELEFILE
Telefile could not be
LABE
recognized.
ACC OVERLOAD Power consumption
by connected
accessories has
exceeded the rated
limit. Make sure that
total power
consumption by
accessories does not
exceed 16 W.
LENS POWER
Stop the power
OFF
supply to the LENS
connector.
DC OUT POWER Stop the power
OFF
supply to the DC
OUT connector.
RM POWER OFF Stop the power
supply to the
REMOTE connector.
VF POWER OFF Stop the power
supply to the VF
connector.
VIDEO PLL
The timing generator
UNLCOK
PLL is not locked to
the reference video
signal.
AUDIO PLL
Audio clock
UNLOCK
generator PLL is not
locked to reference
video signal.
NO SDI INPUT
When the optional
HKSR-9001 is
installed, there is no
valid input to the
AUX IN connector.
Warning/Error Messages
Code
0031
Message
SDI INPUT
UNLOCK
0032
INVALID SDI
DATA
0036
SDI FMT
MISMATCH
0038
MARI RST
0039
PIER RESET
0050
NO PB RF
0051
BAD CH
CONDITION
PB SEG NG
PB TR ID NG
0056
0057
Description
The phase of the
signal input to the
AUX IN connector
does not correspond
to the setting made
on the <GENLOCK>
page (see page 155)
of the Camera
>MAINTENANCE
menu. Check the
setting and the input
signal.
Data of the signal
input to the AUX IN
connector is invalid.
Format of signals
input to AUX IN
connector does not
match system setting.
Abnormality such as
insecurity of
synchronization was
detected during
recording operation.
Check the recording.
This message
generates when a
tape recorded in a
format which the
current system
setting does not
support is played
back.
Playback head is not
reading digital data
from tape.
Playback signal
quality is bad.
Abnormal recording
was detected on the
tape being played
back. Confirm
whether there was an
abnormal operation
or instability in
power during
recording or poweron/off.
Code
0060
0061
0070
0071
0078
02XX
Description
Capstan servo lock
lost during playback
or recording. (This
message remains
even after servo lock
is restored. You can
erase it by pressing
the PLAY button.)
SERVO NOT
The servo control
READY
system is not in
standby because the
unit is in tape
protection mode.
CASSETTE REC The cassette is
INHI
record-protected.
CAM ERROR
An error has
occurred in the
camera module.
Check the viewfinder
indications to find
out what the problem
is.
CAM WARNING A warning-level
error has occurred in
the camera module.
Check the viewfinder
indications to find
out what the problem
is.
CAM COM NG
A communication
error was detected
between the VDA
board and VPR
board. Power off and
restart the unit.
(A warning
A warning-level
message related to error was detected in
the camera module) the camera module
(see page 200).
Precautions
Use and Storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
After use
Always turn off the power.
Appendixes
0067
Message
LOST LOCK
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places:
• Places subject to temperature extremes
• Very damp places
• Places subject to severe vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference
from mobile communications devices
The use of mobile phones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
It is recommended that communications devices
near this unit be powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot
a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not
to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of
the camera.
Condensation
See “Condensation” (page 207) in “Maintenance
and Inspections”
Phenomena Specific to CCD Image
Sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) image sensors.
Precautions
205
They do not indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CCD image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays.
This is related to the principle of CCD image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
Appendixes
The white flecks especially tend to be seen
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
This unit has a compensation function and the
problem may be alleviated by automatic black
balance adjustment (see page 54).
Smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong
spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails
may be produced on the screen, or the image may
be distorted.
Monitor screen
Vertical tails shown
on the image.
Bright object (e.g. strong spotlight,
strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
206
About a “Memory Stick”
About a “Memory Stick”
Precautions
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied
label to the “Memory Stick” labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out
beyond the labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory
Stick” with anything, including your finger or
metallic objects.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory
Stick”.
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory
Stick”.
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a
location that is:
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the
sun
- Under direct sunlight
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data
frequently. In no event will Sony be liable for
any loss of data.
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the
provisions of copyright law. When you use a
“Memory Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be
sure that the material has been recorded in
accordance with copyright and other applicable
laws.
• “Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
Maintenance and
Inspections
Head Cleaning
Note
Do not run the cleaning tape more than six times in
succession to avoid damaging the heads.
Refer to the instructions of the cleaning cassette for
detailed information about cleaning the video and
audio heads.
Condensation
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place
to a warm place, or use it in a damp location,
condensation may form on the head drum. If the
camcorder is operated in this state, the tape may
adhere to the drum, causing a failure or even
permanent damage.
Note
Before moving the unit from a cold place to a warm
place, make sure no cassette is loaded in the unit.
When condensation is detected
If the condensation detection mechanism detects
condensation on the head drum during use, a
popup window appears on the display of the
control panel, displaying the message “VTR:
007F HUMID ERROR” (see page 203).
Appendixes
Use the BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette to
clean the video and audio heads. Read the
instructions included with the cleaning cassette
carefully, as improper usage can damage the
heads.
When you insert the cleaning cassette, it is
automatically ejected after a cleaning operation
which lasts for about five seconds.
If “VTR: 007F HUMID ERROR” appears
immediately after you power the system on
Leave the system powered on, and wait for the
message to disappear. Cassettes cannot be
inserted while the message is visible.
Even if the VTR has no condensation, moisture
collected on tape may cause the tape to adhere to
the drum, which will damage the tape.
This unit can check whether the drum rotates at
the proper speed when it is started, so that tape
adhesion caused by moisture collected on tapes
can be detected. If tape adhesion is detected
during this process, the error message “SLACK50” or “SLACK-51” is displayed. In this case, the
VTR is in tape protection mode (see page 201).
Take out the inserted tape with reference to the
Maintenance Manual and check the tape, for
example, for moisture and adhesion of sticky
substances, or contact a Sony service
representative.
When you suddenly move the VTR from a cold
location to a warm one
Leave the VTR powered off for about 10 minutes,
since some time is needed for the condensation
detection mechanism to work.
Note About the Battery Terminal
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
See the figure under “Error Messages Related to the
VTR Module” (page 201) for more information
about this and other error messages.
When condensation is detected, the unit enters tape
protection mode (see page 201).
Maintenance and Inspections
207
About Recording/Playback Formats
The following table shows how HDCAM SR tapes recorded on the unit are played back on the SRW5000/5500, etc.
Yes: Recordable/playable
No: Not compatible
PB: Playback only
PB(Spl): Video playback of every other frame, with audio muted
Appendixes
Signal
format
Scanning
system
1080/4:2:2
Interlaced
System
frame
frequency
SRW9000
(440/880
Mbps)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SRW1+SRPC-1
(440/880
Mbps)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
29.97
Yes
Yes
23.98
Yes
Yes
24
Yes
Yes
25
Yes
Yes
29.97
Yes
Yes
25
29.97
PsF
23.98
24
25
29.97
Progressive 50
Recording
Rate (Video
NET)
440 Mbps
880 Mbps
59.94
1080/4:4:4
RGB(SQ)
Interlaced
PsF
208
25
About Recording/Playback Formats
440 Mbps
SRW-5000/ SRW5500
5800
(440 Mbps) (440/880
Mbps)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PB(Spl)
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
PB(Spl)
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
Yes
Yes
(HKSR(HKSR5003)
5803SQ
or HQ)
SRW5100
(440/880
Mbps)
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
Signal
format
Scanning
system
System
frame
frequency
Recording
Rate (Video
NET)
SRW1+SRPC-1
(440/880
Mbps)
Yes
1080/4:4:4
RGB(HQ,
10bit)
1080/4:4:4
RGB (HQ
Interlaced
25
880 Mbps
29.97
Yes
Yes
23.98
Yes
Yes
24
Yes
Yes
25
Yes
Yes
29.97
Yes
Yes
12bit) a)
PsF
SRW-5000/ SRW5500
5800
(440 Mbps) (440/880
Mbps)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
No
Yes
(HKSR5803HQ)
SRW5100
(440/880
Mbps)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
PB
(HKSR5103)
Appendixes
SRW9000
(440/880
Mbps)
Yes
a) For SRW-5100/5800, supported by products of serial
number 12001 or later
About Recording/Playback Formats
209
What Are Dual Link and
3G?
When the optional HKSR-9001 is installed in this
unit, you can select output of HDSDI signals.
When HKSR-9001 is installed
Appendixes
HDSDI signal format
4:2:2 (YCbCr) 23.98PsF
to 29.97PsF (59.94i)
4:2:2 50P/59.94P
Output mode
Normal 1.5G Single
Link output
1.5G Dual Link output
3G Single Link output
4:2:2 (YCbCr) 23.98PsF Normal 1.5G Single
to 29.97PsF (59.94i)
Link output
4:2:2 50P/59.94P
1.5G Dual Link output
3G Single Link output
4:4:4 (RGB) 23.98PsF 1.5G Dual Link output
to 29.97PsF (59.94i)
3G Single Link output
This section explains the types of signals that you
can output with HDSDI 1.5G Single Link, 1.5G
Dual Link, and 3G Single Link.
1.5G Single Link
Single Link enables output of HDSDI signals
over a single BNC cable.
The unit can handle 4:2:2 (Y/Cb/Cr)/1080/
23.98PsF to 29.97PsF (59.94i) HD signals. The
HD SDI OUT A and HD SDI OUT B connectors
output the same signals. The number of pixels is
1920 × 1080.
1.5G Dual Link
Dual Link enables output of HDSDI signals over
two BNC cables.
With Dual Link, you can do the following.
• Handle different color spaces
Dual Link allows you to expand color
difference signals to RGB. 4:4:4 (RGB)/1080/
23.98PsF to 29.97PsF (59.94i) HD signals can
be selected.
When you do this, all of the G component and
half of the B and R components are output via
the HD SDI OUT A connector. The other half is
output via the HD SDI OUT B connector.
HD SDI OUT A = G/0.5 ×B’/0.5 ×R’
HD SDI OUT B = None/0.5 ×B”/0.5 ×R”
210
What Are Dual Link and 3G?
• Increase the number of frames
Dual Link allows you to double the number of
frames to 4:2:2 60P.
HD SDI OUT A = Even lines/Odd lines
(alternating on each frame)
HD SDI OUT B = Odd lines/Even lines
(alternating on each frame)
Note
In the SMPTE-372M 4:2:2 60P standard, the active lines
of digital field 2 are different between Link A and Link
B (Link A: line 584 to 1123, Link B: line 583 to 1122).
3G Single Link
You can output HDSDI signals that correspond to
1.5G Dual Link over a single BNC cable.
HDSDI formats supported by the SRW-9000
Format
Frame rate
Effective frame size
HD SDI OUT A
SMPTE
Format
Frame rate
Effective frame size
HD SDI IN/OUT A
HD SDI IN/OUT B
SMPTE
3G Single Link
RGB 4:4:4
30/1.001 PsF
25PsF
24PsF
24/1.001PsF
60/1.001i
50i
1920 × 1080
RGB
*
424M
1.5G Dual Link
RGB 4:4:4
30/1.001PsF
25PsF
24PsF
24/1.001PsF
60/1.001i
50i
1920 × 1080
G
0.5B/0.5R
–
0.5B’/0.5R’
372M
4:2:2 (YCbCr) 60P
60/1.001P
50P
1920 × 1080
Y
CbCr
Y
CbCr
372M
Appendixes
HD SDI OUT B
Y channel
C channel
Y channel
C channel
1.5G Single Link
4:2:2 (YCbCr)
30/1.001PsF
25PsF
24PsF
24/1.001PsF
60/1.001i
50i
1920 × 1080
Y
CbCr
*
*
292M
4:2:2 (YCbCr) 60P
60/1.001P
50P
1920 × 1080
YCbCr
*
424M
PsF: Progressive Segmented Frames
i: Interlace
P: Progressive
*: Same signals as HD SDI OUT A
What Are Dual Link and 3G?
211
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT
PORTFOLIO LICENSE
Appendixes
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
General
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG
LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
Power consumption
Approx. 57 W
Main unit only, during recording in
23.98PsF 4:2:2, and audio input and all
outputs other than output to the
viewfinder are disabled.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i)
manufacturing/sales of any storage media storing
MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii)
distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4 Visual
video information in any manner (such as online
video distribution service, internet broadcasting,
TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product
may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA.
Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE
STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO
80206, http://www.mpegla.com
212
Specifications
Power requirements
11 to 17 V DC
Note
The power consumption of the main unit reaches its peak
while the unit is in 59.94P and rewind mode (REW) and
MIC+48V audio input and all outputs are enabled. Do
not allow the total power consumption of the control
panel and peripherals to exceed 20 W when they are
connected.
Example: When the control panel (1.8 W), AP-1 (1 W),
HDVF-C30WR (5.2 W), RM-B750 (4 W) and WRR861 (1.4 W) are connected, the total power
consumption is 13.4 W.
Operating temperature
0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)
Storage temperature
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to +140ºF)
Operating humidity
25 to 85 % (without condensation)
Mass
6.5 kg (14 lb 5.3 oz) (excluding handle
and control panel)
External dimensions
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE / Specifications
Recording/playback
Recording format
Video: HDCAM-SR 440 Mbps,
HDCAM-SR 880 Mbps
Color space: 4:2:2
RGB 4:4:4
Audio: 12 channels/24 bits/48 kHz
Continuous operating time
Approx. 80 minutes (using BP-GL95)
Recording/Playback time
HDCAM-SR 440 Mbps: 40 minutes
(30P), 50 minutes (24P)
HDCAM SR 880 Mbps: 24 minutes
(50P)
Camera Section
Pickup device
2
/3-inch type Progressive CCD
Method 3CCD, RGB
Aspect ratio
16:9
Effective picture elements
1920 (H)×1080 (V) (for each of R, G, B)
Optical system
F1.4 prism
Built-in optical filters
A: 3200K, B: 4300K, C: 5600K, D:
6300K, E: ND0.3 (1/2ND)
1: Clear, 2: ND0.6 (1/4ND), 3: ND1.2
(1/16ND), 4: ND1.8 (1/64ND), 5: CAP
Appendixes
Unit: mm (inch)
Shutter speed
Angle Mode: 360.0º to 4.3º
Continuous Mode: ECS
Lens mount
Special made rugged 2/3-inch type sony
bayonet mount (B4)
Sensitivity
29.97PsF: T10 ISO480 (2000 lx, 89.9%
reflectance)
Gain selection
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12 dB
Smear level
–135 dB (typical)
S/N ratio
55 dB (typical)
Horizontal resolution
1000TV lines (at center of screen)
5% or higher modulation
Audio Performance
Reference input levels
LINE: +4 dBu
MIC: –34 dBv/–46 dBv/–58 dBv
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
Dynamic range
100 dB or more
Distortion
0.05% or less (at 1 kHz, reference level)
Crosstalk
–80 dB or less (at 1 kHz)
Headroom
20 dB
Input connectors
GENLOCK IN
BNC, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 Ω
TC IN BNC, 0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 10 Ω
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
XLR 3-pin, female×2, LINE/MIC/MIC
+48V
DC IN 11-17V
XLR 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC
AUX IN (when the optional HKSR-9001 is
installed)
BNC, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
SMPTE 292M (12 channeles of
embedded audio)
Specifications
213
Output connectors
Appendixes
EARPHONES
Mini-jack (stereo)
TEST OUT
BNC (switchable)
HD Y/SD composite (character on/off)
HD SDI MON1, HD SDI MON2
BNC×2
HDSDI: SMPTE 292M (embedded
audio, timecode, character on/off)
HD SDI OUT A/B (when the optional HKSR9001 is installed)
BNC×2
HDSDI 1.5G Single Link: SMPTE
292M (embedded audio, timecode)
HDSDI 1.5G Dual Link: SMPTE 372M
(embedded audio, timecode)
HDSDI 3G Single Link: SMPTE 424M
(embedded audio, timecode)
TC OUT
BNC, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
DC OUT
4-pin, (for wireless microphone
receiver), 11 to 17 V DC (max. 0.5 A)
Input/Output connector
LENS 12-pin
REMOTE
8-pin
EXT I/O
5-pin
CTRL (CAM)
CTRL (VTR)
Supplied Accessories
Operation Manual (1)
Lens mount cap (1)
V-shoe plate (1)
V-shoe plate attachment screws (K4×8, 6)
Cable holder (1)
Control panel cable (L) (1)
Optional Accessories
See “Example System Configuration” (page 13).
214
Specifications
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
Lip Sync Compensation
Compensation (Lip Sync compensation) for the
delay of video relative to audio may be necessary,
depending on the video format and system
configuration.
The amount of delay of video relative to audio
depends the video format and the status of the
image-inversion (IMAGE INVERT) function
(see page 76) as follows:
Unit: frames
Video format
59.94i
50i
59.94P
50P
29.97PsF
25PsF
23.98PsF
IMAGE INVERT
OFF
ON
0.5
1
0.5
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
Systems on which compensation must be
performed manually
When you have connected this unit to an SRW-1
+ SRPC-1, and wish to record on the SRW-1
using a microphone connected to the AUDIO
INPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors of the SRW-1 +
SRPC-1, perform lip sync compensation
manually.
Adjust the amount of compensation on the SRW1 side, according to the amount of delay described
above.
If you input timecode to the TC IN connector of
the SRW-1, timecode compensation must also be
performed in the same way.
Appendixes
Amount of delay of video relative to
audio
Systems on which compensation is
performed automatically
The unit’s input module performs delay
compensation automatically when a microphone
is connected to an AUDIO IN connector, and
when multiplexed audio is input to the AUX IN
connector.
Also, when timecode input to the TC IN or AUX
IN connector is regenerated, timecode generator
compensation is performed. In this case, a delay
of 0.5 frames is handled as 0 frames.
Lip Sync Compensation
215
switch 21
turning off after a specified interval
Battery 28
attachment shoe 19
level display 26
voltage indication 62
Battery pack 28
attaching 28
detaching 28
Black balance
adjusting 54
switch 17
Index
Symbols
! display
63
A
Index
ABNORMAL ! display 63
AC adaptor 29
Accessory attachment screw holes 20
Accidental erasure
preventing 83
ADJUST knob 21
AP-1 27
attaching 38
Assignable buttons/switch 17, 18
assigning functions 51
detailed settings 69
Assistant panel 27
attaching 38
attachment screws 20
connector 16
Audio
adjusting levels 92
input 33
input connector 19
input selection switch 19
level meters 25, 62
line input 33
monitoring 92
multiplexing 34
recording levels 86
signal settings 85
AUDIO button 21
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors 19
AUDIO indicator 16
AUTO BLK BAL switch 17
AUX IN connector 19
B
BACK button 21
Backlight
brightness control
216
Index
76
76
C
Cable holder 36
attachment screws 20
CAC-12 33
attaching to the handle 33
attaching to the unit 33
Cache Rec 97
Camera menu
basic operations 123
configuration 121
DIAGNOSIS menu 166
FILE menu 161
MAINTENANCE menu 150
OPERATION menu 127
PAINT menu 141
USER menu 167
Camera picture
comparing with the playback picture 58
inverting 76
monitoring during playback 94
CANCEL/STATUS button 18
Cassette(s) 82
ejecting 20, 21
insertion slot 16
loading 82
preventing accidental erasure 83
remaining tape time 26
unloading 82
Channel condition indication 26
Character data 51
Cine mode 40
Clock setting 39
Color bars 59
Color temperature
filter mode indication 62
selecting 47
Color video monitor 93
Condensation 207
Continuous recording 90
Control panel 20
attaching 36
connection cable 21
connector 16
detaching 36
extension cable 36
CTRL (CAM) connector 16
CTRL (VTR) connector 16
Cursors settings 67
Custom mode 40
D
items stored 187
operations 189
resetting 194
Filter
selector 15
status display 47
FILTER ASSIGN screen 64
Flange focal length 31
Focus position indication 62
Focus reference mark (φ) 16, 18
Formats
detailed settings 77
setting in the Camera menu 77
setting in the VTR menu 78
F-stop value indication 62
FUNC button/indicator 21
FUNCTION display 64
Index
DC IN 11-17V connector 19
DC OUT connector 19
DC power
input connector 19
output connector 19
Display (control panel) 21, 25
backlight 76
screen saver 76
settings 76
Display operations section 18
Dual link 210
Dynamic range indications 48
Files
G
Gain
selecting 47
setting 70
value indication 62
Gamma
selecting 73
tables selecting 52
GENLOCK IN connector 19
E
Earphones
jack 16
LEVEL knob 16
EARPHONES jack 16
EJECT button 20, 21
EOS SEARCH function 91
Error indications 200
EXT I/O connector 16
External connector 16
External device connector 19
H
HD SDI MON1 connector 16
HD SDI MON2 connector 20
HD SDI OUT A/B connectors 19
ON/OFF switch 19
HDSDI output 26
HDSDI signal
output connector 16, 19, 20
Head cleaning 207
HOME 20
HyperGamma 73
F
F FWD button/indicator 23
Factory default settings 72
resetting 194
Fan
selecting the mode 50
I
Image-inversion 76
Interval frame function
ISO sensitivity 48
113
Index
217
J
Jog search
24, 92
K
KEY INHI switch
21
L
Lens
Index
connector 15
mounting 30
LENS connector 15
Lens extender indication 61
Lens files 31, 185
registration/retrieval 190
selecting 49
Lens fixing lever 15
Lens mount 16
cap 15
LIGHT switch 21
LINE 19
Line input 33
Lip Sync compensation 215
LOCK switch 17
Locking the operation buttons 17, 21
M
Marker display 65
Measure hook 16
“Memory Stick” 189, 206
slot 17
Menu
Camera menu 121
operations section 18
VTR menu 170
MENU SEL/ENTER dial 18
setting the operation mode 69
Message area 62
MIC 19
MIC +48V 19
Microphone 33
attaching to the handle 33
attaching to the unit 33
connecting 33
holder attachment screws 20
Monitor
output connector 16, 20
218
Index
playback picture 57
Monitor LUT mark 59
Monitor output 79
setting 57
Monitor picture
applying monitor LUT 57
monitor LUT mark 59
setting 57
Multiplexing 34
O
OHB files 186
storage 193
Operating status (VTR module)
checking 49
during recording 61
Operation modes 40
Cine mode 40
Custom mode 40
switching 40
Operation status (VTR module)
indications 25
Operator files 185
storage/retrieval 190
Optical filters
type indication 62
Output signals
monitoring 79
selecting 56
P
PAGE button 18
PAUSE button/indicator 24
PLAY button/indicator 22
Playback 92
button 22
in color 93
SRW-5000/5500 208
switching to camera picture 94
Playback picture
comparing with the camera picture
monitoring 57
Playback/recording signal 79
Power 28
AC adaptor 29
AC power 29
battery pack 28
checking 29
58
external power supply 26
indicator 16
remaining battery power 26, 29
switch 16
turning on/off 29
Power saving mode 81
Power supply voltage
checking 50, 68
Q
Quick motion effects
99
R
S
Scene files 185
storage/retrieval
191
Index
Ramp function 45, 110, 117
REC button/indicator 23
Rec trigger signals 60
Record
indicator 17
operation button 17, 23
Recording 83
at specified intervals 95
checking 92
from several seconds before you start
recording 97
operation mode indication 61
review 93
timecode 88
user bits 89
Reference files 186
storage/retrieval 192
Remaining tape time
checking 49
display 26
REMOTE connector 19
Remote control 196
connector 19
Reset 72
REW button/indicator 23
RF indicator 26
Riser plate 18
RM-B750 196
RS-232C connector 16
RUN button 17
Screen saver
turning on after a specified interval 76
Select FPS function 106
SELECT/ENTER dial 21
Self-diagnosis information indication 62
SET button 18
Shooting 90
Shutter
detailed settings 71
indication 62
settings 42
Signal formats
indication 26
setting 83
S-LOG 74
Slow motion effects 99
SR Motion 99
Standard gamma 73
Status 61
display 26
selecting indications 62
STOP button 22
Subdisplay (main unit) 18
adjusting the brightness 52
basic operations 41
on/off button 18
selecting pages to display 53
settings 41
Synchronization 19
SYSTEM button 21
System configuration 13
T
Tally indicator 19
ON/OFF switch 19
Tape
Format 208
remaining indication 62
slack 82
transport control 21
Tape transport control buttons 21
fast forward 23
pause 24
rewind 23
stop 22
Target frame frequency 99
TC button 20
TC IN connector 19
TC OUT connector 19
Index
219
Index
TeleFile 89
TEST OUT connector 19
Test signal output connector
Text display 51
Time data
display 25
selecting 87, 92
Time setting 39
Timecode
checking 49
indication area 62
input connector 19
output connector 19
recording 88
selecting 87
Timer Rec 95
auto 96
manual 95
Tracking control 92
Tripod
attachment 35
mounting the unit 35
screw holes 17
19
W
Warning indications 25, 200
Warning system 198
White balance
adjusting 55
memory indication 62
selecting values 47
Z
Zebra patters 66
Zoom position indication
U
User bits
recording 89
selecting 88
User gamma 75
USER menu
editing 167
User setting data 185
User-Gamma files 186
reading 193
V
VCT-14 35
VF connector 15
VF MENU/DISPLAY button
VIDEO button 21
Video formats 77
selecting 46
Video level
compensating 44
Video signals
selecting outputs 56
Viewfinder
attaching 32
220
Index
connector 15
detaching 32
detail adjustment 66
display/setting 61
Viewfinder shoe 15
VTR menu
AUDIO Setup menu 175
basic operations 170
selection buttons 20
SYSTEM Setup menu 177
TC Setup menu 172
18
62
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony
Corporation and is intended solely for use by the
purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the
duplication of any portion of this manual or the
use thereof for any purpose other than the
operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.